You are on page 1of 389

ABB

ACS1000
Medium Voltage Drives

Signal and Parameter Table
Software Version: MSAI5150
Release Date: 03/08/2017

© ABB Switzerland Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

ABB

ABB reserves all rights to this document. Misuse, in particular duplication
and forwarding to third parties, is not permitted.
This document has been checked with due care and attention. However,
should the user find any errors, these should be reported to ABB.
ABB aims to maintain the most modern standard, therefore, entries in this
manual may differ from the actual product.
This product is designed to be connected to and to communicate
information and data via a network interface. It is Customer's sole
responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection
between the product and Customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). Customer shall establish and maintain any appropriate
measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls,
application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of
anti-virus programs, etc) to protect the product, the network, its system
and the interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized
access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/or theft of data or information.
ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, any unauthorized access, interference, intrusion,
leakage and/or theft of data or information.

2/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................ 3

Signal and Parameter Table ............................................................................................... 6
Group 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS ..............................................................................................................7
Group 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS ..............................................................................................................9
Group 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................................11
Group 4 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................................14
Group 5 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................................18
Group 6 INFORMATION .................................................................................................................21
Group 7 CONTROL WORDS ..........................................................................................................25
Group 8 STATUS WORDS..............................................................................................................30
Group 9 FAULT AND ALARM WORDS ...........................................................................................37
Group 11 START/STOP/DIR ...........................................................................................................61
Group 12 REFERENCE SELECT....................................................................................................67
Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS.......................................................................................................74
Group 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................84
Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS...................................................................................................87
Group 16 SYST CTRL INPUT .........................................................................................................92
Group 17 UTILITIES........................................................................................................................96
Group 18 PROCESS SPEED ..........................................................................................................97
Group 19 DATA STORTRANSF ......................................................................................................99
Group 20 LIMITS ...........................................................................................................................107
Group 21 START/STOP/MCB .......................................................................................................110
Group 22 RAMP FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................118
Group 23 SPEED REFERENCE ...................................................................................................121
Group 24 SPEED CONTROL ........................................................................................................125
Group 25 TORQUE REFERENCE ................................................................................................131
Group 26 TORQREF HANDLING..................................................................................................134
Group 27 FLUX CONTROL ...........................................................................................................136
Group 28 DC LINK CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 137
Group 29 SCALAR CONTROL ......................................................................................................139
Group 30 MOTOR PROTECTION .................................................................................................141
Group 31 FAULT FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................................148
Group 32 SUPERVISION ..............................................................................................................151
Group 33 CONSTANT SPEED......................................................................................................154
Group 34 CRITICAL SPEED .........................................................................................................157
Group 35 EXT MOTOR PROT ......................................................................................................159
Group 36 TRANSFORMER PROT ................................................................................................165
Group 37 EXT INV PROTECT ......................................................................................................168
Group 38 OPTIONAL FUNC ......................................................................................................... 170
Group 39 RIDE THROUGH ...........................................................................................................174
Group 40 PID-CONTROL ..............................................................................................................176
Group 41 COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................182
Group 42 LOAD PROTECTION ....................................................................................................217
Group 43 ESP PROTECTION .......................................................................................................222
Group 48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG...................................................................................................224
Group 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................230
Group 51 MASTER ADAPTER......................................................................................................232

MSAI5150 ACS1000 3/389

ABB
Group 52 EC FAN ........................................................................................................................ 234
Group 55 MOTOR DATA 1 ........................................................................................................... 241
Group 56 MOTOR DATA 2 ........................................................................................................... 245
Group 57 MOTOR DATA 3 ........................................................................................................... 246
Group 58 MOTOR DATA 4 ........................................................................................................... 247
Group 60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS ............................................................................................... 257
Group 61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE.......................................................................... 259
Group 62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION ............................................................................ 260
Group 63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION ............................................................................ 265
Group 64 ACTUAL SIGNALS ....................................................................................................... 270
Group 65 SYNCHRON BYPASS .................................................................................................. 273
Group 66 UTILITY ........................................................................................................................ 277
Group 70 DDCS CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 281
Group 72 DI FUNCTION SEL ....................................................................................................... 293
Group 75 OPTION MODULES ..................................................................................................... 295
Group 80 ACT SIGNALS IO3 ....................................................................................................... 297
Group 81 AN INPUT IOEC3 ......................................................................................................... 301
Group 82 DIG INPUT IOEC3 ........................................................................................................ 305
Group 83 AN OUTPUT IOEC3 ..................................................................................................... 306
Group 84 DIG OUTPUT IOEC3 .................................................................................................... 308
Group 85 ACT SIGNALS IO4 ....................................................................................................... 313
Group 86 AN INPUT IOEC4 ......................................................................................................... 316
Group 87 DIG INPUT IOEC4 ........................................................................................................ 319
Group 88 AN OUTPUT IOEC4 ..................................................................................................... 320
Group 89 DIG OUTPUT IOEC4 .................................................................................................... 322
Group 90 D SET REC ADDR ....................................................................................................... 327
Group 91 D SET TR ADDR .......................................................................................................... 329
Group 92 D SET REC ADDR ....................................................................................................... 331
Group 93 D SET REC ADDR ....................................................................................................... 334
Group 94 D SET TR ADDR .......................................................................................................... 336
Group 95 D SET TR ADDR .......................................................................................................... 339
Group 97 PSTD BUFFER............................................................................................................. 341
Group 98 REAL TIME CLOCK ..................................................................................................... 342
Group 99 START-UP DATA ......................................................................................................... 344

Chapter 1 − Fieldbus Control ......................................................................................... 347
1.1 Fieldbus Communication ..................................................................................................... 347
1.1.1 Fieldbus / DDCS Communication ............................................................................... 347
1.1.2 Fieldbus Adapter Configuration .................................................................................. 348
1.1.3 ABB AC400 – Advant Controller Configuration ........................................................... 348
1.1.4 Integer Scaling on the DDCS Link .............................................................................. 349
1.2 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 1 … 17 Transmit and Receive ................................................. 350
1.2.1 Data Set – Definition .................................................................................................. 350
1.2.2 Data Set - Data Flow .................................................................................................. 350
1.2.3 Data Set - Control Structure ....................................................................................... 351
1.3 Fieldbus Interface Data Set 18 … 51 Transmit and Receive................................................ 353
1.3.1 Data Set – Definition .................................................................................................. 353
1.3.2 Data Set – Data Flow ................................................................................................. 353
1.3.3 Data Set – Control Structure ...................................................................................... 354
1.3.4 Special Data Sets 50 & 51 Communication ................................................................ 355
1.4 Statemachine for Fieldbus Control ...................................................................................... 356

4/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
1.5 Example of a Fieldbus Controlled Drive ...............................................................................357
1.5.1 Default Parameter Settings .........................................................................................357
1.5.2 Pre-Conditions ............................................................................................................358
1.5.3 Fault Reset..................................................................................................................358
1.5.4 Charging the DC Link (Switch on the MCB).................................................................359
1.5.5 Start the Motor (Switch Dive to Running) ....................................................................360
1.5.6 Change the Direction of Rotation (Motor is Running with Given Speed) ......................361
1.5.7 Stop by “RAMP STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed) .....................................362
1.5.8 Stop by “COAST STOP” (Motor is Running with Given Speed) ...................................363
1.5.9 Emergency Off (Motor is Running with Given Speed) .................................................364
1.5.10 Emergency Stop (Motor is Running with Given Speed). ..............................................365
1.6 Fieldbus Parameter Settings, Modbus & Profibus Addresses...............................................366
1.6.1 MODBUS – Module.....................................................................................................366
1.6.2 PROFIBUS – Module ..................................................................................................367

Chapter 2 − Fault Tracing ............................................................................................... 374
2.1 Description of Fault Trip Reactions.......................................................................................374
2.1.1 Soft Stop (Trip Reaction) .............................................................................................374
2.1.2 Trip with demagnetization ...........................................................................................374
2.1.3 Trip without demagnetization (fast) .............................................................................375
2.1.4 Trip with zero vector ....................................................................................................375

Chapter 3 − Stop Modes ................................................................................................. 376
3.1 Ramp Stop Mode .................................................................................................................376
3.2 Torque Stop Mode ...............................................................................................................376
3.3 Coast Stop Mode .................................................................................................................376

Chapter 4 − Input and Output Signals IOEC 1 … 6 ....................................................... 377
4.1 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 1 .......................................................................................................377
4.2 Basic I/O-Board IOEC 2 .......................................................................................................379
4.3 Optional I/O Board IOEC 3 ...................................................................................................380
4.4 Optional I/O Board IOEC 4 ...................................................................................................382
4.5 Optional I/O Board IOEC 5 – Synchronised Bypass .............................................................383
4.6 Optional I/O Board IOEC 6 – Synchronised Bypass (only for 2…4 Motors) ..........................384

Chapter 5 − Service and Comissioning Parameters..................................................... 385
5.1 Service Data ........................................................................................................................385
5.2 Group 150 MOTOR PARAMETERS (Partly) ........................................................................387
5.3 Group 152 SINE FILTER PARA (Partly) ...............................................................................388
5.4 Group 191 Diagnostics .........................................................................................................389

MSAI5150 ACS1000 5/389

ABB
Signal and Parameter Table
If information is required beyond the instructions in this manual, contact
ABB as follows:

ABB Switzerland Ltd
Medium Voltage Drives
CH-5300 Turgi, Switzerland

Phone:+41 844 845 845
Fax:+41 58 589 2984
E-mailmvdrives@ch.abb.com

6/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB

Group 1 ACTUAL SIGNALS

1 ACTUAL SIGNALS
Measured and calculated values

01.01 ProcessSpeed [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
Speed based on scaling and Units in group18. Default is 100% at motor maximum speed. (see Figure
18-1)
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1

01.02 MOTOR SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(122.04) Actual motor speed.
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see parameter
50.01

01.03 FILT MOT SPEED [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(160.58) Filtered actual speed.
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see parameter
50.01

01.04 MOTOR SPEED TACHO [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(160.37) Measured actual speed from pulse encoder. This measurement is active if SPEED FB SEL =
ENCODER is selected. (see Figure 50-1) About the Direction of Rotating: When the motor is rotating in
the correct direction and the speed reference is positive, then actual speed SPEED MEASURED must
be positive as well. If this is not the case, the incorrect connection can be located as follows: If the
direction of rotation is correct but actual speed is negative, the phases of the pulse encoder channel
wires is reversed If the direction of rotation is incorrect and actual speed is negative; two phases of the
motor cables are connected incorrectly. If the direction of rotation is incorrect and actual speed is
positive, both the motor and pulse encoder are connected incorrectly.
Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see parameter
50.01

01.06 FREQUENCY [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(161.04) Calculated frequency of the motor.
Unit: Hz Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 Hz

01.07 FILT MOT RMS CUR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(160.40) Measured motor current absolute value (rms).
Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 A

01.08 FILT MOT TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(161.15) Filtered motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 %

01.09 MOTOR TORQUE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(161.03) Motor torque in percent of the rated motor torque.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 %

01.10 FILTERED POWER % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
(161.17) Motor shaft power in percent of the rated motor power.
Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 %

MSAI5150 ACS1000 7/389

scaling: 1000 == 1 01. scaling: 100 == 1 01.09) Calculated motor output voltage. Unit: Type: R Int.20 MotCurrPhaseW_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.19) Measured motor current of phase U. scaling: 100 == 1 01. absolute value (rms).13 RS [ohm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (150. Unit: A Type: R Int.16 ROTOR TIMECONST [ms] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Rotor time constant Unit: ms Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 A 8/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01) Estimated stator resistance Unit: Ohm Type: R Int. W). Unit: A Type: R Int.11 STATOR VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161. scaling: 1 == 1 A 01. absolute value (rms).21 MotCurrUnbalance [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated maximal motor current phase unbalance between all three phases (U.12 MOTOR COSFII ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.18 MotCurrPhaseU_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.19 MotCurrPhaseV_rms [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.10) Actual cosfii of asynchronous machine. scaling: 10 == 1% 01. Unit: mH Type: R Int. Unit: % Type: R Int.14 LS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Stator main inductance Unit: mH Type: R Int. V. ABB 01. Unit: A Type: R Int. Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 A 01.I Signal and Parameter Table .21) Measured motor current of phase W.15 SIGMALS [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Stator stray inductance. scaling: 1 == 1 01.20) Calculated motor current of phase V. scaling: 1 == 1 A 01. absolute value (rms). scaling: 200 == 1 Ohm 01.

16) Measured dc bus voltage. scaling: 10 == 1A MSAI5150 ACS1000 9/389 . scaling: 1 == 1 V 02. scaling: 1 == 1 V 02. (Difference between Udc2 and Udc1).02 DC VOLTAGE UPPER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY M01. scaling: 1 == 1 02. scaling: 1 == 1 V 02. Unit: V Type: R Int.ABB Group 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS 2 ACTUAL SIGNALS Measured or calculated water cooling values 02.03 DC VOLTAGE UPP % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160. Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 % 02. Unit: A Type: R Int. Unit: V Type: R Int.14) Measured dc bus voltage 2 (negative). scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link Unit: % Type: R Int.10) Measured dc bus voltage (Sum of Udc1 and Udc2).09 NP VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.Sts_Above_Limit (160.10 PHASE A INV CURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.04 DC VOLTAGE LOWER [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160. instantaneous).13) Measured dc bus voltage 2 (negative).15) Measured dc bus voltage. Unit: % Type: R Int.12) Measured dc bus voltage 1 (positive).71) Measured inverter current IU (Lf Filter inductance.07 DC VOLTAGE % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.09) Measured dc bus voltage (Sum of Udc1 and Udc2) Unit: V Type: R Int. Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 V 02. scaling: 10 == 1 % 02. scaling: 10 == 1 % 02. scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link. (Difference between Udc2 and Udc1) Unit: V Type: R Int.06 DC VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160. scaling: 10 == 1 % 02.05 DC VOLTAGE LOW % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.08 NP VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.11) Measured dc bus voltage 1 (positive).01 CONTROL MODE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control mode in use: VALUE NAME MEANING 1 Speed control 2 Torque control TORQ_REF_1 effects the output of TORQ REF 3 Unit: Type: I Int. scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link. scaled to the nominal DC-link voltage of the total DC-link.

Unit: A Type: R Int.77) Measured inverter earth current in the filter star.13 PHASE A FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.33) Measured actual inverter switching frequency.14 PHASE C FILTCURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.51) Measured filter current IU (Cf Filter capacitance. Unit: Hz Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1A 02. scaling: 10 == 1A 02.55) Measured filter current IW (Cf Filter capacitance. scaling: 1 == 1 Hz 02. scaling: 10 == 1A 02.12 GROUND CURRENT [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.11 PHASE C INV CURR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160. ABB 02. Unit: A Type: R Int.16 INV AIR TEMP 1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160. instantaneous). scaling: 10 == 1A 02.48) Measured inverter air temperature 1 (ADCVI). Unit: C Type: R Int. Unit: A Type: R Int. instantaneous).75) Measured inverter current IW (Lf Filter inductance. Unit: A Type: R Int. instantaneous). scaling: 10 == 1 °C 10/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .15 SWITCHING FREQ [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (160.

SPEED_ERROR_NEG is filtered through the window function (see Figure 23-1).controller. Unit: rpm Type: R Int. Unit: % Type: R Int.01) Limited speed reference (see Figure 23-1). scaling: see par 50-01 03. Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: see par 50-01 03. Unit: rpm Type: R Int.12) Torque reference after the torque selector block (see Figure 26-1). Unit: % Type: R Int. TORQUE INTEG REF.10) Limited torque reference value in the torque reference chain (see Figure 25-1). scaling: 100 == 1 % 03.04 TORQUE PROP REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. Unit: % Type: R Int.08 TORQUE REF 1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122.06) P-part effect at the output of PID . Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03.ABB Group 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS 3 ACTUAL SIGNALS Measured or calculated values in the speed and torque reference chain. Unit: % Type: R Int.06 TORQUE DER REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122.08) Derivation part effect at the output of the PID-controller. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03. 03. TORQUE INTEG REF and TORQ ACC COMP REF (see Figure 24- 1). TORQUE INTEG REF. Output of PID-controller is formed from the output parameters TORQUE PROP REF.07 TORQ ACC COMP REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122.03 SPEED ERROR NEG [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. Unit: rpm Type: R Int. scaling: see par 50-01 03. scaling: 100 == 1 % MSAI5150 ACS1000 11/389 . scaling: 100 == 1 % 03. Output of PID-controller is formed from the output parameters TORQUE PROP REF.01 SPEED REF 2 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. Unit: % Type: R Int.11) Final torque reference from the speed control chain (see Figure 24-1).10 TORQUE REF 3 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. TORQ DER REF and TORQ ACC COMP REF (see Figure 24-1).07) Integration part effect at the output of the PID-controller. Output of PID-controller is formed from the output parameters TORQUE PROP REF. TORQ DER REF and TORQ ACC COMP REF (see Figure 24-1).02) Speed reference after the speed ramp (see Figure 23-1).09 TORQUE REF 2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122.05) Difference between reference and the actual value.09) Output of the acceleration compensation (see Figure 23-1). scaling: 100 == 1 % 03.05 TORQUE INTEG REF [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03.02 SPEED REF 3 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. If parameter WINDOW_SEL_ON is enabled.

13 USED TORQUE REF % [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161. scaling: 12/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01) Calculated flux actual value of the motor (see Figure 29-1). Unit: % Type: R Int.14) Sum of TORQUE REF 4 and TORQUE STEP (see Figure 26-1). scaling: 10 == 1 03. scaling: 1 == 1 03. scaling: 50 == 1 % 03.20 PID-CtrlDeviation [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Deviation of the PID controller (difference between the reference value and the actual value of the PID process controller).17 RAMPOUT DV/DT [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122.follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40 Index 1) Unit: Type: R Int. ABB 03.15) Speed reference change rpm/s at the output of the speed ramp generator. Unit: % Type: R Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Int. Unit: % Type: R Int.08) Speed reference from the master . scaling: See parameter 50.11 TORQUE REF 4 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03.I Signal and Parameter Table .22 MF1 RDVALUE I2 [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (127.09) Used flux reference value of the motor (see Figure 29-1). Unit: % Type: R Int.21 MF1 RDVALUE I1 [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (127. scaling: 03. scaling: 10 == 1 % 03.12 TORQUE REF 5 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (122. Unit: % Type: R Int.19 PID-Ctrl Act2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled feedback signal 2 for the PID controller. Unit: % Type: R Int.16 FWP [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (130. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03. the TORQUE USED REF will be zero as well.14 FLUX REF OUT [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (130. This is the final torque input for the internal torque controller (see Figure 26 1). Unit: % Type: R Int.13) Sum of TORQUE REF 3 and LOAD COMPENSATION (see Figure 26-1).06 (LIMIT WORD 1) can be checked if the TORQ USED REF is limited by a limiter. Note! In Group 8. Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 % 03. scaling: 10 == 1 03.01 03.03 (FLUX REF) are zero.18 PID-Ctrl Act1 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled feedback signal 1 for the PID controller. If 27.15 FLUX ACT [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.07) Follower Control Word from the master .08) Limited torque reference. scaling: 10 == 1 % 03.08) Actual field weakening point in percentage of nominal field weakening point. Unit: % Type: R Int.follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40 Index 2) Unit: Type: R Int.

12.08 by speed / f MSAI5150 ACS1000 13/389 . scaling: 03. REF1 – speed or frequency: in any application macros used Unit: Type: I Int.05 03.24 Ref1 OverrSystem ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Reference value 1 from overriding system (called COMMREF 1 in signal selection context). 12.ABB 03. VALUE NAME MEANING REF2 speed or frequency used in FACTORY . scaling: 20000 == value defined with Par.follower link to be monitored in the follower drive (Data Set 40 Index 3) Unit: Type: R Int.09) Torque reference from the master .25 Ref2 OverrSystem ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Reference value 2 from overriding system (called COMMREF 2 in signal selection context). scaling: 20000 = value defined with Par.23 MF1 RDVALUE I3 [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (127. HAND/AUTO or SEQ CTRL REF2 torque used in T CTRL or M/F CTRL REF2 PID reference used in PID CTRL Unit: Type: I Int.

scaling: 10 == 1 bar 04.IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1). Value of analogue input 2 . Value of analogue input 3 . Value of analogue input 2 .I Signal and Parameter Table . Value of analogue input 1 .01 External Ref2 [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY External reference 2. Value of analogue input 4 .IOEC1 in % (or analogue input 4 . scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04. scaling: 10 == 1 % 04.IOEC2.05 External Ref1 [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY External reference 1. For further information see group 12 (see Figure 12-2). scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04. Unit: % Type: R Int. Only available for air cooled converters.03 InvWtrCoolPress1 [bar] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled pressure of the cooling water. Unit: °C Type: R Int. Unit: °C Type: R Int.IOEC3 in case of EC fans). Value of analogue input 3 - IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1).08 TrafoTemp2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled winding temperature of the internal transformer.IOEC1 in uS (see Figure 190-1).06 InvAirTemp2 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled temperature inside the inverter.IOEC1 in bar (see Figure 190 -1). mode) 04. Only available for water cooled converters. Unit: uS Type: R Int. ABB Group 4 ACTUAL SIGNALS 4 ACTUAL SIGNALS Measured or calculated values from basic IOEC 1 2. Only available for ACS 1000i.IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1). Unit: bar Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04. scaling: 10 == 1 °C 14/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. The Unit is Hz with scalar motor control mode only. Unit: °C Type: R Int. Only available for water cooled converters. scaling: 10 == 1 rpm / 1Hz (depending on ctrl. scaling: 100 == 1 uS 04. 04. (see Figure 12 1) Unit: Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04. Only available for water cooled converters.07 TrafoTemp1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled winding temperature of the internal transformer. Only available for ACS 1000i. Value of analogue input 1 . Value of analogue input 4 - IOEC1 in °C (see Figure 190-1).04 InvWtrConductivity [uS] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled value of water conductivity.IOEC2 in °C (see Figure 13-4).02 InvWtrCoolTemp [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled temperature of the cooling water. For further information see group 12. Unit: °C Type: R Int.09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase U. Unit: °C Type: R Int. Value of analogue input 2 .

Unit: °C Type: R Int..15 AI4 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 4. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04. See parameter 190.18 AI3 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 3. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04.24 (see Figure 190-2).13. Unit: mA Type: R Int. scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04.IOEC2 in °C (see Figure 13-4).13. See parameter 190..13 AI2 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 2.. (see Figure 13-2) Unit: mA Type: R Int.14 AI3 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 3..20.07. Value of analogue input 4 .29 (see Figure 190-2).18.11 (see Figure 13-2).06.24.23 (see Figure 13-3).11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase W. scaling: 20000== 20 mA 04.13.ABB 04.190. See parameter 13..190. See parameter 13. See parameter 13.13. (see Figure 13-4) Unit: °C Type: R Int.19 AI4 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 4.12. scaling: 10 == 1 °C 04. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04.. Displayed in milliampere when default-scaling value selected. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value. Unit: mA Type: R Int.17 AI2 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 2. Unit: mA Type: R Int. Displayed in miliampere when default scaling value. Unit: mA Type: R Int. Unit: mA Type: R Int.190. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value.. Unit: mA Type: R Int.17 (see Figure 13-3).. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04.25.16 AI1 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 1. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value.29 (see Figure 13-3)... See parameter 190. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA MSAI5150 ACS1000 15/389 ..02.15.10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1 [C] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Measured and scaled temperature of the motor winding phase V. Unit: mA Type: R Int. Displayed in milliampere when default scaling value selected.IOEC2 in °C.. Displayed in milliampere when default-scaling value selected. See parameter 13. See parameter 13.. Value of analogue input 3 . scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04..12 AI1 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Scaled value of analogue input 1..13..19 (see Figure 190-2).

DI7..0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0..21 DI8-14StatusIOEC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 1 board digital inputs DI8 . Status of digital Input DI1..14 ...IOEC1 LOC 1 0. scaling: 1 == 1 16/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated.. scaling: 1 == 1 04..Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated. scaling: 1 == 1 04. Status of digital Input DI8.0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0.0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0..Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.7 .00 rpm DI1-7 IO1 0100001 DI6 DI1 Figure Unit: Type: I Int. Status of digital Input DI1.20 DI1-7StatusIOEC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 1 board digital inputs DI1 ..IOEC2 LOC 1 0. DI7..00 rpm DI8-14 IO1 0100001 DI13 DI8 Figure Unit: Type: I Int. DI14.7 .00 rpm DI1-7 IO2 0100001 DI6 DI1 Figure Unit: Type: I Int.. ABB 04.IOEC1 LOC 1 0..22 DI1-7StatusIOEC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 2-board digital inputs DI1 .I Signal and Parameter Table .

14 ...00 rpm DI8-14 IO2 0100001 DI13 DI8 Figure Unit: Type: I Int. For signal selection and scaling see parameter group 15 (see Figure 15-1).ABB 04. Unit: mA Type: R Int..27 AO2 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Value of analogue output 2 (IOEC2 board) signal in milliampere. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04. For signal selection and scaling see parameter group 15 (see Figure 15-1). Unit: mA Type: R Int. Unit: mA Type: R Int. DI14.IOEC2 LOC 1 0. For signal selection and scaling see parameter group 15 (see Figure 15-1). Unit: mA Type: R Int.23 DI8-14StatusIOEC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 2-board digital inputs DI8 .Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04. Status of digital Input DI8. For signal selection and scaling see parameter group 15 (see Figure 15-1).26 AO1 IOEC2 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Value of analogue output 1(IOEC2 board) signal in milliampere.. scaling: 20000 == 20 mA 04.24 AO1 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Value of analogue output 1(IOEC1 board) signal in milliampere. scaling: 20000 == 20mA MSAI5150 ACS1000 17/389 .25 AO2 IOEC1 [mA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Value of analogue output 2(IOEC1 board) signal in milliampere.0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0. scaling: 1 == 1 04.

Type: I Int.IOEC1 LOC 1 0.01 DO1-6 StatusIOEC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 1 board relay outputs.00 rpm DO1-6 IO1 0100010 DO6 DO2 Figure Unit: .IOEC2 LOC 1 0. scaling: 1 == 1 18/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Status of digital Output DO1...6 .0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0.00 rpm DO1-6 IO2 0100010 DO6 DO2 Figure Unit: Type: I Int.02 DO1-6 StatusIOEC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the standard IOEC 2 board relay outputs.I Signal and Parameter Table .. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated. ABB Group 5 ACTUAL SIGNALS 5 ACTUAL SIGNALS Data values 05. scaling: 1 == 1 05.0 rpm Status ErthIsoClos REM MotSpeed 0. Status of digital Output DO1.6 . Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated..

scaling: 1 == 1 05.09 MotULoadAlmCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated motor underload alarm current according to parameter 42. scaling: 1 == 1 s 05.10 MotULoadTripCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated motor underload trip current according to parameter 42.05 ControlLocation ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Display of active control location. Unit: Type: R Int.01) Data logger 1 STATUS WORD BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 FAULT 1 Fault trigger occurred B1 LEVEL 1 Level trigger occurred B2 ALARM 1 Alarm trigger occurred B3 LIMIT 1 Limit trigger occurred B4 USER_TRIG 1 External trigger occurred B5 TRIG_LEVEL 1 Observed that level + hysteresis has been exceeded in B6 TREND_INITIATING 1 Data logger is initialising B7 OVER_WRITE 1 Data logger internal flag B8 FILLED 1 Data logger buffer is filled B9 TRIGGED 1 Trigger condition detected B10 RUNNING 1 Data logger is armed and collecting data B11 INITIATED 1 Data logger was successfully initialised B12 NOT_INITIATED 1 Data logger was not successfully initialised B13 EMPTY 1 Data logger buffer is empty B14 1 B15 EXTERNAL_TRIG 1 External trigger input Unit: Type: I Int.08 IdealMotCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated ideal motor current according to parameter group 42 (see Figure 42-1). scaling: 1 == 1 05. scaling: 1 == 1 05. scaling: 1 == 1 A 05. Unit: A Type: R Int. Unit: s Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 A 05. scaling: 1 == 1 A MSAI5150 ACS1000 19/389 .04 (see Figure 42-1). scaling: 1 == 1 05.13) Display of application macro in use.06 ApplBlockOutput [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Selected reference value after the application software. Unit: A Type: R Int. Unit: A Type: R Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 Local 2 Local 3 Ext1 4 Ext2 Unit: Type: I Int.03 DATALOG1 STATUS ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (106.ABB 05. Unit: Type: NoType Int.04 ApplicationMacro ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (99.03 (see Figure 42-1).07 BackspLockTimeRem [s] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY The remaining waiting time during active “Backspin lockout function” will be shown here (see Figure 21- 5).

18 MaxInvMagnCur ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated (5. scaling: 1 == 1 A 05. ABB 05.13 ActRunFan/Pump ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Display of active running fan (group) / pump.: 41.17 AutoCoolOnDelay [min] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Waiting time befor the “Auto Cooling” – function will be startet (Par. Unit: A Type: R Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .16 AutoChgFan2Pmp2On [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Elapsed time since fan (group) 2 / pump 2 has been started Unit: h Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 h 05. scaling: 1 == 1 05.10) maximum allowed inverter RMS current during magnetization. not available with ACS 1000i NAME VALUE MEANING FAN 1 1 FAN 2 2 NONE 3 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 h 05.12 MotOLoadTripCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated motor overload trip current according to parameter 42. scaling: 1 == 1 20/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.11 MotOLoadAlmCurr [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Calculated motor overload alarm current according to parameter 42.11 Auto Cooling On Delay time is counting to zero if water conductivity is above alarm limit). scaling: 1 == 1 h 05.30 x 186.01 x 133.05 (see Figure 42-1). scaling: 1 == 1 05.15 AutoChgFan1Pmp1On [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Elapsed time since fan (group) 1 / pump 1 has been started.06 (see Figure 42-1). VALUE NAME MEANING 1 FAN 1 2 FAN 2 3 PUMP 1 4 PUMP 2 5 NONE Unit: Type: I Int. Unit: h Type: R Int. Unit: A Type: R Int.14 ActRunIntTrafoFan ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Display of active running integrated transformer fan.18 = 133. Unit: A Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 A 05. Unit: h Type: R Int.

H Control-Board AMC33 I Control-Board AMC34. Y Trade specific software 2. F Grey Encoder (EPLD). B Function block library. Character (Mark 1 for Software Type) ACS1000 / ACS6000 A Application. X Software is common for several products ACS6000 A Asynchronous Motor Drive (ACS6000 AD). C Cylo (ACS6000c). T PC Tools software. Character (Product Family Mark) ACS1000 C Customized Option.ABB Group 6 INFORMATION 6 INFORMATION Information on the actual software version on the AMC board. T Board test. H HISPIN. M ACS1000 software.02 DTC VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (100. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 21/389 . T Board test. O Loading packages FIDRI A AMCOSI. corrections which has been made on field have a number between 1 …9. 06. Character (Mark 5…8 for Version Number) Mark 5 Interface changes or big function changes (incompatibility with system components) Mark 6 Function changes (functionality has changed) Mark 7 Fault correction (only software faults are corrected) Mark 8 Pre-release/Test SW (0 = official versions have always a “0” on this position. Character (Mark 2 for Target Type) B Pub and Power feed forward (EPLD). X Software is common for several products 3. S Synchronous Motor Drive (ACS6000 SD). I Input bridge software based on ACS600-platform L ACS6000 software. D Control-Board CCB E Interfacebord (EPLD). C Software component (common component). N ARU. the communication control of the DDCS channels and the Modbus software for the control panel.01 SW PACKAGE VER ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (100. E EPLD. C Control. … 8. test versions have at this position the character A…Z) Unit: Type: NoType Int.11) 1. P Control panel software. C Control-Board AMC3.04) Software version of the flux software. Character (Product Mark) A Inverter Software based on ACS600-platform. Unit: Type: NoType Int. This fixed part of the software consists of the motor control. the operational system. P Panel application 4. scaling: 1 == 1 06. F SubFC Drive. T PINT (EPLD) ACS1000 F …Z Special customized software 5. D DC drives software based on ACS600-platform. S ACS1000 Standard Drive. P PAI (EPLD). O Option module software S small AC products family software.

09 CONSUMED ENERGY [MWh] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.03) Time lapsed since auxiliary power supply has been switched on.01) AMC board serial number. Unit: V Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 10 22/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: kVA Type: R Int. Unit: MWh Type: I Int.05 APPL DUTY [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (104. scaling: 1 == 1 % 06.10 INU NOM VOLTAGE [V] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (112. scaling: 1 == 1GWh 06. Unit: Type: NoType Int. Unit: Type: I Int.12 INU MAX POWER [kVA] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Maximum instantaneous power of inverter. Unit: Type: NoType Int.11 INU MAX CONT CUR [A] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (112.08) Application software version can be identified here.08 MOTOR RUN-TIME [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (104. Unit: h Type: R Int. Unit: % Type: R Int.04 AMC SERIAL NUMBER ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (100. The application software is essentially functioning block programming. scaling: 1 == 1 h 06. scaling: 06.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling: 10 == 1 h 06.22) Integrated shaft power in motor mode. Unit: h Type: R Int.06 TIME OF USAGE [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (104. ABB 06.01) Nominal RMS main voltage in inverter output terminals.02) Maximum RMS current of inverter.09) Time lapsed during which the motor has been running. scaling: 1 == 1 06.07 APPLIC BUILD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Application software build version.03 APPLIC VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (100. scaling: 1 == 1 06. Unit: A Type: R Int.02) Microprocessor load measurement. scaling: 06. scaling: 1 == 1 06. Value 100% means overloading of the microprocessor and causes delay in execution of the tasks.

VALUE NAME MEANING 0 6000 SD ACS 6000 direct or brushless synchronous motor control. 16 1000W AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control. 18 1000 RES Not to be used. scaling: 1 == 1 06.18 RealTime YYMMDD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Actual ACS1000 date. 21 1000 RES Not to be used. water cooled. air cooled. Unit: Type: R Int.16 Rlfi [ohm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (152. Unit: Type: Enum Int. scaling: 200 == 1 Ω 06. 20 1000 RES Not to be used. 15 1000A AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control. Unit: Type: I Int. RESERVED 9 AD Not to be used. Note! Maximal number of this parameter is 32767. 1 6000 PMSM ACS 6000 permanent magnet motor control. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 23/389 . 2 5000 SD ACS 5000 direct or brushless synchronous motor control. Reboot required after change of parameter. scaling: 06. RESERVED 8 AD Not to be used. Actual date will be displayed in this parameter where YY = Year. 5 6000 AD ACS 6000 asynchronous motor control. internal transformer. 22 1000 RES Not to be used. 17 1000i AD ACS 1000 asynchronous motor control. 4 5000 PMSM ACS 5000 permanent magnet motor control. 23 1000 RES Not to be used.15 Filter Capacity [uF] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Filter capacity in Micro Farad Unit: uF Type: R Int.13 DRIVE TYPE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (111.ABB 06. 13 TWIN RES Not to be used. 3 6000 RSD ACS 6000 full redundant direct or brushless synchronous motor control. 6 5000 AD ACS 5000 asynchronous motor control.14 Filter Inductance [mH] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Filter inductance in Milli Henry Unit: mH Type: R Int.03) Estimated filter resistance Unit: Ω Type: R Int. 7 AD Not to be used.17 NumOfMotorStarts ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (210. scaling: 1 == 1 06. 19 1000 RES Not to be used.06) Drive motor control mode. 24 1000 RES Not to be used. MM = Month and DD = Day are.15) Number of motor starts. 14 TWIN RES Not to be used. 12 TWIN RES Not to be used. RESERVED 10 6000 TWIN ACS 6000 TWIN (high speed <300Hz) 11 TWIN RES Not to be used. scaling: 100 == 1 06. Note! Leading zeros are not shown.

scaling: 1 == 1 06. scaling: 06.I Signal and Parameter Table .23 INT0 PLD BUILD ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Version number of INT0 EPLD version Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 06.22 INT0 VERSION ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Version number of INT0. Unit: % Type: R Int. Unit: Type: R Int. Unit: Type: I Int. Actual time will be displayed in this parameter where HH = Hour. MM = Minutes and SS = Seconds are.19 RealTime HHMMSS ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Actual ACS1000 time. scaling: 1 == 1 06. Note! Leading zeros are not shown.08) Maximum motoring current (as % of motor nominal current) given by inverter limitations. scaling: 1 == 1 24/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.21 EventMessages ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY NAME VALUE MEANING EventLogger 1 SW InitDone 2 GndSwClosed 3 DoorsOpened 4 EmergencyOff 5 EmergStop 6 INU Tripped 7 8 MCB OpenCmd 9 MCB CloseCmd 10 MCB TripCmd 11 12 13 14 15 INU OffCmd 16 INU OnCmd 17 18 INU StopCmd 19 INU RunCmd 20 21 22 23 ProcessStop 24 25 26 MCB FdbOpen 27 MCBFdbClosed 28 Unit: Type: Enum Int.20 INU MAX MOT CUR [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (133. ABB 06.

drive has stopped Þ Trip 2b) B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”.ABB Group 7 CONTROL WORDS 7 CONTROL WORDS ABB drive profile control word.Bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0- Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0. B6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point (Coast stop) 0 Disable set point. switch off theMCB.Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON B9 INCHING_2 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 2. Actual set point from the ramp- function generator frozen.01 MainControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 ON 1 Command to “RDYRUN”-state (MCB is closed) 0 Command to “OFF”-state B1 OFF 2 1 No OFF2 (Emergency Off) 0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state. B8 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1. if following conditions are fulfilled:. Protection GTO on) B2 OFF 3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop) 0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Stop Þ Stop by ramp.Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_2 was previously ON B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Overriding system is requesting to control the drive. Speed ramp input is forced to zero. if following conditions are fulfilled:. 0 No control from overriding system. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 25/389 . B5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp-function generator (Inching 1 or 2) 0 Speed ramping stopped. same as front door button (Emergency Off Þ Trip 2b Þ stop the drive and switch off the MCB immediately.states (Run command) 0 (Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop by ramp orStop by torque limit) B4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Operating condition (Inching 1 or 2) 0 Ramp-function generator output is set to zero. B7 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a positive edge 0 No significance. 07. B11 RESERVED B12 RESERVED B13 RESERVED B14 RESERVED B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.Bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0- Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0.

I Signal and Parameter Table . for internal use only. B7 WINDOW CTRL Par.02 AuxControlWord 1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary control word BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 TRIGG_DLOG_1 1 Trigger data logger no 1 B1 TRIGG_DLOG_2 1 Trigger data logger no 2 B2 RAMP BYPASS 1 Speed ramp bypassing. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding system) BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 Reserved 1 B1 MCB_ON 1 MCB has been switched ON (condition for state transition) B2 Reserved 0 B3 Reserved 0 B4 (Not used) 0 B5 STOP_FREQ_HOLD_NOT 1 Do not feeze frequency reference value during stopping. For IOEC3 see parameter group 84 and for IOEC4 see parameter group 89 for signal selection B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int. ABB 07.03 AuxControlWord 2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary control word (Interface control word between application software and fixed application (FA).26. negative edge: User macro 1 B14 DO3 CTRL OVER Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system:See SYST parameter group 14 for signal selection. scaling: 1 == 1 26/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01 Set of new real time clock CLOCK SET B6 HOLD NCONT Holding of the speed controller’s output.01 Torque Selector forcing to window control (ADD) B8 BAL NCONT Forcing of speed controller’s output (NOT IN PILOT) B9 (Not Used) B10 (Not Used) B11 (Not Used) B12 DO2 CTRL OVER Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system: See SYST parameter group 14 for signal selection. B7 (Not used) 0 B8 ON_INHIBIT 1 On inhibit command (condition for state transition) B9 MSM_NOTRDYON 1 Not Ready On command to FA (condition for state transition) B10 MSM_NOTRDYRUN 1 Not Ready Run command to FA (condition for state transition) B11 (Not used) 0 B12 (Not used) 0 B13 Reserved 0 B14 Reserved 0 B15 Reserved 0 Unit: Type: I Int. 98. Note! It is not allowed to use the function during an active macro change. For IOEC3 see parameter group 84 and for IOEC4 see parameter group 89 for signal selection B5 REAL TIME Par. scaling: 1 == 1 07. For IOEC3 see parameter group 84 and for IOEC4 see parameter group 89 for signal selection B13 USER MACRO 1 Macro change request. B4 DO1 CTRL OVER 1 Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system:See SYST parameter group 14 for signal selection. B3 BAL RAMP OUT 1 Forcing of ramp output. positive edge: User macro 2 CTRL 0 Macro change request. use ramp value B6 PARAMETER SAVE 1 Save actual parameter settings to flash.

4 boards . scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 27/389 . 0 = normal B4 PROT IGCT2 OFF enable function of IGCT2 protection.. 1 = off. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding system) BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 (Not used) B1 (Not used) B2 (Not used) B3 (Not used) B4 (Not used) B5 (Not used) B6 (Not used) B7 (Not used) B8 (Not used) B9 (Not used) B10 (Not used) B11 (Not used) B12 (Not used) B13 (Not used) B14 (Not used) B15 (Not used) Unit: Type: I Int. 1 = off.05 EnableControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific enable control word (Enable Bits are to be defined and are used for testing only. 1 = on B2 400V TEST inverter 400V test B3 PROT IGCT1 OFF enable function of IGCT1 protection.) BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 Reserved B1 IB CONTROL for testing the IOEC 1.. 0 = normal B5 Reserved B6 SHORT CIRCUIT inverter short circuit test TEST B7 (Not used) B8 (Not used) B9 (Not used) B10 (Not used) B11 (Not used) B12 (Not used) B13 SECURITY FOR ECW Security bit for ECW. scaling: 1 == 1 07. ECW is only accepted if bit is set to 1 B15 (Not used) Unit: Type: I Int. ECW is only accepted if bit is set to 1 B14 SECURITY FOR ECW Security bit for ECW.ABB 07. for internal use only.04 AuxControlWord 3 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY drive specific auxiliary control word (interface control word between application software and motor control software. 0 = off .

02 is set to COMM. ABB 07. Freeze the actual set point from the ramp-function generator B6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point (Coast stop) 0 Disable set point. B8 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1. if following conditions are fulfilled:(Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop by ramp or. 16.02 is set to COMM.MODULE B13 RESERVED B14 RESERVED B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int. Speed ramp input is forced to zero. Effective if Par.Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0.MODULE 0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1).I Signal and Parameter Table .state) 0 Command to open the MCB (“OFF” .Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0. if following conditions are fulfilled:(Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop by ramp orStop by torque limit).06 OverrControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Main control word from overriding system (PLC) to control the drive via fieldbus BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 MCB ORD ON Command to close and open the MCB from overriding OVERR system.Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON B9 INCHING_2 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 2. switch off the MCB.01 is set to COMM. B11 EXT CRTL LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2). 12. 12.state (Run command) 0 Command to Stop (Normal Stop Þ Stop by coasting or Stop by ramp or B4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Operating condition (Inching 1 or 2) 0 Ramp-function generator output is set to zero.Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_2 was previously ON B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Overriding computer is requesting to control the drive.state) B1 OFF 2 1 No OFF2 (Emergency Off) 0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state B2 OFF 3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop) 0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Stop Þ Stop by ramp. 1 Command to close the MCB (“RDYRUN” . 0 No control from overriding system. Effective if Par. B5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp-function generator (Inching 1 or 2) 0 Speed ramping stopped.MODULE B12 PROCESS STOP 1 No Process StopCommand to Run Enable 0 Process StopCommand to Run Disabled Effective if Par. scaling: 1 == 1 28/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. drive has stopped Þ Trip 2b) B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”. B7 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a positive edge 0 No significance.

02 is set to COMM.ABB 07. B8 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1. Effective if Par. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 29/389 .MODULE 0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1).Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_2 was previously ON B10 REMOTE-CMD 1 Master is controlling the drive.02 is set to COMM. Protection GTO on) B2 OFF3 1 No OFF 3 (Emergency Stop) B3 RUN 1 Command to “RDYREF”.Bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0- Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0.state (Run command) 0 Command to Stop B4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Operating condition (Inching 1 or 2) B5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp-function generator (Inching 1 or 2) B6 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point (Coast stop) B7 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a positive edge 0 No significance. Effective if Par. if following conditions are fulfilled:. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 MCB ORD ON Command to close and open the MCB 1 Command to close the MCB (“RDYRUN” . for internal use only.Bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0- Bit RAMP-HOLD = 0.state) B1 OFF 2 1 No OFF2 (Emergency Off) 0 Command to “ON INHIBIT” state(Emergency Off Þ Trip 2b Þ stop the drive and switch off the MCB immediately. 12. if following conditions are fulfilled:.state) 0 Command to open the MCB (“OFF” . 12. B11 EXT CRTL LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2).07 FollowControlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Interface control word between master drive and follower drive in Master/Slave control mode. It is not allowed to write to this control word from an overriding system.MODULE B12 B13 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.Bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON B9 INCHING_2 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 2.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 8 STATUS WORDS 8 STATUS WORDS Status signals of the drive according to the ABB Drive Profile. 30/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .

ABB 08. 32.03). Valid in both directions regardless of setting of Par.AT SETPOINT Figure Unit: Type: I Int. ready to charge) 0 Not ready to switch on B1 RDYRUN 1 Ready to operate (ready to start the drive) 0 Not ready B2 RDYREF 1 Operation enabled (running) 0 Operation inhibited B3 TRIPPED 1 Fault 0 No Fault B4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF 2 inactive 0 OFF 2 active B5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF 3 inactive 0 OFF 3 active B6 ON INHIBITED 1 Switch on inhibit MCB 0 (MCB: 0=close enabled. 0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.01 MainStatusWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 RDYON 1 Ready to switch on (ready for MCB on.01 MSW Bit 8 . 1=close inhibited) B7 ALARM 1 Alarm / Warning 0 No Alarm / Warning B8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING.02. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance band 0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance band) B9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE 0 Drive control location: LOCAL B10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency for speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit (Par. 32. B11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location 2 (EXT2) selected O External Control Location 1 (EXT1) selected B12 PROCESS 1 Process stop active STOP 0 Process stop not active B13 RESERVED B14 RESERVED B15 (Not Used) n n ref AT SETPOINT MARGIN n act t 1 0 t 8. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 31/389 .

02). in state RDY_REF depending on the actual speed.06 LimitWord1 B10 TORQ CONTROL Drive is torque controlled B11 ZERO SPEED Motor speed actual is zero. B5 Reserved B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 BACKSPIN LOCKOUT ACT Backspin lockout is active B9 LIMITING Limitation active. scaling: 1 == 1 08. B8 DIRECTION Direction of rotation.03 AuxStatusWord 2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary status word 2 BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 FLT_CLASS_1 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1 reaction. B14 DLYED_LOP_TRIP Drive will trip after LOP-delay (144.I Signal and Parameter Table . reset only possible after time-out (depending on rotor time constant) B3 FLT_CLASS_1D 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1D reaction. no reset possible B4 Reserved B5 FAULT_PENDING 1 Fault state active B6 RESET_OUT Reset pulse output (length 2s) after reset request B7 WATCH_DOG_BIT Transmitted toggle bit for CH0 link monitoring (see Group 70). in all other states depending on the reference speed 0 Forward 1 Reverse B9 NOT_RDY_ON Main State Machine (MSM) is in not-ready-ON state B10 NOT_RDY_RUN Main State Machine (MSM) is in not-ready-RUN state B11 CHARGING Drive is in charging mode B12 DISCHARGING Drive is in discharging mode B13 TEST_RUNNING 1 Selected test is running B14 TEST_ACTIVATED 1 Test is activated B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.02 AuxStatusWord 1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary status word BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 Reserved B1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed actual is outside of the defined window. B12 Reserved B13 DLYED_HIP_TRIP Drive will trip after HIP-delay (144. the MCB opens B1 FLT_CLASS_2 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 2 reaction. B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 32/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. B3 Reserved B4 RUN DISABLED External interlocking prevents the run. B2 PROCESS STOP COAST Process stop function by ramp has failed.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 08.01). see parameter 8. the MCB stays closed B2 FLT_CLASS_1T 1 Drive is/has tripped according to fault class 1T reaction.

scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 33/389 .5s) B2 MCB CLOSED 1 MCB is closed FEEDBACK B3 MCB OPEN FEEDBACK 1 MCB is open B4 Reserved B5 Reserved B6 PARAMETER SAVE 1 Parameter saving is active ACTIVE B7 Reserved B8 USER MACRO 1 ACT 1 User Macro 1 is active B9 USER MACRO 2 ACT 1 User Macro 2 is active B10 Reserved B11 M/F CTRL MASTER 1 In M/F-Control.ABB 08. drive is a MASTER B12 M/F CTRL FOLLOWER 1 In M/F-Control. drive is a FOLLOWER B13 M/F COMM ERR 1 Master/Follower drive communication error (only for Follower drive) B14 Reserved B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.04 AuxStatusWord 3 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary status word 3 BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 NOT INITIALIZED 1 Drive not initialised after power on B1 WATCH DOG BIT Toggle bit for link supervision (0.05 AuxStatusWord 4 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Drive specific auxiliary status word 4 BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 STOPPING MODE 1 stop command is given (RDY REF STOP active) B1 READY REF ACTIVE 1 drive is started and motor is magnetized (RDY REF) B2 CUSTOMER SUP SIG1 1 free programmable customer supervision signal 1 is ACTIVE active (see group 48) B3 CUSTOMER SUP SIG2 1 free programmable customer supervision signal 2 is ACTIVE active (see group 48) B4 STO ACTIVE 1 Drive is in safe torque off state B5 MOTOR ZERO CUR 1 Motor current is zero and drive status not ReadyRef B6 Reserved B7 Reserved B8 Reserved B9 Reserved B10 Reserved B11 Reserved B12 TRAFO PROT RESET 1 reset signal for transformer protection relay B13 CONSTANT SIGNAL B0 0 signal is fix set to logical “0” B14 CONSTANT SIGNAL B1 1 signal is fix set to logical “1” B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 08.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 08. B13 TorqInvDriveCurLim Limit is activated. if the actual value is below the limit value and not active if the actual value is above the limit value.05).I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling: 1 == 1 34/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. the corresponding limit bit will be active if the value actual is above the limit value and not active if the value actual is below the limit value BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 SPEED REF LIMIT speed refernce limit supervision is active B1 SPEED ACT LIMIT actual speed limit supervision is active B2 MOT CURR LIMIT actual motor current limit supervision is active B3 MOT TORQ LIMIT actual motor torque limit supervision is active B4 SUP SIG1 LIMIT supervision signal 1 value limit (free programmable) B5 SUP SIG2 LIMIT supervision signal 2 value limit (free programmable) B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.10). B10 TorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20. If in supervision function • LOW LIMIT is selected. • HIGH LIMIT is selected. B9 TorqMinLim Limit is activated (see P20. B12 TorqInvBreakCurLim Limit is activated. B14 DCOvervoltageLim Limit is activated.07 LimitWord 2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Supervision Note! The actual status of each limit supervision function of Group 32 will be displayed in this parameter.06 LIMIT WORD1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 TorRefPulloutLim Limit is activated.09). B1 SpdCtrlTorqMinLim Limit is activated (seeP20. scaling: 1 == 1 08. B7 TorqRefBrChopdutyLim Limit is activated.07). B11 TorqMotorCurrLim Limit is activated (see P20.02). the corresponding limit bit will be active.06).04). B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int. B8 TorqRefSpeedMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20. B3 B4 B5 TorqRefTorqMinLim Limit is activated (see P20. B2 SpdCtrlTorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20. B6 TorqRefTorqMaxLim Limit is activated (see P20.08).

IOEC1 Status of the digital input 2 – IOEC1 B2 DI3 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 3 – IOEC1 B3 DI4 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 4 – IOEC1 B4 DI5 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 5 – IOEC1 B5 DI6 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 6 – IOEC1 B6 DI7 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 7 – IOEC1 B7 DI8 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 8 – IOEC1 B8 DI9 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 9 – IOEC1 B9 DI10 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 10 – IOEC1 B10 DI11 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 11 – IOEC1 B11 DI12 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 12 – IOEC1 B12 DI13 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 13 – IOEC1 B13 DI14 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 14 – IOEC1 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.ABB 08. scaling: 1 == 1 08.08 DI StatusWord IO1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 DI1 – IOEC1 Status of the digital input 1 – IOEC1 B1 DI2 . scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 35/389 .09 DI StatusWord IO2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 DI1 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 1 – IOEC2 B1 DI2 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 2 – IOEC2 B2 DI3 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 3 – IOEC2 B3 DI4– IOEC2 Status of the digital input 4 – IOEC2 B4 DI5 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 5 – IOEC2 B5 DI6– IOEC2 Status of the digital input 6 – IOEC2 B6 DI7 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 7 – IOEC2 B7 DI8 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 8 – IOEC2 B8 DI9 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 9 – IOEC2 B9 DI10 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 10 – IOEC2 B10 DI11 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 11 – IOEC2 B11 DI12 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 12 – IOEC2 B12 DI13 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 13 – IOEC2 B13 DI14 – IOEC2 Status of the digital input 14 – IOEC2 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.

scaling: 1 == 1 36/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01) or with FREQREF (29. inverter is charging the DC . ready for switch on the MCB 9 Charging MCB is on. drive is in initialising sequence 2 NoMotorData motor data are missing 3 ACSisDefect inverter has a defect 4 Tripped drive has tripped 5 SoftStop drive is in soft stop mode 6 Alarm drive is in alarm state 7 ErthIsoClos earth isolator is closed.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 08. inverter is charging the DC .10 DriveStatusWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Only for panel display VALUE NAME MEANING 1 InitSeq….bus 10 Rdy to Strt MCB is on.I Signal and Parameter Table . not ready for MCB on 8 RdyForMCBOn drive is ready.bus 11 ID Run motor identification run started 12 Magnetize motor will be magnetised 13 Running motor is running with SPEEDREF (23.01) 14 Stopping motor is stopping 15 Discharging inverter is in discharging mode 16 AutoCoolOn automatic cooling function is active 17 LockoutAct backspin lockout is active (run prevented) 18 StartSeqOn automatic start sequence function is active 19 CoolOffDely cooling system off delay time is active 20 21 Unit: Type: NoType Int.

Bypass: motor circuit braker 3 fault B06 SM4Control Sync. Bypass: motor circuit braker 2 fault B04 SM3Control Sync. Bypass: motor circuit braker 1 fault B02 SM2Control Sync.09 FaultWord1 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 37/389 . Power: control backup supply voltage failure B09 B10 ChargingTimeout Inverter: charging time out B11 B12 Unbalance NP Inverter: NP-Voltage deviation fault B13 DischargeTimeout Inverter: discharging time out B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int. Bypass: motor circuit braker 4 discrepancy of command and feedback B07 SM4Disturb Sync. Bypass: motor circuit braker 3 discrepancy of command and feedback B05 SM3Disturb Sync.10 FaultWord2 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1. trip 2b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 TrippLoop MCB: tripping loop not connected or one or more contacts open B01 ProcessStop Control: system is shutdown after a process stop B02 MCB Control MCB: discrepancy of command and feedback B03 AnInpCalib Control: automatic calibration of IOEC boards in progress B04 B05 B06 B07 CtrlSuppFail Aux. Power: control supply voltage (27V) failure B08 CtrlBackSupp Aux. Bypass: motor circuit braker 1 discrepancy of command and feedback B01 SM1Disturb Sync. trip 2b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 SM1Control Sync. scaling: 1 == 1 09. Bypass: motor circuit braker 4 fault B08 B09 NoFiltData Inverter: filter data missing B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int.ABB Group 9 FAULT AND ALARM WORDS 09. Bypass: motor circuit braker 2 discrepancy of command and feedback B03 SM2Disturb Sync.

Bypass: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 6 failure B06 Panel Lost Control: panel communication loss B07 B08 B09 ExtMotProt Motor: external protection relay B10 ExtOversped Motor: external supervision of rotation speed B11 B12 B13 MacroChange MCB: during “MACRO CHANGE” the MCB has been switched on B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int.12 FaultWord4 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1. Bypass: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 5 failure B05 IOEC6LinkEr Sync. trip 1b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 IOEC1LinkEr Control: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 1 failure B01 IOEC2LinkEr Control: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 2 failure B02 IOEC3LinkEr Control: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 3 failure B03 IOEC4LinkEr Control: DDCS communication timeout or IOEC 4 failure B04 IOEC5LinkEr Sync. scaling: 1 == 1 38/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.11 FaultWord3 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1. scaling: 1 == 1 09.I Signal and Parameter Table . trip 1b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MCB Disturb MCB: opens during operation B01 MCB MCB: Order-off feedback not set OrderOff B02 EarthIsoCtr B03 EmergOff MCB: emergency off activated B04 InputIsolat External: input isolator not closed B05 B06 B07 InpVoltUnba Line: optional: external protection relay for input voltage unbalance supervision B08 ExtTrafProt Transformer: external protection B09 Buchholz Transformer: external Buchholz supervision B10 TrTmpExt/3 Transformer: trafo temperature external / 3 too high B11 B12 B13 CustSupSig1 Customer: supervision signal 1 is active (group 48) B14 CustSupSig2 Customer: supervision signal 2 is active (group 48) B15 Unit: Type: I Int.

trip 1b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 TimeoutAuxOnSeq State machine: time out aux. EC fans only! B11 TraFan(s)Disturbed Transformer fan(s) disturbed.15 FaultWord7 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Unit: Type: PB Int. EC fans only! B12 Fan (Grp) 1/2 Air Cooling: fan (group) 1/2 failure B13 FanDiffPres Air Cooling: differential air pressure too high B14 PressMonCalibFlt EC fan pressure calibration sequence failed. with open cooling system) B04 WtrPress1Hi Water Cooling: output pressure too high B05 WtrPress2Lo Water Cooling: input pressure too low (only with closed cooling system) B06 WtrPress2Hi Water Cooling: input pressure too high (only with closed cooling system) B07 B08 B09 AuxFan 1/2 Water Cooling: aux. power on sequence B01 TimeoutOff1Seq State machine: time out off1 sequence B02 TimeoutOff2Seq State machine: time out off2 sequence B03 TimeoutOff3Seq State machine: time out off3 sequence B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int.14 FaultWord6 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1.ABB 09. scaling: 1 == 1 09. trip 1b BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Pump 1/2 Water Cooling: pump 1/2 failure B01 WtrLevelLow Water Cooling: expansion vessel water level too low B02 WtrConduct Water Cooling: conductivity too high B03 WtrPresDifLo Water Cooling: difference pressure too low (= output press. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 39/389 . fan 1/2 failure B10 InvFan(s)Disturbed Inverter fan(s) disturbed. B15 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 09.13 FaultWord5 FC1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1.

Bypass: line circuit braker 4 is closed but should be opened B11 InvOverLoad Inverter is overloaded. further details refer to P5.18) B05 B06 CH2 LinkErr B07 B08 WtrTmpHigh B09 WtrTmpLow B10 ExtWtrCool B11 InvAirTemp B12 B13 CustSupSig1 Customer: supervision signal 1 is active (group 48) B14 CustSupSig2 Customer: supervision signal 2 is active (group 48) B15 Unit: Type: I Int. Bypass: line circuit braker 3 is closed but should be opened B10 Sbp4Control Sync.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. trip 2a BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 B01 MotVibrat Motor: external vibration supervision B02 B03 B04 OutputIsolat External: output isolator not closed B05 B06 B07 Sbp1Control Sync. scaling: 1 == 1 09. scaling: 1 == 1 40/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int. Power: control backup supply voltage failure B04 MagnOvercurrent Overcurrent protection has got active during magnetization (reduced overcurrent trip level.I Signal and Parameter Table .17 FaultWord1 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2. Bypass: line circuit braker 1 is closed but should be opened B08 Sbp2Control Sync.18 FaultWord2 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2. trip 1a BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MCB not On B01 ProcessStop Control: system is shutdown after a process stop B02 B03 CtrlBackSupp Aux. Bypass: line circuit braker 2 is closed but should be opened B09 Sbp3Control Sync. Too high current for this low frequency range.

soft stop BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MotWdgTmp1 Motor: winding temperature 1 too high (phase U. soft stop BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MotUndLoad Motor: underload according to programmable load curve B01 MotOverLoad Motor: overload according to programmable load curve B02 MotPhUnbal Motor: phase currents unbalanced B03 B04 OutsAirTemp Water Cooling: outside air temperature too high B05 B06 TrafoTmp1 Transformer: trafo temperature 1 too high B07 TrafoTmp2 Transformer: trafo temperature 2 too high B08 OutpTrafoTmp Transformer: output trafo temp. V or W) B01 MotWdgTmpU2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase U too high B02 MotWdgTmpV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V too high B03 MotWdgTmpW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W too high B04 ExtMotCool Motor: external cooling B05 MotCooler Motor: motor cooler internal contactor B06 B07 BrgTemp DE Motor: temperature at the driven end bearing too high B08 BrgTemp NDE Motor: temperature at the non driven end bearing too high B09 B10 MotVibratAI1 Motor: vibration AI 1 too high B11 MotVibratAI2 Motor: vibration AI 2 too high B12 B13 LoadBrgTmp1 Motor: bearing temperature 1 of load (e.g.19 FaultWord3 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2.g.ABB 09. pump) too high B15 Unit: Type: I Int.20 FaultWord4 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2. pump) too high B14 LoadBrgTmp2 Motor: bearing temperature 2 of load (e. scaling: 1 == 1 09. too high B09 B10 CH0 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) link error B11 B12 LimitSuperv Inverter: limit supervision B13 CustSupSig1 Customer: supervision signal 1 is active (group 48) B14 CustSupSig2 Customer: supervision signal 2 is active (group 48) B15 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 41/389 .

loss of analogue input B13 MotWdgMLos Motor: winding temperature measurement . 2 Ph. Tmp. soft stop BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 ExtRef1Lost Control: external reference signal 1 lost B01 ExtRef2Lost Control: external reference signal 2 lost B02 IOEC1AI2MLos Air / Water Cooling: IOEC1 AI2 (air tmp. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 OverCurrent SBU Overcurrent protection active during SBU sync process B01 SinFilOverCur SBU Sine filter overcurrent protection active during SBU sync process B02 DC OvervoltMCB DC overvoltage MCB protection active during SBU sync SBU process B03 DC Overvolt SBU DC overvoltage protection active during SBU sync process B04 Overfrequency SBU Overfrequency protection active during SBU sync process B05 SineFiltCap SBU Sine filter cap shorted protection active during SBU sync process B06 Motor Prot SW SBU Motor UL protection active during SBU sync process B07 Motor Stall SBU Motor stall protection active during SBU syn process B08 Motor Underl SBU Motor underload protection active during sync process B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int. / trafo tmp. This faults will only appear during synchronizing process.loss of analogue input B09 MotTmpMLosV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V .loss of analogue input B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int. 1) .loss of analogue input B11 Brg DE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the driven end bearing - loss of analogue input B12 BrgNDE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the non driven end bearing . / trafo tmp.22 FaultWord6 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY SBU specific FC2 fault word.loss of analogue input B06 IOEC3AI4MLos General: IOEC3 AI4 . U) . press.I Signal and Parameter Table . tmp.loss of analogue input B04 IOEC1AI4MLos Water Cooling / Trafo: IOEC1 AI3 (wtr. cond. 2 / wtr. actual signal 1 is missing (PID-control) B08 IOEC4AI2MLos General: IOEC4 AI2 (AI2 for PID / Mot.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.21 FaultWord5 FC2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2.loss of analogue input B10 MotTmpMLosW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W . scaling: 1 == 1 42/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.) .loss of analogue input B03 IOEC1AI3MLos Water Cooling / Trafo: IOEC1 AI3 (wtr. outp. 2) - loss of analogue input B05 IOEC3AI1MLos General: IOEC3 AI1 .loss of analogue input B07 ExtAct1Lost Control: analogue input. scaling: 1 == 1 09.

trip 2b with defect BIT NAME VALUE MEANING 00 AMC: Fault Class 1D Trip with defect (e. IGCT short circuit). protection IGCT defect 02 ChargingCircuit Inverter: IGCT or varistor defect 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Unit: Type: I Int. sequence B01 TimeoutTestSeq State machine: time out test sequence B02 B03 TimeoutRdyRunSeq State machine: time out ready-run sequence B04 TimeoutRdyRefSeq State machine: time out ready-ref. sequence B05 TimeoutStop1Seq State machine: time out stop1 sequence B06 TimeoutStop2Seq State machine: time out stop2 sequence B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int. trip 1a delayed BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 TimeoutInitSeq State machine: time out init. reset not possible 01 ChargeTimeMinimum Inverter: charging too fast.28 FaultWord1 FC1D ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 1D.ABB 09. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 43/389 .23 FaultWord1 FC2HIP ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY All bits indicate faults according fault class 2 HIP.g. scaling: 1 == 1 09.

BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 INTtoINT Link 1 INT0 INTtoINT Link Fault B01 INT1 INTtoINT Link 1 INT1 INTtoINT Link Fault 2nd INV B02 INT2 INTtoINT Link 1 INT2 INTtoINT Link Fault 3rd INV B03 INT3 INTtoINT Link 1 INT3 INTtoINT Link Fault 4th INV B04 INT3 PPCS Link 1 INT3 PPCS Link Fault B05 INT3 FT Link 1 INT3 FT Link Fault B06 DCS CH0 DDCS 1 DDCS communication on DCS’s CH0 (check ACS CH5 to COM DCS CH0). BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 PPCS Communication 1 PPCS Communication Fault B01 PFF Communication 1 PFF Communication Fault B02 INT0 PPCS Link 1 INT0 PPCS Link Fault B03 NT0 FT Link 1 INT0 FT Link Fault B04 INT1 PPCS Link 1 INT1 PPCS Link Fault 2nd INV B05 INT1 FT Link 1 INT1 FT Link Fault 2nd INV B06 INT2 PPCS Link 1 INT2 PPCS Link Fault 3rd INV B07 INT2 FT Link 1 INT2 FT Link Fault 3rd INV B08 PUB: Communication 1 PUB Communication Fault B09 GRAY Missing 1 GRAY Communication Fault B10 NTAC Missing 1 NTAC Communication Fault B11 CCB Communication 1 CCB Communication Fault B12 EXU: Communication 1 EXU Communication Fault B13 EXU: PAI Communica 1 EXU PAI Communication Fault B14 PPCC LnkConfigFault 1 PPCC Link Configuration Fault Unit: Type: I Int.29 FW Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Communication fault word. scaling: 1 == 1 09.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.I Signal and Parameter Table .30 FW1 Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Communication fault word 1. scaling: 1==1 44/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling: 1 == 1 09. B07 INT0 Link C Lost 1 INT0 Link C Fault B08 INT0 Link D Lost 1 INT0 Link D Fault B09 INT0 Link E Lost 1 INT0 Link E Fault B10 INT0 MF I2I Link 1 INT0 MF Int2Int Link Fault B11 INT1 MF I2I Link 1 INT1 MF Int2Int Link Fault (2nd inv) B12 INT2 MF I2I Link 1 INT2 MF Int2Int Link Fault (3rd inv) B13 INT3 MF I2I Link 1 INT3 MF Int2Int Link Fault (4th inv) B14 INT0 SYN Link 1 Sync board Link Fault Unit: Type: I Int.31 FW2 Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Communication fault word 2. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT4 PPCS Link 1 INT4 PPCS Link Fault B01 INT5 PPCS Link 1 INT5 PPCS Link Fault B02 INT6 PPCS Link 1 INT6 PPCS Link Fault B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int.

33 FW1 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware fault word 1. scaling: 1 == 1 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Delayed GUSP AuxPow 1 Delayed GUSP Auxiliary Power Fault B01 INT0 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT0 Auxiliary Power Fault B02 INT0 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT0 GUSP Aux Power Fault B03 INT0 VLU GUSP 1 INT0 VLU GUSP Fault B04 INT0 VLU Control 1 INT0 VLU Control Fault B05 INT0 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT0 LSU Diode Fault B06 INT0 ASE Fault 1 INT0 ASE Fault B07 INT0 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT0 Wrong EPLD Version B08 INT0 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT0 Wrong PUPA Version B09 INT0 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT0 PUPA FLASH corrupted B10 INT1 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT1 Auxiliary Power Fault B11 INT1 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT1 GUSP Aux Power Fault 2nd INV B12 INT1 VLU GUSP 1 INT1 VLU GUSP Fault 2nd INV B13 NT1 VLU Control 1 INT1 VLU Control Fault 2nd INV B14 INT0 CVMI 1 INT0 Control Power Loss for the CVMI board Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT1 ASE Fault 1 INT1 ASE Fault B01 INT1 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT1 Wrong EPLD Version B02 INT1 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT1 Wrong PUPA Version B03 INT1 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT1 PUPA FLASH corrupted B04 INT2 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT2 Aux Power Fault 3rd INV B05 INT2 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT2 GUSP Aux Power Fault 3rd INV B06 INT2 VLU GUSP 1 INT2 VLU GUSP Fault 3rd INV B07 INT2 VLU Control 1 INT2 VLU Control Fault 3rd INV B08 INT2 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT2 LSU Diode Fault 3rd INV B09 INT2 ASE Fault 1 INT2 ASE Fault B10 INT2 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT2 Wrong EPLD Version B11 INT2 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT3 Wrong PUPA Version B12 INT2 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT3 PUPA FLASH corrupted B13 PUB: AuxiliaryPower 1 PUB Auxiliary Power Fault B14 PUB: Wrong EPLD Ver 1 PUB Wrong EPLD Version Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 09.ABB 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT: EPLD Versions 1 Wrong EPLD version B01 INT: PUPA Versions 1 Wrong PUPA version B02 EXU: Control HW 1 EXU Control Hardware Fault B03 EXU: Fuse/TmpSwich EXU Fuse Failure /Temperature switch B04 INT3 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT3 Aux Power Fault B05 INT3 GUSP AuxPower 1 INT3 GUSP Aux Power B06 INT3 VLU GUSP 1 INT3 VLU GUSP Fault B07 INT3 VLU Control 1 INT3 VLU Control Fault B08 INT3 LSU DiodeFault 1 INT3 LSU Diode Fault B09 INT3 ASE Fault 1 INT3 ASE Fault B10 INT3 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT3 Wrong EPLD version B11 INT3 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT3 Wrong PUPA version B12 INT3 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT3 PUPA Flash corrupted B13 IGCT Supervision 1 IGCT checked failed B14 INT0 ASE PI Limit 1 B15 Unit: Type: I Int.34 FW2 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware fault word 2. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 45/389 .32 FW CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware fault word.

scaling: 1 == 1 46/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 Internal 1 INT0 Internal Fault B01 INT1 Internal 1 INT1 Internal Fault B02 INT2 Internal 1 INT2 Internal Fault B03 INT3 Internal 1 INT3 Internal Fault B04 DCS AuxUnderv 1 DCS’s auxiliary voltage too low B05 DCS Overtemp 1 DCS temperature too high B06 DCS NoFanAckn 1 DCS gets no feedback from Fan B07 DCS NoMainCondAck 1 DCS does not get feedback from MCB B08 INT0 GUSP 1 1 GUSP1 Fault B09 INT0 GUSP 2 1 GUSP2 Fault B10 INT1 HW GD Failed 1 B11 INT2 HW GD Failed 1 B12 INT3 HW GD Failed 1 B13 INT4 AuxiliaryPower 1 INT4 Aux Power Fault 5rd INV B14 CVMI INVALID CONFIG 1 INT0 Wrong parameters setting regarding CVMI Unit: Type: I Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .35 FW3 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware fault word 3.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. scaling: 1 == 1 09.36 FW DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY DC link voltage fault word. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 DC Overvoltage 1 DC Overvoltage B01 DC OvervoltageMCB 1 DC Overvoltage opening MCB B02 DC Undervoltage 1 DC Undervoltage B03 NP Voltage 1 NP Voltage Deviation B04 Ridethrough NetUnVo 1 B05 INT0 Overvoltage 1 INT0 Overvoltage B06 DC Overvoltage1 1 DC Overvoltage 2nd INV B07 DC OvervoltageMCB1 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 2nd INV B08 DC Undervoltage1 1 DC Undervoltage 2nd INV B09 NP Voltage1 1 NP Voltage Deviation 2nd INV B10 INT1 Overvoltage 1 INT1 Overvoltage 2nd INV B11 DC Overvoltage2 1 DC Overvoltage 3rd INV B12 DC OvervoltageMCB2 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 3rd INV B13 DC Undervoltage2 1 DC Undervoltage 3rd INV B14 NP Voltage2 1 NP Voltage Deviation 3rd INV B15 Max RT Time Elapsed 1 DC Maximum ride through length elapsed Unit: Type: I Int.

scaling: 1 == 1 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 Self Excit 1 INT0 Self excitation detected B01 Self Excitation 1 Self excitation detected B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int.38 FW2 DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY DC link voltage 2 fault word.39 FW Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Current fault word. scaling: 1 == 1 09. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 47/389 .ABB 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT2 Overvoltage 1 INT2 Overvoltage 3rd INV B01 EXU: BOD Activation 1 EXU: BOD Activation Fault B02 DC Overvoltage FT 1 DC Overvoltage with Firing through B03 DC Overvoltage3 1 DC Overvoltage 4th INV B04 DC OvervoltageMCB3 1 DC Overvoltage open MCB 4th INV B05 DC Undervoltage3 1 DC Undervoltage 4th INV B06 NP Voltage3 1 NP Voltage Deviation 4th INV B07 INT3 Overvoltage 1 INT3 Overvoltage 4th INV B08 INT0 Overvoltage FT 1 INT0 Overvoltage with Firing through B09 INT1 Overvoltage FT 1 INT1 Overvoltage with Firing through B10 INT2 Overvoltage FT 1 INT2 Overvoltage with Firing through B11 INT3 Overvoltage FT 1 INT3 Overvoltage with Firing through B12 DC Overvoltage FT 1 1 DC-link Overvoltage with Firing through 2nd DC B13 RBU Temp rise 1 Max RBU/BCU temp rise Fault B14 RBU Disabled 1 VLU/RBU/BCU operation disabled B15 Low Speed During RT 1 Speed below minimum during ride through Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Overcurrent 1 Overcurrent B01 Phase A Lost 1 Phase A lost B02 Phase B Lost 1 Phase B lost B03 Phase C Lost 1 Phase C lost B04 INT0 2nd EarthFault 1 INT0 2nd Earth Fault B05 INT0 Overcurrent 1 INT0 Overcurrent B06 Overcurrent 1 1 Overcurrent 2nd INV B07 Phase A Lost 1 1 Phase A lost 2nd INV B08 Phase B Lost 1 1 Phase B lost 2nd INV B09 Phase C Lost 1 1 Phase C lost 2nd INV B10 INT1 2nd EarthFault 1 INT1 2nd Earth Fault 2nd INV B11 INT1 Overcurrent 1 INT1 Overcurrent 2nd INV B12 Overcurrent 2 1 Overcurrent 3rd INV B13 Phase A Lost 2 1 Phase A lost 3rd INV B14 Phase B Lost 2 1 Phase B lost 3rd INV Unit: Type: I Int.37 FW1 DC LinkVolt ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY DC link voltage 1 fault word.

41 FW2 Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Current fault word 2.42 FW Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Short circuit fault word. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 CBU Short Circuit 1 CBU Short Circuit B01 INT0 ShortCircuit 1 INT0 Short Circuit B02 INT0 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT0 VLU Short Circuit B03 INT0 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT0 DI/DT Supervision B04 INT1 ShortCircuit 1 INT1 Short Circuit 2nd INV B05 INT1 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT1 VLU Short Circuit 2nd INV B06 INT1 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT1 DI/DT Supervision 2nd INV B07 INT2 ShortCircuit 1 INT2 Short Circuit 3rd INV B08 INT2 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT2 VLU Short Circuit 3rd INV B09 INT2 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT2 DI/DT Supervision 3rd INV B10 INT3 ShortCircuit 1 INT3 Short Circuit 4th INV B11 INT3 VLU ShortCirc 1 INT3 VLU Short Circuit 4th INV B12 INT3 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT3 DI/DT Supervision 4th INV B13 CBU Short Circuit 1 1 CBU Short Circuit 2nd unit B14 INT0 ShortRecDiod 1 Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Phase C Lost 2 1 Phase C lost 3rd INV B01 INT2 2nd EarthFault 1 INT2 2nd Earth Fault 3rd INV B02 INT2 Overcurrent 1 INT2 Overcurrent 3rd INV B03 EXU: Overcurrent 1 Excitation Overcurrent B04 EXU: Alpha Min Flt 1 Excitation Alpha Min Fault B05 High Current 1 High Current (SW Overcurrent retry failed) B06 Overcurrent 3 1 Overcurrent 4th INV B07 Phase A Lost 3 1 Phase A lost 4th INV B08 Phase B Lost 3 1 Phase B lost 4th INV B09 Phase C Lost 3 1 Phase C lost 4th INV B10 INT3 2nd EarthFault 1 INT3 2nd Earth Fault 4th INV B11 INT3 Overcurrent 1 INT3 Overcurrent 4th INV B12 INT0 SinFilOverCurr 1 INT0 Filter over current B13 SinFilOvercurr 1 Sine filter over current B14 Ground Overcurrent 1 Sine filter ground over current Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 Overcurrent FT 1 INT0 Overcurrent with Firing through B01 INT1 Overcurrent FT 1 INT1 Overcurrent with Firing through – 2nd inverter B02 INT2 Overcurrent FT 1 INT2 Overcurrent with Firing through – 3rd inverter B03 INT3 Overcurrent FT 1 INT3 Overcurrent with Firing through – 4th inverter B04 DCF Overcurrent 1 DCF over current B05 DCF Earth Fault 1 DCF earth fault B06 DCF Cur Ripple 1 DCF current ripple B07 RMS GroundCurrent 1 Filter ground current flt (RMS) B08 INT4 Overcurrent 1 INT4 Overcurrent B09 INT5 Overcurrent 1 INT5 Overcurrent B10 INT6 Overcurrent 1 INT6 Overcurrent B11 DCS ArmCurrDev 1 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 09.I Signal and Parameter Table .40 FW1 Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Current fault word 1.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. scaling: 1 == 1 48/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling: 1 == 1 09.

scaling: 1 == 1 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 SwitchingFreq 1ms 1 Switching Frequency 1ms B01 SwitchingFreq 50ms 1 Switching Frequency 50ms B02 SwitchingFreq250ms 1 Switching Frequency 250ms B03 SwitchingFreq 1s 1 Switching Frequency 1s B04 SwitchingFreq 1ms1 1 Switching Frequency 1ms 2nd INV B05 SwitchingFreq 50ms1 1 Switching Frequency 50ms 2nd INV B06 SwitchingFreq250ms1 1 Switching Frequency 250ms 2nd INV B07 SwitchingFreq 1s 1 1 Switching Frequency 1s 2nd INV B08 PUB: WrongSwitch 1 1 PUB: Wrong switching INT1 B09 SwitchingFreq 1ms2 1 Switching Frequency 1 ms 3rd INV B10 SwitchingFreq 50ms2 1 Switching Frequency 50 ms 3rd INV B11 SwitchingFreq250ms2 1 Switching Frequency 250 ms 3rd INV B12 SwitchingFreq 1s 2 1 Switching Frequency 1 s 3rd INV B13 PUB: WrongSwitch 2 1 PUB: Wrong switching INT2 B14 INT0 SwitchingFreq 1 SwitchingFreq HW level exceeded Unit: Type: I Int.44 FW Switching ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Switching fault word.43 FW1 Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Short circuit fault word 1. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 ShortCircPlus 1 INT0 Short Circuit in DC Plus B01 INT0 ShortCircMinus 1 INT0 Short Circuit in DC Minus B02 INT0 LS Print Plus 1 LS1 Supervision not ok B03 INT0 LS Print Minus 1 LS2 Supervision not ok B04 INT1 Desaturation 1 B05 INT2 Desaturation 1 B06 INT3 Desaturation 1 B07 DU/DT ShortCirc 1 B08 Charging Circuit 1 B09 INT4 Desaturation 1 B10 INT5 Desaturation 1 B11 INT6 Desaturation 1 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1==1 09.ABB 09.45 FW1 Switching ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Switching fault word 1. scaling: 1==1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 49/389 . BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 SwitchingFreq 1ms3 1 Switching Frequency 1 ms 4th INV B01 SwitchingFreq 50ms3 1 Switching Frequency 50 ms 4th INV B02 SwitchingFreq250ms3 1 Switching Frequency 250 ms 4th INV B03 SwitchingFreq 1s 3 1 Switching Frequency 1 s 4th INV B04 PUB: WrongSwitch 3 1 PUB: Wrong switching INT3 B05 PP5 illegal for IFU 1 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int.

50 FW Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Generic fault word. scaling: 1==1 09.48 FW SpeedPosition ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Speed & Positioning fault word. B12 EXU: Not Rdy On 1 EXU is not in ready on state B13 EXU: Not Rdy Run 1 EXU is not in ready run state B14 EXU: Not Rdy Ref 1 EXU is not in ready ref state B15 EXU: Alarm 1 EXU common alarm Unit: Type: I Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. scaling: 1==1 50/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .46 FW Network ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Network fault word. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Network Disturbed 1 Network Disturbance B01 Network Disturbed 1 1 Network Disturbance 1 B02 Network UnderVolt 1 Network Undervoltage B03 Network OverVolt 1 Network Overvoltage B04 Network Frequency 1 Network Frequency B05 HighNetworkVoltage 1 B06 FrequencyNotNominal 1 B07 No Synchronization 1 B08 EXU: Undervoltage 1 EXU: Undervoltage B09 EXU: No Sync 1 EXU: No Synchronization B10 EXU: SupplyFreq 1 EXU: Supply Frequency B11 DCS: Mains Underv 1 DCS Mains undervoltage B12 DCS: Mains Overv 1 DCS Mains overvoltage B13 DCS: Not Sync 1 DCS Not Synchronized B14 AutoRestart aftr RT 1 Autorestart after Ride Through Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Overfrequency 1 Overfrequency B01 PositionMeasurement 1 Position Measurement Fault B02 Speed Measurement 1 Speed Measurement Fault B03 Encoder Mismatch 1 Encoder Failure B04 RSD: F Pos Encoder 1 In follower drive position encoder mismatch B05 SSI Parity Error 1 Parity check error in SSI encoder signal B06 Absolute Pos Check 1 Absolute encoder position check failed B07 Auto Offset Fail 1 Automatic encoder offset calibration failed B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1==1 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 AMC: Fault Class 1 1 AMC: Fault Class 1 B01 AMC: Fault Class 2 1 AMC: Fault Class 2 B02 INT: Fault Class 1 1 INT: Fault Class 1 B03 INT: Fault Class 2 1 INT: Fault Class 2 B04 PUB: INT0 Faulted 1 PUB Int0 Fault B05 PUB: INT1 Faulted 1 PUB Int1 Fault B06 PUB: INT2 Faulted 1 PUB Int2 Fault B07 EXU: Fault Class 1 1 CCB: Fault Class 1 B08 EXU: Fault Class 2 1 CCB: Fault Class 2 B09 EXU: Fault Class 3 1 CCB: Fault Class 3 B10 PUB: INT3 Faulted 1 PUB Int3 Fault B11 INT: MCB Trip Req 1 INT: MCB open command via INT – board.

BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Operating System 1 AMC Operating System Fault B01 SineFiltCap 1 B02 Motor Protection SW 1 B03 Motor Underload 1 B04 EXU: OperatingSys 1 EXU: Operating System Fault B05 EXU: Illegal Fault 1 EXU: Illegal Fault B06 EXU: CSM1 Timeout 1 EXU: CSM1 Timeout B07 EXU: BCO Fault 1 EXU: BCO Fault B08 INT0 Block Modulatio 1 INT0 Modulation stopped. firing through in other drive B11 INT3 Block Modulatio 1 INT3 Modulation stopped. firing through in other drive B10 INT2 Block Modulatio 1 INT2 Modulation stopped. scaling: 1==1 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Autorestart Timeout 1 Autorestart Time elapsed – Common B01 Autorestart Loop 1 Reached max number of successive Auto restarts -Common B02 B03 B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Unit: Type: I Int.52 FW Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Other fault word.51 FW1 Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Generic fault word 1.ABB 09. firing through in other drive B09 INT1 Block Modulatio 1 INT1 Modulation stopped. scaling: 1==1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 51/389 . firing through in other drive B12 INT0 1st Earth EAF 1 INT0 NP-GND voltage too big B13 INT1 1st Earth EAF 1 INT1 NP-GND voltage too big B14 INT2 1st Earth EAF 1 INT2 NP-GND voltage too big Unit: Type: I Int.

due to trip in another INT B11 INT3 INT2INT FT 1 INT3 tripped firing through. drawn out. B01 MCB Discrep MCB: discrepancy of two feedback signals B02 InpIsolDis External: input isolator discrepancy B03 OutpIsolDis External: output isolator discrepancy B04 B05 EmergStop MCB: emergency stop activated B06 ProcessStop External: customer system protection B07 InputIsolat External: input isolator not closed B08 OutputIsolat External: output isolator not closed B09 ParamBackup Parameter backup active B10 B11 B12 LimitSuperv Inverter: limit supervision B13 CustSupSig1 Customer: supervision signal 1 is active (group 48) B14 CustSupSig2 Customer: supervision signal 2 is active (group 48) B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int. due to trip in another INT B05 INT1 INT2INT MCB 1 INT1 tripped opened MCB. due to trip in another INT B09 INT1 INT2INT FT 1 INT1 tripped firing through. due to trip in another INT B10 INT2 INT2INT FT 1 INT2 tripped firing through. etc.54 AlarmWord1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MCB NotAvl MCB: faulty. scaling: 52/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling: 1==1 09. due to trip in another INT B08 INT0 INT2INT FT 1 INT0 tripped firing through.53 FW1 Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Other fault word 1. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 INT2INT Trip 1 INT0 has tripped due to trip in another INT B01 INT1 INT2INT Trip 1 INT1 has tripped due to trip in another INT B02 INT2 INT2INT Trip 1 INT2 has tripped due to trip in another INT B03 INT3 INT2INT Trip 1 INT3 has tripped due to trip in another INT B04 INT0 INT2INT MCB 1 INT0 tripped opened MCB. due to trip in another INT B07 INT3 INT2INT MCB 1 INT3 tripped opened MCB. in "local" mode.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. due to trip in another INT B12 PLL Unlocked 1 B13 INT3 1st Earth EAF 1 INT3 NP-GND voltage too big B14 DCS Ext Fault 1 DCS: External fault from DI B15 MasterEXU not 1 Master EXU in AR RdyRun B16 BCU TEMP SW FT 1 BCU temperature (thermal model) too high B17 BCU RES TEMP SW 1 BCU braking resistor temperature (thermal model) too FT high B18 BCU OFF SW FT 1 BCU turned off because of fault B19 BCU SW FREQ FT 1 BCU switching frequency too high Unit: Type: I Int. due to trip in another INT B06 INT2 INT2INT MCB 1 INT2 tripped opened MCB.I Signal and Parameter Table .

g. not available with ACS 1000i B06 IntTrafFan2 Transformer: integrated fan 2. scaling: 09. not available with ACS 1000i B07 OutpTrafoTmp Transformer: output trafo temp. power ride through active B13 CtrlBackSupp Aux. too high B08 B09 B10 B11 MacroChange Control: user macro has been changed B12 AuxRideThrgh Aux.55 AlarmWord2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 TrafoTmp1 Transformer: trafo temperature 1 too high B01 TrafoTmp2 Transformer: trafo temperature 2 too high B02 TrTmpExt/3 Transformer: trafo temperature external / 3 too high B03 TrOilLevel Transformer: oil level too low B04 Buchholz Transformer: external Buchholz supervision B05 IntTrafFan1 Transformer: integrated fan 1. Power: control backup supply voltage failure B14 AnInpCalib Control: automatic calibration of IOEC boards in progress B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int.ABB 09.g. V or W) B01 MotWdgTmpU2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase U too high B02 MotWdgTmpV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V too high B03 MotWdgTmpW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W too high B04 Heater Motor: motor heater and/or cabinet heater internal contactor(s) B05 MotCooler Motor: motor cooler internal contactor B06 ExtMotCool Motor: external cooling B07 B08 BrgTemp DE Motor: temperature at the driven end bearing too high B09 BrgTemp NDE Motor: temperature at the non-driven end bearing too high B10 B11 B12 LoadBrgTmp1 Motor: bearing temperature 1 of load (e. pump) too high B14 B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 53/389 . pump) too high B13 LoadBrgTmp2 Motor: bearing temperature 2 of load (e. Power: aux.56 AlarmWord3 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 MotWdgTmp1 Motor: winding temperature 1 too high (phase U.

loss of analogue input B08 IOEC3AI1MLos General: IOEC3 AI1 . U) .loss of analogue input B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int.58 AlarmWord5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 CH0 Timeout Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) time-out B01 CH0 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 0 (fieldbus) link error B02 CH2 LinkErr Control: DDCS channel 2 (master/follower) link error B03 Panel Lost Control: panel communication loss B04 IOEC3AI4MLos General: IOEC3 AI4 .loss of analogue input B12 MotTmpMLosW2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase W . actual signal 1 is missing (PID-control) B10 IOEC4AI2MLos General: IOEC4 AI2 (AI2 for PID / Mot. 2 Ph.loss of analogue input B11 MotTmpMLosV2 Motor: winding temperature 2 of phase V . Tmp.loss of analogue input B09 ExtAct1Lost Control: analogue input.loss of analogue input B13 Brg DE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the driven end bearing - loss of analogue input B14 BrgNDE MLos Motor: temperature measurement at the non-driven end bearing .I Signal and Parameter Table .loss of analogue input B05 ExtRef1Lost Control: external reference signal 1 lost B06 ExtRef2Lost Control: external reference signal 2 lost B07 MotWdgMLos Motor: winding temperature measurement . scaling: 09. B08 MotPhUnbal Motor: phase currents unbalanced B09 B10 B11 B12 MotOverLoad Motor: overload according to programmable load curve B13 MotUndLoad Motor: underload according to programmable load curve B14 B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.57 AlarmWord4 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 ExtMotProt Motor: external protection relay B01 MotVibrat Motor: external vibration supervision B02 B03 B04 MotVibratAI1 Motor: vibration AI 1 too high B05 MotVibratAI2 Motor: vibration AI 2 too high B06 B07 InvOverLoad Inverter overloaded. Current is too high for this low frequency range. scaling: 54/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

60 AlarmWord7 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 InvAirTemp Air cooling: incoming cooling air too high B01 Fan (Grp) 1 Air cooling with redundant fans: fan (group) 1 failed B02 Fan (Grp) 2 Air cooling with redundant fans: fan (group) 2 failed B03 B04 FanDiffPres Air cooling: differential pressure too high B05 B06 AirFiltSupv Air cooling: optional: differential pressure too high B07 B08 OutsAirTemp Water cooling: outside air temperature too high B09 B10 BChopFan Braking chopper: fan failed B11 B12 InvFan1Disturbed Inverter fan 1 is disturbed (not ready to operate) B13 InvFan2Disturbed Inverter fan 2 is disturbed (not ready to operate) B14 TraFan1Disturbed Integrated transformer fan 1 is disturbed (not ready to operate) B15 TraFan2Disturbed Integrated transformer fan 2 is disturbed (not ready to operate) Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: 09.ABB 09. fan 1/2 failure B15 Unit: Type: NoType Int.59 AlarmWord6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 WtrTmpHigh Water Cooling: temperature too high B01 ExtWtrCool Water Cooling: external water cooling supervision B02 Pump 1 Water Cooling: pump 1 failure with redundant pumps B03 Pump 2 Water Cooling: pump 2 failure with redundant pumps B04 WtrTmpRef Water Cooling: deviation from water temperature reference value too big B05 B06 WtrPresDifLo Water Cooling: difference pressure too low (= output press. with open cooling system) B07 WtrPresDifHi Water Cooling: difference pressure too high (= output press. with open cooling system) B08 WtrPress1Hi Water Cooling: output pressure too high B09 WtrPress2Hi Water Cooling: input pressure too high (only with closed cooling system) B10 WtrPress2Lo Water Cooling: input pressure too low (only with closed cooling system) B11 B12 WtrConduct Water Cooling: conductivity too high B13 WtrLeakage Water Cooling: leakage of cooling water B14 AuxFan 1/2 Water Cooling: aux. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 55/389 .

I Signal and Parameter Table . bypass: Synchrotact 4/5 is in fault state B11 B12 B13 FanDiffPresLow EC fan control air pressure monitoring shows too low pressure B14 FanDiffPresHigh EC fan control air pressure monitoring shows too high pressure B15 NOT USED Unit: Type: NoType Int.70 AW Communication ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Communication alarm word. bypass: direction of motor is not forward B09 WrongSyncPar Sync. bypass: line circuit breaker 2 is closed but should be opened B06 Sbp3Control Sync. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 CCB Communication 1 CCB Communication Fault – B01 EXU Communication 1 EXU Communication Fault – SD B02 EXU PAI Communication 1 EXU PAI Communication Fault – SD B03 DCF CH 0 Communication 1 DCF CH 0 Communication Faulted B04 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm B05 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 2nd inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 2nd inv B06 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 3rd inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 3rd inv B07 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 4th inv 1 MF INTtoINT Link Alarm 4th inv B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. bypass: motor circuit breaker 4 is drawn out or faulty B04 Sbp1Control Sync. mode selection by digital inputs B10 Synchrotact Sync. bypass: line circuit breaker 1 is closed but should be opened B05 Sbp2Control Sync. bypass: line circuit breaker 4 is closed but should be opened B08 DirNotFwd Sync. bypass: line circuit breaker 3 is closed but should be opened B07 Sbp4Control Sync. bypass: motor circuit breaker 1 is drawn out or faulty B01 SM2NotAvl Sync. bypass: motor circuit breaker 2 is drawn out or faulty B02 SM3NotAvl Sync.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09. scaling: 56/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.61 AlarmWord8 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 SM1NotAvl Sync. bypass: motor circuit breaker 3 is drawn out or faulty B03 SM4NotAvl Sync. scaling: 09. bypass: wrong motor or sync.

Common B06 INT3 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT3 Wrong PUPA Version -.Common B09 INT1 INTERNAL 1 INT1 Internal Fault -.73 AW DC LinkVoltage ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY DC link voltage alarm word. scaling: 09.Common B12 INT4 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT4 Wrong EPLD Version -.ARU B07 INT3 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT3 PUPA FLASH Corrupted -. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT1 ASE Fault 1 INT1 ASE Fault 2nd inv .ARU B08 PUB: Wrong EPLD Ver 1 PUB Wrong EPLD Version .Common B10 INT2 INTERNAL 1 INT2 Internal Fault -.Common B07 INT2 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT2 PUPA FLASH Corrupted 3rd inv . scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 57/389 .Common B11 INT3 INTERNAL 1 INT3 Internal Fault -.ARU B04 INT3 ASE Fault 1 INT3 ASE Fault .Common B09 INT EPLD Versions 1 INT PLD Versions Mismatch .72 AW1 CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware 1 alarm word.ARU B05 INT2 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT2 Wrong EPLD Version 3rd inv .ARU B03 INT0 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT0 PUPA FLASH Corrupted -.Common B10 INT PUPA Versions 1 INT PUPA Versions Mismatch – Common B11 EXU FUSE 1 EXU Fuse Failure – SD B12 DCF AUX UNDERV 1 DCS Auxiliary Undervoltage detected – SD B13 DCF NO FAN ACK 1 DCS Fan is not running – SD B14 DCF NO MAIN COND ACK 1 DCS Main Conductor did not close – SD Unit: Type: I Int.ARU B05 INT3 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT3 Wrong EPLD Version -.SD B03 Ridethrough Net Asym 1 Ridethrough net asymmetric B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int.Common B02 INT0 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT0 Wrong PUPA Version -.ABB 09.Common B02 INT1 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT1 Wrong PUPA Version 2nd inv .ACS2000 B14 INT6 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT6 Wrong EPLD Version -. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Ridethrough 1 DC link Undervoltage Ridethrough Alarm – Common B01 RBU Temperature rise 1 RBU Temperature rise – AD.ACS2000 B13 INT5 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT5 Wrong EPLD Version -.ARU B04 INT2 ASE Fault 1 INT2 ASE Fault 3rd inv .Common B03 INT1 PUPA Corrupted 1 INT1 PUPA FLASH Corrupted 2nd inv .ACS2000 Unit: Type: I Int.ARU B01 INT0 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT0 Wrong EPLD Version -. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 ASE Fault 1 INT0 ASE Fault -. scaling: 09.ARU B01 INT1 Wrong EPLD Ver 1 INT1 Wrong EPLD Version 2nd inv .ARU B08 INT0 INTERNAL 1 INT0 Internal Fault -.Common B06 INT2 Wrong PUPA Ver 1 INT2 Wrong PUPA Version 3rd inv .71 AW CntrlHardware ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Control Hardware alarm word.SD B02 RBU disabled 1 RBU disabled – AD.

Common B02 INT2 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT2 DI/DT Supervision 3rd inv (Alarm) – Common B03 INT3 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT3 DI/DT Supervision 3rd inv (Alarm) .I Signal and Parameter Table .75 AW Short Circuit ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Short Circuit alarm word.Common B01 INT1 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT1 DI/DT Supervision 2nd inv (Alarm) . BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 HighNetworkVoltage 1 High Network Voltage – ARU B01 FrequencyNotNominal 1 Frequency Not Nominal – ARU B02 No Synchronization 1 No Synchronization – ARU B03 EXU: Undervoltage 1 EXU: Undervoltage Alarm – SD B04 EXU: No Sync 1 EXU: No Synchronization Alarm – SD B05 EXU: SupplyFreq 1 EXU: Supply Frequency Alarm – SD B06 DCS: Mains Underv 1 DCS Mains Undervoltage Alarm – SD B07 DCS: Not Sync 1 DCS not synchronized Alarm – SD B08 Neg Sequ Network Hi 1 Sequence Network High – ARU B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 High Current 1 High Current (SW Overcurrent retry active)– ARU B01 Ground Overcurrent 1 Floating ground current alarm B02 EXU: Overcurrent 1 Excitation overcurrent Alarm – SD B03 EXU: Alpha Min Flt 1 Excitation Alpha Min Alarm – SD B04 DCS Overcurrent 1 DCS overcurrent Alarm – SD B05 DCS Cur Ripple 1 DCS current ripple too big Alarm – SD B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 09. scaling: 09.74 AW Current ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Current alarm word. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 INT0 DI/DT SuperVi 1 INT0 DI/DT Supervision (Alarm) .77 AW Network ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Network alarm word.Common B04 B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 58/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.

BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 PUB: INT0 Faulted 1 PUB: INT0 Faulted .Common B01 PUB: INT1 Faulted 1 PUB: INT1 Faulted . scaling: 09.80 AW Other ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Other alarm word. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 PLL unlocked 1 PLL Unlocked Alarm – ARU B01 AUTORESTART 1 AUTORESTART Alarm – Common B02 Motor Underload 1 Motor underload alarm – SD.ABB 09. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 Speed Measurement 1 NTAC 3 consecutive communication Faults – AD. AD B07 EXU RideThrough 1 EXU ridethrough alarm – SD B08 INT1 Transition 1 INT1 Illegal transition request (Phase A1) – ACS2000 B09 INT2 Transition 1 INT2 Illegal transition request (Phase B1) – ACS2000 B10 INT3 Transition 1 INT3 Illegal transition request (Phase C1) – ACS2000 B11 INT1 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT1 Minimum pulse length (Phase A1) – ACS2000 B12 INT2 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT2 Minimum pulse length (Phase B1) – ACS2000 B13 INT3 MIN Pulse Length 1 INT3 Minimum pulse length (Phase C1) – ACS2000 B14 Motor Stall Protection 1 Motor stall protection alarm – ACS1000 Unit: Type: I Int.Common B02 PUB: INT2 Faulted 1 PUB: INT2 Faulted – Common B03 PUB: INT3 Faulted 1 PUB: INT3 Faulted – Common B04 EXU: Fault Class 1 1 EXU: Fault Class 1 (Alarm) – SD B05 EXU: Fault Class 2 1 EXU: Fault Class 2 (Alarm) – SD B06 EXU: Fault Class 3 1 EXU: Fault Class 3 (Alarm) – SD B07 EXU: Not Rdy On 1 EXU is not in ready on state (Alarm) – SD B08 EXU: Not Rdy Run 1 EXU is not in ready run state (Alarm) – SD B09 EXU: Not Rdy Ref 1 EXU is not in ready ref state (Alarm) – SD B10 EXU: Alarm 1 EXU Alarm pending – SD B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 59/389 . parameter – SD B06 IGCT TestMode 1 IGCT test mode running – SD.SD B01 Position Measurement 1 GRB 3 consecutive communication Faults – SD B02 Remote Position Difference 1 Remote position difference large B03 SSI Parity Counter 1 SSI parity counter alarm B04 Position Check 1 Encoder position check alarm B05 B06 B07 B08 B09 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 Unit: Type: I Int. AD B03 EXU CSM1 TimeOUT 1 EXU: CSM1 Timeout – SD B04 EXU BCO 1 EXU: BCO Fault – SD B05 REDUNDANCY LOST 1 RSD: Redundancy lost.78 AW SpeedPosition ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Speed and Position Alarm Word.79 AW Generic Faults ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Generic alarm word. scaling: 09.

I Signal and Parameter Table .82 SSW AlarmDiag ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Unit: Type: NoType Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 09.81 SSW FaultDiag ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: 60/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling: 09.

Start-Forward and Start-Reverse push-buttons are normally open and connected to digital inputs DI1 – IOEC2 and DI2 – IOEC2 respectively. Direction is fixed connection for according to parameter 11. Direction is fixed to connection for forward.(0V DC on Start/Stop and Direction) DI2 – IOEC2 = Forward.(0V DC on DI6 = Start/Stop) Stop. and DI5 – IOEC2 = Forward. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 11 Def: 3 Int.2P. 24V DC on DI3 = Reverse) 6 DI1P. 5 DI1P. The start push-button is Start/Stop) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2. Stop. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 61/389 .04 is set to 2 or 3.2P (three-wire Start/Stop commands are given by means of momentary connection for push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). Forward.5 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI6 – IOEC2 as above. 24V DC on DI1 – Start/Stop) IOEC2 = Start) 3 DI1. The Stop button is normally closed and connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2. and Direction commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).05 is set to 2 or 3.3 DIRECTION. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT SEL external control location is not selected 2 DI1 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to DI1 – IOEC2.CH4 The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from COMMON MODULE CH4 when 75. Multiple start push-buttons are connected in parallel and multiple Stop push-buttons are connected in series.(0V DC on DI3 = Start/Stop and Direction) Forward.3P (three-wire Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with connection for Start two separate momentary push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“).01 Ext1Strt/Stop/Dir This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start. Direction is connection for connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2. stop-push buttons are connected in series. Start Reverse.MODULE The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from COMMON MODULE when 75. 24V DC on DI6 = Start) 8 DI6. connection for Direction is connected to digital input DI5 – IOEC2.2P. 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = Reverse) Direction) 9 KEYPAD The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when external control location 1 is active. connection for Direction is connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2.ABB Group 11 START/STOP/DIR 11 START/STOP/DIR These parameter values can only be altered when the ACS1000 is stopped. 11 COMM. The stop push-button is normally closed and connected to and Stop) digital input DI3 – IOEC2.2 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2 as above. 7 DI 6 (two wire Start/Stop connected to DI6 – IOEC2. 10 COMM. Multiple start push-buttons are connected in parallel.3 (three-wire Start / Stop connected as with DI1P. 11. 24V DC on DI2 – IOEC2 = Reverse) 4 DI1P.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = Stop.(0V DC on Start/Stop.2P.

03 Direction This parameter allows you to fix the rotation of the motor to FORWARD or REVERSE.CH4 The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from COMMON MODULE CH4 when 75. Direction is connection for connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2. The Stop button is normally closed and connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2. 24V DC on DI6 = Start) 8 DI6. The stop push-button is normally closed and connected to and Stop) digital input DI3 – IOEC2.2 EXT2 STRT/STOP/DIR or by keypad push-buttons.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 11. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE 3 REQUEST Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. 7 DI 6 (two wire Start/Stop connected to DI6 – IOEC2.02 Ext2Strt/Stop/Dir This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start.I Signal and Parameter Table .(0V DC on Start/Stop and Direction) DI2 – IOEC2 = Forward. Direction is fixed to connection for forward.(0V DC on DI3 = Start/Stop and Direction) Forward.(0V DC on DI6 = Start/Stop) Stop. 24V DC on DI2 – IOEC2 = Reverse) 4 DI1P. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT SEL external control location is not selected 2 DI 1 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to DI1 – IOEC2. and DI5 – IOEC2 = Forward.2P (three-wire Start/Stop commands are given by means of momentary connection for push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). If you select REQUEST the direction is selected by digital inputs as defined by parameters 11.2P.04 is set to 2 or 3. 10 COMM. 24V DC on DI1 – Start/Stop) IOEC2 = Start) 3 DI1. Forward.2P.3P (three-wire Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with connection for Start two separate momentary push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). 11 COMM. The start push-button is Start/Stop) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2.5 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI6 – IOEC2 as above. Stop.3 DIRECTION.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = Stop. 5 DI1P. Direction is fixed connection for according to parameter 11. Multiple start push-buttons are connected in parallel.1 EXT1 STRT/STOP/DIR and 11. 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = Reverse) Direction) 9 KEYPAD The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when external control location 1 is active.2P. 24V DC on DI3 = Reverse) 6 DI1P.(0V DC on Start/Stop. connection for Direction is connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2. Start-Forward and Start-Reverse push-buttons are normally open and connected to digital inputs DI1 – IOEC2 and DI2 – IOEC2 respectively. scaling:1 == 1 62/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. stop-push buttons are connected in series.MODULE The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from COMMON MODULE when 75. scaling:1 == 1 11. Multiple start push-buttons are connected in parallel and multiple Stop push-buttons are connected in series.2 (two-wire Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2 as above. Start Reverse. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 11 Def: 1 Int.05 is set to 2 or 3. and Direction commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).3 (three-wire Start / Stop connected as with DI1P. connection for Direction is connected to digital input DI5 – IOEC2.

....03 16.M OD ULE EX T2 RE VERSE NOT SELE CTE D 1 DI 1.Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 63/389 .01 11.6 Defaul t: DI 1.ABB CDP 312 CONTROL PANEL LO C R EM 12.8 K EYPAD 9 AMC3-bo ar d CH 0 C OM M.6 2. 2 LO CAL START / STOP 2. . Modul e 11.M OD ULE 10 Comm.02 EXT1 / EXT2 SELECT remote con tr ol location Ext1 / E xt2 IOEC 2: N OT SE LEC TED 1 DI 1.01 EXT2 EXT1 DIRECTION PROCESS START/ST OP/DIR START/ST OP/DIR STOP selection of digitital i nput for control location Figure 11-1 Selection of Start / Stop / Direction.8 EX T1 REQUEST K EYP AD 9 10 REMOT E FO RW ARD DIRECTION C OM M. .02 11...

for MCB control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on the FRONT DOOR are used 2 DI1 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI1 – to Close and Open the IOEC2.MODULE The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from communication module when parameter 75. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI5 – IOEC2.13P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“).CH4 The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from communication module when parameter 75.2P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“).(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB.4P (three-wire connection to Close and Open MCB) the MCB) 5 DI3P. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 11 Def: 9 Int. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI4 – IOEC2. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2.DI3P.I Signal and Parameter Table . 10 COMM. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI7 – IOEC2. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 FRONT DOOR External MCB control location is not selected.4P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“).Signal and Parameter Table ABB 11.(0V DC on DI7 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI6 – IOEC2. 4 DI3 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI3 – to Close and Open the IOEC2.04 COMM MODULE is set to 2 or 3.05 COMM MODULE CH4 is set to 2. MCB) 24V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 3 DI1P. 8 DI7 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI7 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI13 – IOEC2. 11 COMM.(0V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB.04 Ext1 MCB Control This parameter defines the connections and the source of MCB ORDER CLOSE & MCB ORDER OPEN commands for external control location 1 (EXT1).6P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push-buttons (P stands for „pulse“). MCB) 24V DC on DI7 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 9 DI7P. MCB) 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 7 D5P. 6 DI5 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI5 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2. scaling:1 == 1 64/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

VALUE NAME MEANING 1 FRONT DOOR External MCB control location is not selected. MCB) 24V DC on DI3 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 5 DI3P. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI7 – IOEC2.MODULE The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from communication module when parameter 75. 6 DI5 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI5 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. MCB) 24V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 3 DI1P.ABB 11.(0V DC on DI1 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB.2P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“).05 Ext2 MCB Control This parameter defines the connections and the source of MCB ORDER CLOSE & MCB ORDER OPEN commands for external control location 2 (EXT2).(0V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI1 – IOEC2. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI6 – IOEC2.(0V DC on DI7 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB. 8 DI7 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI7 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI5 – IOEC2. 11 COMM.6P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“). The close push-button is Open the MCB) normally open and connected to digital input DI3 – IOEC2. MCB) 24V DC on DI7 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 9 DI7P.04 COMM MODULE is set to 2 or 3. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI2 – IOEC2.05 COMM MODULE CH4 is set to 2 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 11 Def: 9 Int.13P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“).(0V DC on DI3 – IOEC2 = order to open the MCB. 4 DI3 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI3 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI13 – IOEC2.4P (three-wire Close/Open commands are given by means of momentary connection to Close and push buttons (P stands for „pulse“). 10 COMM. MCB) 24V DC on DI5 – IOEC2 = order to close the MCB) 7 D5P.CH4 The OPEN/CLOSE commands are given from communication module when parameter 75. for MCB control the MCB ONLINE and OFFLINE push-buttons on the FRONT DOOR are used 2 DI1 (two wire connection MCB Open and Close command is connected to DI1 – to Close and Open the IOEC2. The open push-button is normally open and connected to digital input DI4 – IOEC2. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 65/389 .

02 EXT1 / EXT2 CDP 312 SELECT LO C REM pu sh bu tto ns o n contro l secti on door IOEC2 .DI9 DI 6 Feedback MCB Status open IO EC 1: OffLin DI 7 e OnL ine IOEC2 .09 EXT1 EXT2 MCB ON CONTROL MCB OBEN MCB AVAILABLE MCB CLOSING MCB OPENING MCB CONTROL MCB CONTROL MODE SIGNAL SIGNAL TIME LIMIT TIME LIMIT selection of digitital input for control l ocation Figure 11-2 Selection of MCB Control .05 21. 13 Def au l t: DI7.9 EXT2 Com m...M OD ULE 10 11.M OD ULE 10 AMC 3-bo ar d CH 0 Def aul t: DI7.Signal and Parameter Table ABB CONTROL PANEL 12.05 21.DI10 Feedback MCB Status closed IOEC2 .DI11 MCB MCB COMMAND rem ote con tr ol location E xt1 / E xt2 Feedback MCB Status Available LOGIC IO EC 2: DI 1.08 21. Mo dule C OM M.I Signal and Parameter Table .04 11..06 21.Overview 66/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev..13 2.9 EXT1 N OT SE LE CTE D 1 REMO TE C OM M.6 N OT SE LEC TE D 1 Open / Close LO C AL DI 7.13 2. .07 21..

CH4 10 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 10 Def: 7 Int. NAME VALUE MEANING DI1 – IO2 1 DI2 – IO2 2 DI3 – IO2 3 DI4 – IO2 4 DI5 – IO2 5 DI6 – IO2 6 EXT1 7 EXT2 8 COMM MODULE 9 COMM. The external control location of START/STOP/DIRECTION/MCB CONTROL commands and reference value (REF1 or REF2) is determined by this parameter.ABB Group 12 REFERENCE SELECT 12 REFERENCE SELECT The following parameters (except those marked with “O”) can be altered while the ACS1000 is running. The type of keypad reference 2 depends on the selected Application Macro. 2 REF2 Keypad reference 2 is selected as the active keypad reference. given in rpm. For example.01 Keypad Ref Select VALUE NAME MEANING 1 REF1 Keypad reference 1 is selected as the active keypad reference. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 Int. REF2 (%) is the torque reference.02 Ext1/Ext2 Select This parameter sets the digital input used for selecting the external control location. Keypad (%) reference 2 is given in (%). scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 67/389 . The type of the (rpm) reference is speed. If scalar control is selected. or fixes it to EXT1 or EXT2. 12. if the Torque Control Macro is selected. the reference is given in Hz. scaling:1 == 1 12.

the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal.03 Ext Ref1 Select This parameter provides the settings for external reference 1with respect to the control location.I Signal and Parameter Table .4D 10 DI5U.REF2 5 REF1 * REF2 6 MIN(REF1/REF2) 7 MAX(REF1/REF2) 8 DI3U. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000 Def: 0 rpm Int.0 rpm Status Running REM MotSpeed 1123.04 Ext Ref1 Minimum [Hz] This parameter sets the minimum speed reference in rpm.REF*REF1 14 Speed Reference LOC 1 1123. In the SCALAR control mode this parameter is given in Hz.AIx 3 REF1+REF2 4 REF1 . Note: If the reference is given through the communication module. (see fieldbus control manual for more information). In the SCALAR control mode this parameter is given in Hz. The digital inputs are located on IOEC2.AI1 2 REF2/IOx .REF 12 COMM.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 12. The value corresponds to the maximum of the analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF1.4DR 9 DI3U. NAME VALUE MEANING KEYPAD 1 REF1/IO2 .REF+REF1 13 COMM.6D 11 COMM. scaling:1 == 1 rpm rpm 12. (see fieldbus control manual for more information). Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000 Def: 1500 rpm Int.6 A Figure Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 2 Int. scaling:1 == 1 12.0 rpm MotCurr 259.05 Ext Ref1 Maximum [Hz] This parameter sets the maximum speed reference in rpm. The value corresponds to the minimum of the analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF1. the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. Note: If the reference is given through the communication module. scaling:1 == 1 rpm rpm 68/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

ma x speed 8 Min M AX E XT RE F1 M IN = E XT RE F1 M IN ...IO E C2 9. .01 S PE E D M AX (2 0.. S PE E D M AX see 1 2 . . . . 2 (1 2. ma x speed Min 2 .04) DI3..IO E C2 M otorp otentiom eter (referenc e ge nera tor) DI5. E XT RE F1 M AX (1 2.ABB E XT RE F1 S ELE CT (12.03) 12. E XT RE F1 M AX x Figure MSAI5150 ACS1000 69/389 . ..6 .4 .11 RE F RE F1 IN T ERN AL 2 S PE E D M IN = S PE E D M IN .05) Ma x M IN S cal ing: mi n .. . . . 1 1 ACC TIM E 2 (2 2. RE F - S ystem 12 E XT RE F1 M AX Da taS e t 1 Va l.01) Fi gure 13 -2 RE F2 IN T ERN AL 4 + 5 - 6 x E XT RE F1 M AX 7 (1 2.02) Ma x KE YPAD S cal ing: 1 mi n ...05) Ma x (03.04) OCOM verr.M. 10. 20000 14 0 = 0 .13 3 (2 0.24) 13 S cal ing: + 0 .

01 MINIMUM speed if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.REF2 5 REF1 * REF2 6 MIN(REF1/REF2) 7 MAX(REF1/REF2) 8 DI3U. scaling:10 == 1 % 70/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. The value corresponds to the minimum of the analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF2.06 Ext Ref2 Select This parameter provides the settings for external reference 2 with respect to the control location. this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency defined by parameter 20.6D 11 COMM. The possibilities are the same as for External Reference 1.Macro or PID ( if Torque Control .Macro or PID Control .0 % LOC 1 50. the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal.REF*REF1 14 COMM. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process quantity.6 A MotCurr 259.AI1 3 REF1+REF2 4 REF1 . Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. this parameter sets the minimum torque reference.REF+REF1 13 COMM. In the SCALAR control mode.xx MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 20.If the Factory. Hand/Auto or Sequential Control macro is selected.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 12. Note: If the reference is given through the communication module.4DR 9 DI3U.0 % Status Running Status Running REM MotSpeed 1123.6 A Figure Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 1 Int.AI1 2 REF2/IO1 .If the Torque Control macro is selected. this parameter sets the minimum of the process reference. NAME VALUE MEANING KEYPAD 1 REF1/IO2 . scaling:1 == 1 12.If PID Control Macro is selected.REF 12 COMM.I Signal and Parameter Table .4D 10 DI5U.xx MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit. See parameter 12.0 % MotCurr 259. See fieldbus control manual for more information. The value is given as a percentage of the nominal torque.Macro is selected ) Control -Macro is selected ) LOC 1 98. this parameter sets the minimum speed reference.0 rpm REM MotTorq 50. The digital inputs are located on IOEC2.07 Ext Ref2 Minimum [%] This parameter sets the minimum reference in percent. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined by parameter 20.03.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20.CH4 15 Speed Reference Torque Reference ( if not Torque Control .

Hand/Auto or Sequential Control macro is selected.xx MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum limits is greater than the maximum limit.. scaling:10 == 1 % E XT RE F2 S ELE CT (12.xx MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 20..IO E C2 9.06) 12.. . .08) Ma x M IN S cal ing: mi n . ma x speed 8 Min M AX E XT RE F2 M IN = E XT RE F2 M IN . . E XT RE F2 M AX (1 2.6 .If the Torque Control macro is selected.IO E C2 M otorpoten tiom eter (re ferenc e genera tor) DI5. 0 ..08) Ma x (03.07) DI3.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20..01 S PE E D M AX (2 0.. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int.25) 13 S cal ing: + 0 . .01 MINIMUM speed if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.11 RE F RE F1 IN T ERN AL 2 S PE E D M IN = S PE E D M IN . E XT RE F2 M AX x Figure 12_5 Selection of REF2 . 1 1 ACC TIM E 2 (22..ABB 12. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined with parameter 20. .08 Ext Ref2 Maximum [%] This parameter sets the maximum reference in percent. S PE E D M AX see 1 2 . this parameter sets the maximum of process reference. . Note: If the reference is given through the communication module.Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 71/389 .If the Factory.In the SCALAR control mode. this parameter sets the maximum speed reference. RE F - S ystem 12 E XT RE F2 M AX Da taS e t 1 Va l. ma x speed Min 2 . 10000 14 0 = 0 . (see fieldbus control manual for more information). The value is given as a percentage of the nominal torque. 3 (1 2. . 10.02) Ma x KE YPAD S cal ing: 1 mi n .13 3 (2 0. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process quantity. ..01) Fi gure 13 -2 RE F2 IN T ERN AL 4 + 5 - 6 x E XT RE F2 M AX 7 (1 2. the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency defined by parameter 20.. 20000 resp. .If PID Control Macro is selected.4 . this parameter sets the maximum torque reference.M.04) OCOM verr. The value corresponds to the maximum of the analogue input signal (or motor potentiometer) connected to REF2.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB Figure 12_6 Selection of SPEED REF .I Signal and Parameter Table .Overview The range of the analogue input signal is set by parameter 13.03 and 13. EXT REF2 is a speed or torque reference of the motor. In the SCALAR control mode EXT REF2 is a frequency reference given in %. Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given) from two External control locations or from the Local control location.08. reference. The selection between Local control and External control can be done with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel Keypad. or a process reference depending on the selected Application Macro. Control Panel Keypad. Figure 12-7 Setting of EXT REF MINIMUM and MAXIMUM 72/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.e. The ACS1000 can be controlled (i.

6 . L (Local) indicates this on the control Panel. the commands are given primarily through the control terminal blocks on the IOEC 1 and 2 board (digital and analogue inputs). VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO Tracking function is not active 1 YES Tracking function is active S oftwa re MOT O R-POT E NT IO MET ER RE F 1 (REF2) DI3.ABB Local Control The control commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when the ACS1000 is in Local control. Figure 12-8 Setting of Local/External Control .IOEC2 9.Overview Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: NO Int.Overview 12. External Control When the ACS1000 is in External control. Commands can also be given through the control panel or a fieldbus adapter module.0 4 Accel Time 2 External 2 (1) Active Init & 1 Mot Pot Tracking 1 2.0 9 REF 2 (REF1) Init Value Figure 12-9 Motor Potentiometer Tracking Function . 11 2 2. The motor potentiometer will be initialised with the actual speed reference value after changing from “Externa Control Location” 2 to 1 and vice versa.09 MotPotTracking With this parameter it is possible to activate a so-called “tracking function”. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 73/389 . 10.4 .IOEC2 DI5.

13.. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0.10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.01 to ON.01 will be is automatically set to “OFF”. scaling:10 == 1 % 13. scaling:1 == 1 74/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. The OFFSET calibration is started and the analogue input offset values are stored into AIx OFFSET IOx parameters.. If one of the analogue input values is higher than 0. See parameter 4.20 mA or 0.03 AI1 Minimum IO1 Minimum value of AI1. 13.01 is automatically set to “OFF”. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. 13. Automatic offset calibration: All analogue input signals have to be disconnected from the IOEC 1 & 2 board (remove the terminal plugs) and all AIx OFFSET IOx parameters must have value “0”.20 mA or 2. Check the actual value in Group 04..01 ExternalRef2... Value to correspond to minimum reference. Change the offset value until the actual value is 0 mA. Manual offset calibration: Disconnect the appropriate analogue input signal from the IOEC x board (remove the terminal plug).. Offset value will be stored into the appropriate AIx OFFSET Iox parameter. Set Par.I Signal and Parameter Table .01 AutoOffsetCalib Automatic offset calibration for the analogue inputs of IOEC 1 & 2.02 AI1 Scale IO1 [%] Scaling of analogue input AI1.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS The analogue input value can be selected in milliamps or volts by means of a HW-switch. During offset calibration. Par.12 AI1 IOEC1 and 4.5mA the offset calibration will not be carried out and the fault message “AnInpCalib” will be shown on the panel.. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF no offset calibration 1 ON automatic offset calibration started Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. 13. This value corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4. Par. scaling:1 == 1 13. the alarm message “AnInpCalib” is shown on the panel.. After the calibration is finished.

16 AI1 IOEC2 and 4.08 AI1 Minimum IO2 Minimum value of AI1.Diagram Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 1 s Int. 63% of the change takes place within the time specified by this parameter. scaling:1000 == 1 mA 13. Figure 13 1 Filter Time Constant For Analogue Inputs . This value corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V). Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.01 = ON) or manually. While the analogue input value changes...13. Note: Even if 0s as the minimum value is selected.06 AI1 Offset IO1 [mA] Analogue input offset value. Note: Even if 0s as the minimum value is selected.10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4. the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 20ms due the signal interface hardware. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int..10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:100 = 1 s MSAI5150 ACS1000 75/389 .. scaling:10 == 1 % 13. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par. the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 20ms due the signal interface hardware. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.04 AI1 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input 1. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0.. This cannot be changed by any parameter. scaling:1 == 1 13.05 ExternalRef1. scaling:1 == 1 13.09 AI1 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input 1.20 mA or 2.05 AI1 Invert IO1 Analogue input signal inversion.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int.20 mA or 0. Value to correspond to minimum reference.ABB 13. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:100 = 1 s 13.. This cannot be changed by any parameter.07 AI1 Scale IO2 [%] Scaling of analogue input AI1... See parameter 4.

scaling:1000 == 1 mA Figure 13 2 Analogue Input AI1-IOEC1 and AI1-IOEC2 .10 AI1 Invert IO2 Analogue input signal inversion.I Signal and Parameter Table .11 AI1 Offset IO2 [mA] Analogue input offset value. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0. scaling:1 == 1 13.Overview 76/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01 = ON) or manually. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.13.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 13.

. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 2000 Int.Example 13.12 AI2 HighValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).AI1 is scaled to 10% by parameter 13. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 77/389 ..02.07..10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 13.13 AI2 LowValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V).09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1. scaling:1 == 1 13.20 mA or 2.15 AI2 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input 2. Value to correspond to minimum reference. See parameter 4. See parameter 4.17 AI2 IOEC2 and 4. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 13. scaling:100 = 1 s 13.10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4.AI1 is scaled to 100% by parameter 13. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0.05.09 MotorWdgTmpPhU1..17 AI2 IOEC2 and 4. The analogue input IO2 . Figure 13 3 Scaling of Analogue Inputs AI1-IOEC1 and AI1-IOEC2 .14 AI2 Minimum IO2 Minimum value of AI2.ABB External reference 1 is selected by parameter 12. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 10 s Int.03 as REF1 + REF2 and the maximum value (1500rpm) by parameter 12.. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Int.. The analogue input IO1..20 mA or 0..16 AI2 Invert IO2 Analogue input signal inversion.

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 10 s Int.11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1.10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4.20 mA or 2.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int. scaling:1000 == 1 mA 13.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 13.13.I Signal and Parameter Table ...13. Will be set automatic offset calibration (Par. scaling:1 == 1 13.10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1..10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.25 AI4 LowValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V). Value to correspond to minimum reference.17 AI2 Offset IO2 [mA] Analogue input offset value. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par. See parameter 4. scaling:1 == 1 13..20 mA or 0..18 AI3 IOEC2 and 4.26 AI4 Minimum IO2 Minimum value of AI4. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Int.22 AI3 Invert IO2 Analogue input signal inversion. See parameter 4.23 AI3 Offset IO2 [mA] Analogue input offset value.20 mA or 0. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.20 AI3 Minimum IO2 Minimum value of AI3. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.19 AI3 LowValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V).18 AI3 HighValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V)..5 mA Def: 0 mA Int. See parameter 4....10 MotorWdgTmpPhV1...19 AI4 IOEC2 and 4. scaling:1 == 1 13. Value to correspond to minimum reference. scaling:1 == 1 78/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 2000 Int.21 AI3 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input 3. scaling:100 = 1 s 13. scaling:1 == 1 13..11 MotorWdgTmpPhW1.. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 0 Int.10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4. scaling:1000 == 1 mA 13. See parameter 4.. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0.20 mA or 2.01 = ON) or manually..24 AI4 HighValue IO2 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V). scaling:1 == 1 13.10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int..01 = ON) or manually.19 AI4 IOEC2 and 4.18 AI3 IOEC2 and 4. scaling:1 == 1 13. Unit: Type: I Min: -10000 Max: 10000 Def: 2000 Int.

32 AI2 Minimum IO1 Minimum value of AI2.13 AI2 IOEC1 and 4. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par. NAME VALUE MEANING 0mA/0V 0 4mA/2V 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.01 = ON) or manually.06 InvAirTemp2 (for air cooled converters).02 InvWtrCoolTemp (for water cooled converters) resp. scaling:1 == 1 13. See parameter 4. Figure Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 mA Max: 0. scaling:100 = 1 s 13.30 AI2 HighValue IO1 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).29 AI4 Offset IO2 [mA] Analogue input offset value. scaling:1000 == 1 mA 13.31 AI2 LowValue IO1 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V). 4. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the input Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.5 mA Def: 0 mA Int.ABB 13.02 InvWtrCoolTemp (for water cooled converters) resp. scaling: 10550 13. Value to correspond to minimum reference.13 AI2 IOEC1 and 4. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 30 s Def: 10 s Int. scaling: 13. See parameter 4.13. 4. scaling:1==1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 79/389 .28 AI4 Invert IO2 Analogue input signal inversion. Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1000 / Int. Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 / -13 Int.06 InvAirTemp2 (for air cooled converters).27 AI4 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input 4.

03 InvWtrCoolPressur (for water cooled converters) resp. 4.15 AI4 IOEC1 and 4.01 = ON) or manually.20 mA or 2.20 mA or 0...5 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1==1000 13.14 AI3 IOEC1 and 4... scaling:1==1 80/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. See parameter 4. 4. Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 100 / Int.5 Def: 0 Int.04 InvWtrConductivit (for water cooled converters) resp.. scaling: 13.38 AI3 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input..42 AI4 Minimum IO1 Minimum value of AI4.13. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0.13. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 0.08 TrafoTemp2 (for ACS 1000i). Value to correspond to minimum reference.04 InvWtrConductivit (for water cooled converters) resp. 4. Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 / -13 Int..41 AI4 LowValue IO1 This value divided by 100 (water) resp. See parameter 4. Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 200 / Int. See parameter 4.34 AI2 Offset IO1 [mA] Analogue input offset value.35 AI3 HighValue IO1 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).I Signal and Parameter Table ..40 AI4 HighValue IO1 This value divided by 100 (water) resp. See parameter 4. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 0..10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4.10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.03 InvWtrCoolPressur (for water cooled converters) resp.. 4. Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par.14 AI3 IOEC1 and 4. scaling: 13.... Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 5 / -13 Int. Value to correspond to minimum reference.15 AI4 IOEC1 and 4. scaling: 10550 13. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0. scaling: 13.1s / 1s Int.10V range) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling: 10550 13.39 AI3 Offset IO1 [mA] Analogue input offset value.5s / 1s Int. scaling: 13.20 mA or 2.33 AI2 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input.10V range) 1 4mA/2V (4. 10 (air) corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V).07 TrafoTemp1 (for ACS 1000i). scaling:1==1000 13. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 0mA/0V (0..20 mA or 0.07 TrafoTemp1 (for ACS 1000i).37 AI3 Minimum IO1 Minimum value of AI3.36 AI3 LowValue IO1 This value divided by 10 corresponds to the minimum input value in milliampere (0 or 4mA) or volt (0 or 2V). Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par.. 10 (air) corresponds to the maximum input value in milliampere (20mA) or volt (10V).08 TrafoTemp2 (for ACS 1000i).01 = ON) or manually.. scaling:1==1 13.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 13.

13. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0.44 AI4 Offset IO1 [mA] Analogue input offset value. Set 13. scaling:1==1000 Automatic offset calibration: All analogue input signals have to be disconnected from the IOEC 1 2 board (remove the terminal plugs). Manual offset calibration: Disconnect the appropriate analogue input signal from the IOEC x board (remove the terminal plug). 4 – IOEC1/2 . Figure 13 4 Analogue Input AI2 .01 = ON) or manually. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0s Max: 60s Def: 10s / 1s Int. Change the offset value until the actual value is 0 mA.5 Def: 0 Int. The OFFSET value will be stored into the offset parameters.43 AI4 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue input.01 to ON.ABB 13. Check the actual value in Group 04.. scaling: 13.Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 81/389 . Will be set during automatic offset calibration (Par..

12HIGH VALUE: 20 mA (10V)= 200°CÞ Setting = 2000 (max value multiplied by 10) 13. 10V) = 0 ..01 will overwrite the offset value for AI2. Figure 13. If the temperature differs from 0°C the automatical offset calibration can be started to correct this.45 will be automatically set to "OFF" VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF no offset calibration 1 ON automatic offset calibration started Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. 180°C The actual motor winding temperature in phase U is shown in parameter 04.06 MotorWdgTmpPhaseU (in °C)... 200°C Explanation of parameter settings: 13.. Note! ..14MIN VALUE:4 mA ( 2V)= ÞSetting = 4mA (2V) Þ MOTOR WDG TMP PHASE U:4 .45 AI2 OffsetCal IO1 Automatic offset calibration for the analog input 2 of the IOEC1 board. selected by HW-switch) Range=0 .I Signal and Parameter Table ... scaling:1 == 1 82/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Offset value will be stored into the appropriate AI2 OFFSET IO1 parameter (13..After the calibration is finished. 20mA (2 .2 (instead of PT100).. With this resistor the measured temperature should be 0°C. . 20 mA (or 2 ... parameter 13.. Automatic offset calibration: To ensure an accurate temperature measurement a 100 Ohm resistor has to be connected to –X302:1.e.34). MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE PHASE U Transmitter range:analogue signal =4 .13LOW VALUE:4 mA ( 2V)= 0°CÞSetting = 0 (min value multiplied by 10) 13..Offset calibration from parameter 13. 10V .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Example: Scaling of an analogue input signal: I.

.After the calibration is finished.47 will be automatically set to "OFF" VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF no offset calibration 1 ON automatic offset calibration started Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. With this resistor the measured temperature should be 0°C. Note! .Offset calibration from parameter 13.. With this resistor the measured temperature should be 0°C. If the temperature differs from 0°C the automatical offset calibration can be started to correct this.6 (instead of PT100). Offset value will be stored into the appropriate AI3 OFFSET IO1 parameter (13. scaling:1 == 1 13.46 AI3 OffsetCal IO1 Automatic offset calibration for the analog input 3 of the IOEC1 board. parameter 13. Note! .Offset calibration from parameter 13. parameter 13.47 AI4 OffsetCal IO1 Automatic offset calibration for the analog input 4 of the IOEC1 board.01 will overwrite the offset value for AI3.4 (instead of PT100). If the temperature differs from 0°C the automatical offset calibration can be started to correct this..ABB 13.44).After the calibration is finished. Offset value will be stored into the appropriate AI4 OFFSET IO1 parameter (13.39). scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 83/389 .01 will overwrite the offset value for AI4.45 will be automatically set to "OFF" VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF no offset calibration 1 ON automatic offset calibration started Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Automatic offset calibration: To ensure an accurate temperature measurement a 100 Ohm resistor has to be connected to –X302:3. Automatic offset calibration: To ensure an accurate temperature measurement a 100 Ohm resistor has to be connected to –X302:5. .

.05 ‘’ = ‘Air&Trafo’) DO2 is fixed to the ‘TrafoProtReset’ command. scaling:1 == 1 14.13 or14” . 112. If Par.03 DO2 Invert IO1 Inversion selection for output-signal DO2 VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON . low value = relay ON ) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 14. The format is (x)xyy.02 is set to “12. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO1 by setting this parameter to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. By default. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 1 Int.13 or14” .04.01.04 DO1Group+IndexIO2 A binary signal (i. scaling:1 == 1 14. scaling:1 == 1 14. low value = relay ON ) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. digital output DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO2 by setting this parameter to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. 8. Example: If Par. 14.I Signal and Parameter Table .04 / Bit 12) NOTE! With an ACS 1000i (par.04 is set to “801” and 14.01 DO2Group+IndexIO1 A binary signal (i. 14. scaling:1 == 1 84/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev..01 is set to “801” and 14.e. Additionally the bit number that identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter.05 is set to “12.05 DO1 BitNumber IO2 This parameter specifies the bit number (0.15) of the previous selected signal in 14.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2. low value = relay OFF) 1 INVERTED (high value = relay OFF . Example: If Par.15) of the previous selected signal in 14.e. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.04 is set to “702” and 14. digital output DO1 is active when 8. digital output DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7. 14. DO2 is the TrafoProtReset signal (Par. 8. low value = relay OFF) 1 INVERRED (high value = relay OFF . The format is (x)xyy.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2.01 / Bit 1) Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 801 Int.06 DO1 Invert IO2 Inversion selection for output-signal DO1 VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON . If Par. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 12 Int.02 is set to “1” ..05 is set to “1” .. Additionally the bit number that identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 14 DIGITAL OUTPUTS 14.02 DO2 BitNumber IO1 This parameter specifies the bit number (0. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int. By default.01 MAIN STATUS WORD / BIT 1 is “1”.01 is set to “702” and 14. scaling:1 == 1 14.01 MAIN STATUS WORD / BIT 1 is “1”. digital output DO2 is active when 8. 14. DO1 indicates DRIVE READY signal (Par.

low value = relay OFF) 1 INVERTED (high value = relay OFF . digital output DO3 is active when 8. digital output DO3 is controlled from the overriding system by 7. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.12 DO3 Invert IO2 Inversion selection for output-signal DO3 0 = DIRECT (high value = relay ON .01 / Bit 7) Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 801 Int.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2. Additionally the bit number that identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter. scaling:1 == 1 14. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO2 by setting this parameter to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.. DO3 indicates ALARM signal (Par.15) of the previous selected signal in 14. low value = relay ON ) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Additionally the bit number that identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter.10.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2. 14..07 is set to “801” and 14. from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO3 by setting this parameter to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 85/389 . Example: If Par. 8.e. By default.01 / Bit 2) Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 801 Int.11 is set to “12. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 7 Int.07 DO2Group+IndexIO2 A binary signal (i. low value = relay ON ) VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON . low value = relay OFF) 1 = INVERTED (high value = relay OFF . digital output DO2 is active when 8. By default.15) of the previous selected signal in 14. If Par.13 or14”.08 DO2 BitNumber IO2 This parameter specifies the bit number (0.11 is set to “7”.10 DO3Group+IndexIO2 A binary signal (i.07 is set to “702” and 14.08 is set to “2”. 14. scaling:1 == 1 14.. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 2 Int. The format is (x)xyy. low value = relay OFF) 1 INVERTED (high value = relay OFF . where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. The format is (x)xyy. low value = relay ON ) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.13 or14”..10 is set to “801” and 14.08 is set to “12.09 DO2 Invert IO2 Inversion selection for output-signal DO2 VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON .10 is set to “702” and 14. scaling:1 == 1 14. digital output DO1 is controlled from the overriding system by 7. If Par.11 DO3 BitNumber IO2 This parameter specifies the bit number (0. 14. 8.ABB 14. Example: If Par. scaling:1 == 1 14. DO2 indicates RUNNING signal (Par.01 MAIN STATUS WORD / BIT 7 is “1”.07. scaling:1 == 1 14.e. 14.01 MAIN STATUS WORD / BIT 2 is “1”.

GROUP : 8 ÞSTATUS WORDSù Þ 14. Example: If Par.15) of the previous selected signal in 14.13 DO4Group+IndexIO2 A binary signal (i.13 or14”.14 is set to “3”. low value = relay OFF) 1 INVERTED (high value = relay OFF . where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.. 14.. By default.05:2 INVERTED: NOÞDIRECTÞ 14. Additionally the bit number that identifies the signal within the status word has to be selected with the next parameter.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 14. DO4 indicates TRIPPED signal (Par. The format is (x)xyy.13 is set to “702” and 14.01 / Bit 3) Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 801 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .14 DO4 BitNumber IO2 This parameter specifies the bit number (0.15 DO4 Invert IO2 Inversion selection for output-signal DO4 VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT (high value = relay ON .14 is set to “12.01 MAIN STATUS WORD / BIT 3 is “1”. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 3 Int. 14. scaling:1 == 1 Example Programming of the digital output signal IOEC2 – D01: The digital output should be closed if the drive is running. 8.02 AUX CONTROL WORD 2. If Par.04:801 INDEX :01ÞMAIN STATUS WORDû BIT NUMBER:2ÞRDYREF (RUNNING)Þ14. scaling:1 == 1 14. digital output DO4 is controlled from the overriding system by 7.Overview 86/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. low value = relay ON ) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.13 is set to “801” and 14. scaling:1 == 1 14.06:DIRECT Figure 14-1 Digital Output DO1 … DO4 – IOEC2 . from a status word) is assigned to digital output DO4 by setting this parameter to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. digital output DO4 is active when 8.13.e.

01 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from.01.12 or 92.08) by means of either parameters 90. Unit: Type: R Min: -65536 Max: 65536 Def: 500 Int.01 is 106. The data set where the value is transmitted into the AMC-table is directed to one of the DATA parameters (19.01 to the group and index of the desired DATA parameter (for example: 1901 Þ 19 = group .03 AO1 Minimum IO1 Analogue output signal offset in milliampere.IOEC1. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 0mA no offset 2 4mA 20% offset (area 4…20mA) 3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA (for indication of direction i.01 AO1Group+IndexIO1.1 s Int. MOTOR FREQUENCY.90. 01 = index) The default setting of 15.01 is set to 106 with 1 representing the group and 06 representing the index.05 AO1 Scale IO1 Nominal values of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 15.02 AO1 Invert IO1 Analogue output signal inversion.ABB Group 15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS 15. A numerical value from a higher-level control system can also transferred to the analogue output.. Note! In case of EC fans this analog output cannot be used as free programmable. scaling:1 == 1 15. The value is then assigned to the analogue output by setting 15.12 (see Figure 19-1). scaling:1 == 1 15. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 87/389 . Example: When the actual value of the MOTOR FREQUENCY is to be read out at AO1 . Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0. motor speed.04 AO1 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue output.) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 2 Int. parameter 15. See Figure 15-2. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.01…93. motor torque.01…19. scaling:1 == 1 15. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2). Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 106 Int. scaling:10 == 1 s 15.. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. The format is (x)xyy.01 AO1Group+IndexIO1 A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to analogue output by setting parameter 15.e. since it's used for fan speed reference.

MOTOR TORQUE.06 to the group and index of the desired DATA parameter (for example: 1901 Þ 19 = group . See Figure 15-2.07 AO2 Invert IO1 Analogue output signal inversion.01…93.09 AO2 Filter IO1 [s] Filter time constant for analogue output.06 is 109.90.e.01…19. Unit: Type: R Min: -65536 Max: 65536 Def: 100 Int. A numerical value from a higher-level control system can also transferred to the analogue output. Example: When the actual value of the MOTOR TORQUE is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC1.AO2 is fix set to 4mA to provide a current source for temperature measurements and the settings of 15. parameter 15.06 AO2Group+IndexIO1. The data set where the value is transmitted into the AMC-table is directed to one of the DATA parameters (19. scaling:1 == 1 15. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).08) by means of either parameters 90.12 (see Figure 19-1). scaling:10 == 1 s 15.. motor torque. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. The value is then assigned to the analogue output by setting 15. scaling:1 == 1 15. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 0mA no offset 2 4mA 20% offset (area 4…20mA) 3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA(for indication of direction i. The format is (x)xyy.06 is set to 109 with 1 representing the group and 09 representing the index. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.06 AO2Group+IndexIO1 A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to analogue output by setting parameter 15.I Signal and Parameter Table .01.06…10 are irrelevant.1 s Int. scaling:1 == 1 88/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NOTE! With ACS 1000i the output IOEC1 . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 109 Int.08 AO2 Minimum IO1 Analogue output signal offset in milliampere.06 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from. motor speed. 01 = index) The default setting of 15.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 15. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0.10 AO2 Scale IO1 Nominal values of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 15..) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 2 Int.12 or 92. scaling:1 == 1 15.

16 is set to 108 with 1 representing the group and 08 representing the index. Example: When the actual value of the MOTOR TORQUE FILT is to be read out at AO2 – IOEC2.. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0. scaling:1 == 1 15. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2).01…19. 01 = index) The default setting of 15.12 (see Figure 19-1). parameter 15. parameter 15.16 is 108.12 or 92.14 AO1 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue output.12 (see Figure 19-1). The data set where the value is transmitted into the AMC-table is directed to one of the DATA parameters (19.11 to the group and index of the desired DATA parameter (for example: 1901 Þ 19 = group .01..16 to the group and index of the desired DATA parameter (for example: 1901 Þ 19 = group .1 s Int.11 is set to 102 with 1 representing the group and 02 representing the index. Example: When the actual value of the MOTOR SPEED is to be read out at AO1 – IOEC2.13 AO1 Minimum IO2 Analogue output signal offset in milliampere.12 or 92. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.The format is (x)xyy. Unit: Type: R Min: -65536 Max: 65536 Def: 1500 Int. A numerical value from a higher-level control system can also transferred to the analogue output. The data set where the value is transmitted into the AMC-table is directed to one of the DATA parameters (19.16 AO2Group+IndexIO2 A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to analogue output by setting parameter 15. motor torque.15 AO1 Scale IO2 Nominal values of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 15. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. A numerical value from a higher-level control system can also transferred to the analogue output. motor speed.16 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from. The value is then assigned to the analogue output by setting 15.e.90. scaling:1 == 1 15. The value is then assigned to the analogue output by setting 15.11 AO1Group+IndexIO2 A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to analogue output by setting parameter 15. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 102 Int. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 108 Int.90.01…19. 01 = index) The default setting of 15.. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.01…93.ABB 15. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 89/389 . The format is (x) xyy. MOTOR SPEED.) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int..01.01…93.08) by means of either parameters 90.11 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from.08) by means of either parameters 90. scaling:1 == 1 15.11 AO1Group+IndexIO2. scaling:1 == 1 15.11 is 102. See Figure 15-2. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 0mA no offset 2 4mA 20% offset (area 4…20mA) 3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA(for indication of direction i.12 AO1 Invert IO2 Analogue output signal inversion. MOTOR TORQUE FILT. scaling:10 == 1 s 15.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 15.18 AO2 Minimum IO2 Analogue output signal offset in milliampere. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10s Def: 0. scaling:1 == 1 Figure 15-1 Analogue Output AO1 AO2 – IOEC1 / IOEC2 .16 AO2Group+IndexIO2. See Figure 15-2.e.20 AO2 Scale IO2 Nominal values of the signal whose group and index is defined in parameter 15. motor speed. motor torque. scaling:1 == 1 15.Overview 90/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling:10 == 1 s 15. Unit: Type: R Min: -65536 Max: 65536 Def: 100 Int. See Figure 15-2.17 AO2 Invert IO2 Analogue output signal inversion.1 s Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO minimum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output 1 YES maximum signal value corresponds to the minimum value at the output Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 0mA no offset 2 4mA 20% offset (area 4…20mA) 3 10mA 50% offset on area 0…20 mA (for indication of direction i. motor torque. motor speed.) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .)(for indication of direction i. This value corresponds to 20mA at the output (See Figure 15-2). scaling:1 == 1 15.19 AO2 Filter IO2 [s] Filter time constant for analogue output.e.

. 0 ..... 1000rpm Figure 15-2 Range of Analogue Output Signal AO1 . 10 .12AO1 INVERT IO2:NOÞ min .. 20mA = -1000 .... 20mA Calculation of parameter settings: 15..15AO1 SCALE IO2:1000Þe.. max speed= 0 ... max speed= 0 ..e.Diagram Figure 15 3 Scaling of Analogue Output Signal AO1 – IOEC2 (MotorSpeed) .g. min speed .5sÞfilter time 15.IOEC1 .01).11AO1 GROUP+INDEX IO2:1.ABB Example: Scaling of an analogue output signal i.02ÞMOTOR SPEED 15.14AO1 FILTER IO2:0.01 = 1000rpm Þ MOTOR SPEED : 0 ..... 10 .. AO1 – IOEC2: MOTOR SPEED Signal :1. 20mA 15..13AO1 MINIMUM IO2:10mAÞmin ..02 MOTOR SPEED Signal range of actual speed :Range (see parameter 50... 0 . max speed analogue output Signal = 0 . 50. 20mA 15..Example MSAI5150 ACS1000 91/389 .

21. During ramp down “RAMP STOP SUPERVISION” is activated (see Par.06) => torque is set to zero => flux is ramped down to 20% => machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector. 22. the drive is stopping according to the following steps: RAMP STOP MODE: Motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 16 SYST CTRL INPUT 16 SYST CTRL INPUT Figure 16 1 Process Stop .Overview After a process stop command is given.I Signal and Parameter Table .05 Process Stop Speed Difference). 22.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par.06) and SHAPE TIME (Par. TORQ STOP MODE: PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par.07) are set to zero (internal by SW) => motor is ramped down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum allowed DC voltage COAST STOP MODE: Torque is set to zero => drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below self excitation speed (deceleration time has no influence) => flux is ramped down to 20% => machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector 92/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 22.

06 (rpm) (rpm) (rpm) nself nself nself Par.ABB Motor Ctrl Mode 99.05 ramp stop faile d => go to "COAST STOP MODE" nself t (s) Figure 16 1 Process Stop .01 n =0 MCB Opening Process Stop NOT USED RAMP STOP & "Fault" 1 1 1 Trip 1a DI8 .CH4 4 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 2 Int.Overview 16.07.mode is selected. module may not be used at a follower drive. Note! The selection comm.MODULE 3 COMM.05 (rpm) Par.13 D=1 SCALAR Process Stop Mode 21. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 93/389 .MOD ULE 3 3 COAST STOP & "Alarm" (7. 7.Bit12) "0" = Process Stop active "1" = Process Stop inactive Process Stop Ramp RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE COAST STOP MODE n n n 22.06 .01 Process Stop This parameter selects the source of the PROCESS STOP (run enable) signal. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT USED 1 DI8-IO2 2 COMM.04 stop mode is fix ed to Process Stop "RAMP STOP" 0 Trip 1b 16.03 Process Stop MCB Ctrl DTC if "SCALAR" .: 22. 21.: 21.IOEC2 2 2 TORQ STOP MCB Stay Closed -1 > Process Stop COMM.06 t (s) t (s) t (s) nself = self excitation speed set deceleration and shape time to "zero" RAMP FUNCTION Process Stop Speed RAMP STOP SUPERVISION Difference n speed difference limit 21. because the process stop bit is never set in the follower control word par.

NAME VALUE MEANING LOCKED 0 OPEN 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault is no longer exists. scaling:1 == 1 94/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.CH4 Control Panel in REMOTE . scaling:1 == 1 16.Key) 4 COMM.MODULE Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode: 5 COMM. In order to open the Parameter Lock changes the value to 358. scaling:1 == 1 16.IOEC2.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 16. 2 DI12 – IO2 Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode:Reset is activated by a rising (positive) edge of the digital input signal DI12 .02 Parameter Lock Using the “PARAMETER LOCK” parameter can inhibit unauthorised parameter changes via control panel CDP 312 or DrivesWindow. The default value of this parameter is 0.Control Panel in LOCAL – Mode:Reset is activated by control panel keypad (RESET .04 FaultResetSel Selects the source for the fault reset signal.I Signal and Parameter Table . Control Panel in LOCAL – Mode:Fault reset is executed along with the stop signal or from control panel keypad (RESET .MODE: Fault reset is executed by ACDA (CH4) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int.03 Passcode This parameter selects the pass code for the Parameter Lock. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 KEYPAD Fault reset is executed from the control panel keypad only (RESET - Key). Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 9999 Def: 0 Int.Key) 3 ON STOP Control Panel in REMOTE – Mode:Fault reset is executed along with the stop signal. After the Parameter Lock is opened the value is automatically changed back to 0.

scaling:1 == 1 16. scaling:1 == 1 16.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. 6 DI5 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded.05 UserMacro IO Chg This parameter enables the selection of the desired user macro via a digital input or fieldbus control word in the following way: When the state of the specified digital input changes from high to low User Macro 1 is loaded. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 8 Def: 1 Int. the signals are set internally to constant 1.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded. Rising edge of ACW1 – Bit 04: User macro 2 is loaded into use.08 FBA EmergeBitCtrl This parameter is used to activate (or de-activate) bit number B01 & B02 of FBA Control Word (CH0) if selected. After the OldUserPasscode is opened the value is automatically changed back to 0.07 NewUserPasscode This parameter selects the new pass code for the Parameter Lock and stores it into the flash.MODULE Falling edge of ACW1 – Bit 04: User macro 1 is loaded into use. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 95/389 .ABB 16. 4 DI3 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded. 99. During the change of the macro the drive will not start. Always save the user macro by parameter 99. A setting once made remains despite the User Macro change.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded. scaling:1 == 1 16. NOTE! This parameter is only active if FBA communication module is used (parameter 75. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 999 Def: 358 Int.13 after changing any parameter settings. 3 DI2 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded. 7 DI6 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded. 8 COMM. 5 DI4 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded. When the state of the specified digital input changes from low to high User Macro 2 is loaded.13 APPLICATION MACRO) VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT SEL User macro change is not possible via digital input or field bus. After the NewUserPasscode is set. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 999 Def: 0 Int.04 FBA CommModule is set to DSET1 R/W or DSET10 R/W).06 OldUserPasscode This parameter authorises the setting of a new pass code for the Parameter Lock. If the parameter is set to DISABLED. the value is automatically changed back to 0. 2 DI1 – IO2 Falling edge of digital input: User macro 1 is loaded.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded.Rising edge of digital input: User macro 2 is loaded. The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again (see also Par. NOTE! The user macro can be changed via a digital input only when the MCB is switched Off.

scaling: 1 = 1 xx DC 17.03 Inverter Current U ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.02 . 17. even though the displayed numbers are correct. scaling: 1 = 1 xx AC 96/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. this means that after changing parameter 17.01 the complete parameter list should be uploaded again.28) Displays the true-RMS value of the AC part of the entity.02 InverterCurrent U ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY (161.01 is used to choose one of the available entities.04 and possibly the Unit name will not be correct. For DriveWindow users. the name of parameters 17.02 is used.27) Displays the average (DC) value of the entity chosen. 17. a time constant of about 100 ms is used.26) Parameter 17. To separate AC from DC the same time constant as for 17. The time constant to separate it from the AC part is about 3 seconds. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 InvCurrent U 1 InvCurrent V 2 InvCurrent W 3 FilCurrent U 4 FilCurrent V 5 FilCurrent W 6 MotCurrent U 7 MotCurrent V 8 MotCurrent W 9 GndCurrent 10 StaCurrent X 11 StaCurrent Y 12 InvVoltage X 13 InvVoltage Y 14 FilVoltage X 15 FilVoltage Y 16 DCVoltage 1 17 DCVoltage 2 18 DCVoltageTot 19 DCVoltageDif Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 19 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 17. Unit: x DC Type: NoType Int.17.I Signal and Parameter Table .01.03.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 17 UTILITIES 17 UTILITIES Group 17 allows the monitoring of several internal values.04 change their meaning depending on what is chosen in parameter 17. Unit: x AC Type: NoType Int. Otherwise. 17. Parameter 17.02. To build the average value.01 ProbeVariable (161.

0 corresponds to. 1.01 and 20.02.2. for example. The value 1.0. Figure 18-1 Process Speed . scaling:1 == 1 18. maximum speed and minimum speed. 0. the possible values of the process speed display are 0. The value of this parameter corresponds to the greater one of the absolute value defined by parameter 20. if it is set at the maximum speed. When the value of this parameter is set to 1.02 Unit Selection of the Unit of the process speed.9. NAME VALUE MEANING NO 1 rpm 2 % 3 m/s 4 Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 3 Int. Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 100000 Def: 100 Int. scaling:1 == 1 xx MSAI5150 ACS1000 97/389 . 1500rpm.01 Scale This parameter matches the process speed to the motor speed. 0.ABB Group 18 PROCESS SPEED 18 PROCESS SPEED This parameter can be altered while the ACS1000 running. and the absolute value of the minimum speed is smaller.Overview 18. The process speed is displayed with one decimal.1.3…0.

Example 98/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Figure 18 2 Process Speed Selection .

ABB Group 19 DATA STORTRANSF 19. scaling:1 == 1 19. scaling:1 == 1 19.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.15 DATASET 18 VAL 3 to the value 1901 (group19 + index 01). scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 99/389 . Set parameter 90.06 Data 6 See 19.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.08 Data 8 See 19. scaling:1 == 1 19.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.07 Data 7 See 19. scaling:1 == 1 19.01 DATA 1 to the selected trending channel in DriveWindow.05 Data 5 See 19. scaling:1 == 1 19.04 Data 4 See 19. scaling:1 == 1 19. Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.03 Data 3 See 19.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.02 Data 2 See 19.01 Data 1 Parameter setting or reading from the overriding system. Assign parameter 19. Example:Signal from the Dataset 18 Index 3 is required for the trending measurement in the DriveWindow tool.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int.01 DATA 1 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: Int. scaling:1 == 1 19.

22 PAR ASSIGN1 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. If parameter is set to 10.24 Group & Index DIV (R1:R2) R2 Figure 19-2 Data transfer function . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.21 ParAssign1 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign1 Read Value (PA1RV) by setting parameter 19.24 ParAssign1WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA1WV is sent. 19. scaling: 19. scaling: 100/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.21 Group & Index ParAssign1 Read Value (PA1RV) DIRECT ParAssign1Wr iteValue Output ParAssign1 Sc aled Value (PA1SV) MULT 19.23 ParAssign1WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign1 Write Value (PA1WV).24 is set to “2202” the value of PA1WV is sent to parameter 22.20) by 10 and sent to ParAssign1 Scaled Value (PA1SV).overview Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. The format is (x)xyy.20 ParAssign1 Read Parameter ParAssign1ReadPar NOT USED 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int. 19. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. The format is (x)xyy.21 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA1RV. scaling: 19.I Signal and Parameter Table . USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter. Par2ParAssignNo1 19.22 ParAssign1 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA1RV . Example:If Par.22 R2 Wr ite Parameter Input ParAssign1WritePar R1 19.22 PAR ASSIGN1 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. scaling: 19. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19.21 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.23 R1 DIV MUL (R1*R2) ParAssign1 Scale ParAssign1 19. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19.24 has no function. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.20 Par2Par AssignNo1 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 1 NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par. Example:If Par. 19. the PA1RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19. scaling: 19.02 ACCEL TIME 1.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 19.

29 is set to “2202” the value of PA2WV is sent to parameter 22. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. scaling: 19. scaling: 19. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 101/389 . where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. scaling: 19. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.28 ParAssign2WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign2 Write Value (PA2WV). Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.29 has no function.27 PAR ASSIGN2 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter.27 PAR ASSIGN2 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. 19.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 19. the PA2RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19. The format is (x)xyy.25) by 10 and sent to ParAssign2 Scaled Value (PA2SV). Example: If Par.ABB 19. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter. 19. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par.32 PAR ASSIGN3 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.32 PAR ASSIGN3 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.29 ParAssign2WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA2WV is sent.25 Par2Par AssignNo2 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 2 (see Figure 19-2). If parameter is set to 10. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par.26 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.27 ParAssign2 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA2RV . The format is (x)xyy. scaling: 19. Example:If Par.34 has no function. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. 19.26 ParAssign2 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign2 Read Value (PA2RV) by setting parameter 19.30 Par2Par AssignNo3 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 3 (see Figure 19-2). Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int.26 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA2RV. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. 19.

19. scaling: 19.02 ACCEL TIME 1. The format is (x)xyy. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par. scaling: 102/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.37 PAR ASSIGN4 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int.31 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. If parameter is set to 10. Example:If Par. the PA3RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19. scaling: 19. scaling: 19.31 ParAssign3 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign3 Read Value (PA3RV) by setting parameter 19. scaling: 19. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter.30) by 10 and sent to ParAssign3 Scaled Value (PA3SV). If parameter is set to 10. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.33 ParAssign3WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign3 Write Value (PA3WV). Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. 19.34 ParAssign3WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA3WV is sent. Example:If Par.35) by 10 and sent to ParAssign4 Scaled Value (PA4SV).37 ParAssign4 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA4RV . Example:If Par. 19. the PA4RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19.I Signal and Parameter Table .35 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.39 has no function.31 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA3RV.35 Par2Par AssignNo4 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 4 (see Figure 19-2).Signal and Parameter Table ABB 19. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. 19. The format is (x)xyy. scaling: 19.32 ParAssign3 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA3RV . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.37 PAR ASSIGN4 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.34 is set to “2202” the value of PA3WV is sent to parameter 22. The format is (x)xyy.36 ParAssign4 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign4 Read Value (PA4RV) by setting parameter 19. scaling: 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.36 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA4RV.

scaling: 19.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. Example:If Par.40 Par2Par AssignNo5 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 5 (see Figure 19-2). 19. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.39 ParAssign4WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA4WV is sent.ABB 19.41 is set to “416” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA5RV. The format is (x)xyy.42 PAR ASSIGN5 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. the PA5RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19. scaling: 19. 19. scaling: 19. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. Unit: Scal Type: R Int. If parameter is set to 10. scaling: 19. The format is (x)xyy. 19. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 103/389 .39 is set to “2202” the value of PA4WV is sent to parameter 22. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Example:If Par.43 ParAssign5WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign5 Write Value (PA5WV).40) by 10 and sent to ParAssign5 Scaled Value (PA5SV). NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par. 19. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.38 ParAssign4WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign4 Write Value (PA4WV).44 has no function.42 PAR ASSIGN5 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.44 is set to “2202” the value of PA5WV is sent to parameter 22.42 ParAssign5 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA5RV .41 ParAssign5 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign5 Read Value (PA5RV) by setting parameter 19. scaling: 19. Example:If Par.44 ParAssign5WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA5WV is sent. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter. The format is (x)xyy.41 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. scaling: 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 19. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par.02 ACCEL TIME 1. Example:If Par. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int.52 PAR ASSIGN7 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.49 is set to “2202” the value of PA6WV is sent to parameter 22. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter.54 has no function.45) by 10 and sent to ParAssign6 Scaled Value (PA6SV). Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. scaling: 19. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter. 19.47 PAR ASSIGN6 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. 19. 19. The format is (x)xyy. The format is (x)xyy. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 19.52 PAR ASSIGN7 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19.I Signal and Parameter Table . DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. the PA6RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19.49 has no function. scaling: 19. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. If parameter is set to 10. scaling: 19.48 ParAssign6WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign6 Write Value (PA6WV). scaling: 104/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par.50 Par2Par AssignNo7 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 7 (see Figure 19-2).47 PAR ASSIGN6 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.46 ParAssign6 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign6 Read Value (PA6RV) by setting parameter 19. 19. scaling: 19.47 ParAssign6 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA6RV . Example:If Par. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.46 is set to “416” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA6RV.49 ParAssign6WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA6WV is sent. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.45 Par2Par AssignNo6 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 6 (see Figure 19-2). MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int.46 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.

19. Unit: Scal Type: R Int.56 ParAssign8 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign8 Read Value (PA8RV) by setting parameter 19. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 105/389 . The format is (x)xyy. scaling: 19. DIV 4 The read parameter value is divided by a factor (selected by parameter 19. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT 1 Parameter assign is not used – par. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. scaling: 19. USED DIRECT 2 The read parameter value is sent directly to the write parameter.56 is set to “416” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA8RV. The format is (x)xyy. If parameter is set to 10. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. Example:If Par. scaling: 19.51 is set to “412” the analog input signal 1 of IOEC 1 is copied to signal PA7RV.57 PAR ASSIGN8 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter.57 ParAssign8 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA8RV . the PA8RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19.55) by 10 and sent to ParAssign8 Scaled Value (PA8SV).57 PAR ASSIGN8 SCALE) and afterwards sent to the write parameter. Unit: Scal Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 1 Int. the PA7RV signal will be multiplied / divided (depending on setting of parameter 19.53 ParAssign7WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign7 Write Value (PA7WV). where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. scaling: 19. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. MUL 3 The read parameter value is multiplied by a factor (selected by parameter 19. 19.50) by 10 and sent to ParAssign7 Scaled Value (PA7SV).51 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. Example:If Par. The format is (x)xyy.51 ParAssign7 ReadPar A signal is assigned to ParAssign7 Read Value (PA7RV) by setting parameter 19. 19. If parameter is set to 10.ABB 19.52 ParAssign7 Scale [Scal] This parameter specifies the scaling factor for PA7RV . Example:If Par. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.56 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.02 ACCEL TIME 1.59 has no function.54 is set to “2202” the value of PA7WV is sent to parameter 22.55 Par2Par AssignNo8 This parameter selects the Par2Par assignment function 8 (see Figure 19-2). scaling: 19. scaling: 19. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.54 ParAssign7WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA7WV is sent. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. 19.

02 ACCEL TIME 1.58 ParAssign8WriteVal [Scal] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the actual value of ParAssign8 Write Value (PA8WV). Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. Unit: Scal Type: R Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .Signal and Parameter Table ABB 19. The format is (x)xyy.59 is set to “2202” the value of PA8WV is sent to parameter 22. scaling: 19. 19. Example:If Par. scaling: 106/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.59 ParAssign8WritePar Parameter selects the group and the index to where the value of PA8WV is sent.

05 MAXIMUM TORQUE [%] Maximum positive output torque as a % of the motor nominal torque.ABB Group 20 LIMITS 20 LIMITS This parameter group defines the maximum and minimum limits for speed.04 USER MAX MOT CUR [%] Maximum output current in A of the motor nominal current. 20. frequency. 20. scaling:see par 50- 18000rpm 01 20. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: -20000 rpm Max: Par.02 01 20. Def: -1100 rpm Int. scaling:100 == 1 % MSAI5150 ACS1000 107/389 .03 ZEROSPEED LIMIT [rpm] The absolute speed value at which the drive coasts after a stop command.01 MINIMUM SPEED [rpm] Negative speed reference limit in rpm.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum speed is limited according to that minimum starting frequency for step-up.(see Figure 23-1) For step-up transformer option: if parameter 132. current and torque algorithms. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: 100 Int. (see Figure 26-1) Figure Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1. scaling:10 == 1 % i_pullout 20. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: Par. scaling:see par 50- 20.02 01 20. (see Figure 23-1) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par.01 Max: Def: 1100 rpm Int.2 Int. scaling:see par 50- 20. Def: 10 rpm Int.22 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the ‘stop drive tube’ speed is limited according to that minimum starting frequency for step-up.02 MAXIMUM SPEED [rpm] Positive speed reference limit in rpm. For step-up transformer option: if parameter 132.

(see Figure 24- 1) Unit: % Type: R Min: -3 Max: 0 Def: -1. Otherwise overspeed trips could occur. limit [Hz] = 20. scaling:100 == 1 % 20. (see Figure 25-1) Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1. It is recommended to set the trip margin to a value higher than 3 % of the nominal frequency. scaling:100 == 1 % 20. because the slip frequency and the jitter of the actual frequency have to be taken into account.2 Int. For a speed supervision with a smaller margin use ‘Group 32 Limit Supervision’ (slip already taken into account in actual value and actual value stronger filtered).2 Int. scaling:100 == 1 % 20. limit = 59.06 MINIMUM TORQUE [%] Minimum negative output torque as a % of the motor nominal torque.This parameter defines together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX and FREQ MIN in the scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive.01 and 20.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 20.11 OVERSPEED LIMIT [rpm] The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an overspeed condition by supervising the stator frequency. the trip OVER SPEED FAULT is activated.16 FreqLimInit to NO.11 [Hz].2 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .02 [Hz] = (20.33 [Hz] overfreq. scaling:10==1% 108/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.2 Int.09 TREF TORQ MAX [%] Maximum torque reference as a % of the motor nominal torque for external torque ref. If this frequency is reached. scaling:100 == 1 Hz 20. The overspeed is calculated as follows: overfreq. speed [Hz] + Trip Margin [Hz] overfreq. 20.07 SPC TORQ MAX [%] Maximum limit at the output of the speed controller as a % of the motor nominal torque. scaling:10==1% 20.02 [rpm] * rated_frequency [Hz]) / (synchronous_speed [rpm]) Example: A rated speed of 1780 rpm corresponds to a synchronous speed of 1800 rpm: 20. scaling:100 == 1 % 20.02 [Hz] + 20. (see Figure 24- 1) Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 10% Int. where 20. (see Figure 26-1) Unit: % Type: R Min: -3 Max: 0 Def: -1. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0% Max: 100% Def: 120% Int.13 USER MAX GEN CUR [%] Maximum output current in generator mode in % of the motor nominal current.08 SPC TORQ MIN [%] Minimum limit at the output of the speed controller as a % of the motor nominal torque.33 Hz + 2 Hz = 61.10 TREF TORQ MIN [%] Minimum torque reference as a % of the motor nominal torque for external torque ref.02 after entering the motor nominal speed or after setting 20.33 Hz Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 200 Hz Def: 200 Hz Int.2 Int. limit [Hz] = max.14 MaxFreqMargin [%] This margin is used to automatically preset par. (see Figure 25-1) Unit: % Type: R Min: -3 Max: 0 Def: -1. scaling:100 == 1 % 20.02 [rpm] * 60 [Hz] / 1800 [rpm] = 59.02 [Hz] = 20.

scaling:10 == 1% 20. Otherwise overspeed trips could occur.03 ZEROSPEED LIMIT.02 [Hz] + 20.ABB 20.17 ZeroSpeedDetect Selection of zero speed detection function.02 [Hz] = (20.16 FreqLimInit After setting the motor nominal values the frequency and speed limits are calculated and preset. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 109/389 . limit [Hz] = 20. limit [Hz] = max.This parameter indicate whether the initialization of these limits has been done. Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:1==1 20. It is recommended to set the trip margin to a value higher than 3 % of the nominal frequency. For a speed supervision with a smaller margin use Group 32 Limit Supervision (slip already taken into account in actual value and actual value stronger filtered). If this frequency is reached. the trip OVER SPEED FAULT is activated.15 FreqTripMargin [%] The purpose of this parameter is to protect the process against an overspeed condition by supervising the stator frequency.To automatically recalulate the limits after changing the nomimal motor parameters. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 ENCODER Zero speed detection is activated if actual speed is below parameter 20. this parameter can be set to NO NAME VALUE MEANING NO 0 YES 1 Unit: % Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. where 20.Diagram Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 20 Def: 10 Int. because the slip frequency have to be taken into account. Trip Margin .02 [rpm]*rated_frequency [Hz] /(synchronous_speed [rpm]) Figure 20-1 Freq.11 [Hz]. -1 MODULATING Zero speed detection is activated by COAST STOP or EMERGENCY OFF as soon as inverter stops modulating (independently of actual speed). speed [Hz] * Trip Margin (%) overfreq. This parameter defines together with parameters SPEEDMAX and SPEEDMIN (FREQ MAX and FREQ MIN in the scalar control mode) the maximum allowed frequency of the drive. The overspeed is calculated as follows: overfreq.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB

Group 21 START/STOP/MCB

21 START/STOP/MCB
Selection of Start / Stop and MCB functions. The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered
while the ACS1000 is stopped.

21.01 START FUNCTION
(131.01) Selection of the start function.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 RES FREQ MEA Special start mode. Contact ABB Service for advise.
2 SCALAR FLY Flying start function for rotating machines will be used.
3 SCALARDIRECT Start mode for step-up trafo application. No flying start processed.
Unit: Type: B Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 2 Int. scaling:1 == 1

STOP FUNCTION
After a stop command is given, the drive is stopping according to the following steps:

RAMP STOP MODE:
Motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected DECELERATION RAMP (Par.
22.01, 22.03 22.05) Þ torque is set to zero Þ flux is ramped down to 20% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage
vector. During ramp down “ramp stop supervision” is activated (see Par. 21.05 Process Stop Speed Difference).

TORQ STOP MODE:
DECELERATION RAMP (Par.: 22.03 22.05) and SHAPE TIME (Par. 22.07) are set to zero (intern by SW) Þ motor is
ramped down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum allowed DC voltage

COAST STOP MODE:
torque is set to zero Þ drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below self excitation speed
(deceleration time has no influence) Þ flux is ramped down to 20% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector
Motor Ctrl Mode
99.13 if "SCALAR" - mode is selected,
stop mode is fixed to
D=1 SCALAR "RAMP STOP"
KEYPAD
STOP
CONTROL
Stop Function DTC
21.02 1 RAMP STOP

IOEC 2: DI 1...6 Command to "STOP" 2 TORQ STOP

3 COAST STOP
Comm. Module

RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE RAMP FUNCTION COAST STOP MODE
n n n
(rpm) (rpm) (rpm)

nself nself nself

Dec. Time t (s) t (s) t(

set deceleration and nself = self excit ation speed
shape time to "zero"

Figure 21 1 Stop Function - Overview

110/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
21.02 Stop Function
Selection of stop function. If SCALAR mode is selected, only STOP RAMPING is possible. The
parameter itself will be write protected.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP RAMPNG stop by the deceleration ramp DECEL TIME (22.02)
2 STOP TORQ stop by the torque limit
3 COAST STOP stop with zero torque
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1

MSAI5150 ACS1000 111/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
PROCESS STOP FUNCTION
After a process stop command is given, the drive is stopping according to the following steps:

RAMP STOP MODE:
motor is ramped down below Parameter 20.3 STOP DRIVE TUBE according selected PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par.
22.06) Þ torque is set to zero Þ flux is ramped down to 10% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector. During
ramp down “ramp stop supervision” is activated (see Par. 21.05 Process Stop Speed Difference).

TORQ STOP MODE:
PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06) and SHAPE TIME (Par. 22.07) are set to zero (intern by SW) Þ motor is ramped
down with maximal allowed braking current or the maximum allowed DC voltage

COAST STOP MODE:
torque is set to zero Þ drive is running with zero torque until the actual motor speed is below self excitation speed
(deceleration time has no influence) Þ flux is ramped down to 10% Þ machine is short circuit with zero voltage vector
Motor Ctrl Mode
99.13

D=1 SCALAR

Process Stop
Mode
21.03 Process Stop MCB Ctrl
DTC if "SCALAR" - mode is selected,
21.04
stop mode is fix ed to
Process Stop "RAMP STOP"
0 Trip 1 b
16.01 n =0 MCB Opening
Process Stop
NOT USED RAMP STOP
& "Fault"
1 1
1 Trip 1 a
DI8 - IOEC2 2 2 TORQ STOP MCB Stay Closed
-1 >
Process Stop
COMM.MOD ULE 3 3 COAST STOP & "Alarm"
(7.06 - Bit12)

"0" = Process Stop active
"1" = Process Stop inactive

Process Stop Ramp RAMP STOP MODE TORQ STOP MODE COAST STOP MODE
n n n
22.06 (rpm) (rpm) (rpm)

nself nself nself

Par.: 22.06 t (s) t (s) t (s)

nself = self excitation speed set deceleration and
shape time to "zero"

RAMP FUNCTION

Process Stop Speed RAMP STOP SUPERVISION
Difference n speed difference limit
21.05 (rpm) Par.: 21.05

ramp stop faile d => go to "COAST STOP MODE"
nself

t (s)

Figure 21-2 Process Stop Function - Overview

112/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
21.03 ProcessStopMode
Selection of process stop function when process stop mode is active (16.01). If SCALAR mode is
selected, only “STOP RAMPING” is possible, parameter itself will be write protected and fixed set to
“STOP PAMPING” (see figure 21-2).
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 STOP RAMPNG stop by the deceleration ramp PROCESS STOP RAMP (Par. 22.06)
2 STOP TORQ stop by the torque limit
3 COAST STOP stop with zero torque
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.04 ProcessStopMCBCtrl
Selection of MCB reaction if the “Process Stop” is activated (see figure 16-1).
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OPENING after drive has stopped, the MCB will be opened
1 STAY CLOSED after drive has stopped, the MCB will not be opened
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.05 ProcessStopSpdDiff [rpm/s]
Supervises the deceleration of drive speed after a process stop command has been given. This supervision starts 5
seconds after the drive has received the process stop signal. If the drive is not able to decelerate wihin specified rate, dr ive
will be stopped by coasting and Bit 02 at AUX_STATUS_WORD 2 (PROCESS_STOP_COAST) is set to state “1”. This
function is only active if Par. 21.04 PROCESS STOP COMMAND is set to “STOP RAMP” and Par. 21.05 PROCESS STO
SPEED DIFF is > 0 rpm.

Process Ramp Stop Comman d
SPEED IXI "Process Ramp Stop" failed
rpm = > command to "Co ast Stop"
(spe ed difference outside allowed limit)
1000

750 21.05 PROCESS STOP SPEED DIFF

500

Motor Speed (Act)

250
Calcu late d
Motor Speed (Act)

t s
22.06 PROCC ES STOP RAMP

Figure 21 3 Supervision of Process Stop - Diagram

Unit: rpm/s Type: R Min: 0 rpm/s Max: 18000 Def: 10 rpm/s Int. scaling:1 = 1 rpm/s
rpm/s

MSAI5150 ACS1000 113/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
21.06 MCB OnControlMode
With this parameter the MCB ON command has to be selected (opening/closing of main circuit breaker).

If ONE signal for opening and closing is needed than this parameter has to be set to ONE SIGNAL
(dig. Output IOEC2 - DO6 is “ON” = closing command or “OFF” = opening command; dig. Output
IOEC2-DO5 is always de-energized).

If TWO separate signals, one for opening and one for closing, are needed than this parameter has to
be set to TWO SIGNALS (dig. Output IOEC2 - D05 “OFF” = opening command, dig. Output IOEC2 -
D06 “ON” = closing command; in normal operation digital Output of IOEC2 - DO5 is “ON” and dig.
Output IOEC2 - DO6 is “OFF”).
NAME VALUE MEANING
ONE SIGNAL 0
TWO SIGNALS 1
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.07 MCB FeedbackSignal
With this parameter the feedback signals of the MCB has to be selected (open/closed of main circuit
breaker).
If ONE SIGNAL is selected, only feedback signal for MCB status “CLOSED” (dig. Input IOEC2 –
DI10) is supervised.
If TWO SIGNALS is selected, feedback signal for MCB status “CLOSED” (dig. Input IOEC2 – DI10)
and feedback signal for MCB status “OPEN” (dig. Input IOEC2 – DI9) is supervised
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 ONE SIGNAL only feedback signal CLOSED is supervised
1 TWO SIGNALS both feedback signals, OPEN and CLOSED, are supervised
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.08 MCB AvailableSig
Selection of the feedback signal “MCB available” (IOEC2 - DI11). If the MCB has an available signal,
the supervision of the signal can be activated here. Normaly the available signal is used to supervise if
MCB is in test position or drawn out.

When using the feedback signal the earth isolator can only be operated when the MCB is not available
to make sure that with closed earth isolator also the input terminals are without voltage.

Note!
If this parameter is selected to LOW ACTIV, the earth isolatar can only be operated if dig. Input IOEC2 –
DI11 is ON (MCB is not available).

If this parameter is selected to HIGH ACTIV, the earth isolatar can only be operated if dig. Input IOEC2
– DI11 is OFF (MCB is not available).
NAME VALUE MEANING
NO 1
LOW ACTIV 2
HIGH ACTIV 3
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.09 MCB ClosingTimeLim [s]
Maximum operating time for closing the MCB. If the MCB has not reached the closed position within this
time, a trip will be initiated. Master-Follower: the closing time limit in the master drive has to be at least 2
sec longer than in the follower drive.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30s Def: 3 s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

21.10 MCB OpenTimeLimit [s]
Time delay after which MCB ORD TRIP (IOEC1 - DO6) is activated, if the MCB does not open upon an
opening command.Master-Follower: the opening time limit in the master drive has to be at least 2 sec
longer than in the follower drive.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30 s Def: 3s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s

114/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
MCB CONTROL OVERVIEW

no light =
INT - RELAIS
IOEC1 & IOEC2 -
Board DO5 / DO6
OFF
LWL "MCB Off"
(light on = no trip)
PPCS-Lin k

no light =
Signal = " 0 "

AMC3 LWL LWL
Converter Converter
D05

Heater & / Motor Heater
Control

D06

& / MCB Trip

Par.: 5.01
DO1-6 Status IOEC1 IOEC1

LWL
Converter
MCB
D05
Control
& / MCB Open

D06

& MCB Close

Par.: 5.02
DO1-6 Status IOEC2

IOEC2
Figure 21-4 LWL “MCB OFF” – Signal of IOEC1 2 - Overview

MSAI5150 ACS1000 115/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
BACKSPIN LOCKOUT FUNCTION
If the motor is stopped or tripped it is accelerated in the other direction due to back flowing fluid.
If the pump/motor is started while driven in the wrong direction, the motor can be seriously damaged. Therefore, a
restart has to be prevented and a start inhibition must be active until the motor has stopped completely.
If this function is needed, the backspin lockout time has to be measured during commissioning and entered in
parameter 21.12 Backspin Lockout Time.
n Pump
rpm Stop
Command Stopped

Par.: 21.12
Backspin Lockout Time

Start inhibited

0 t s

Backspi n Lockout active Backspin Lockout not acti ve
Stopping
(ASW1 - Bit 8 = "1") (AS W1 - Bit 8 = "0")

Figure 21- 5 Backspin Lockout Function - Overview

21.11 BackspinLockFunc
This parameter activates the backspin lockout function. If lockout is active, a start command will be
ignored (Start inhibition is active). ASW1 – Bit08 (Backspin Lockout Act) will be set during a pending
lockout and drive status shows “Lockout Act”

Note!
This parameter can not be changed during an active lockout.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF No action, backspin lockout function is not used.
1 ON Backspin lockout function is active.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.12 BackspinLockTime [s]
This parameter defines the start inhibition delay time. If this parameter setting is overwritten during
active lockout time, the new time will only be taken after the next stop. The former parameter setting is
still valid for the actual pending lockout.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 7200 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1s

21.13 BackspinLockReset
With this parameter an active lockout can be reset.
Note!
This parameter can only be set from service.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF Backspin lockout, reset is not active
1 ON Backspin lockout, lockout (time) will be reset
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

21.14 SFLY BACKWARD EN
Selection of the backward search function for flying start. This parameter has to be set to ON if the drive
may be started into a rotating machine with negative speed. The flying start function is selected with
parameter 21.01.
VALUE NAME MEANING
0 OFF backward search is not active
1 ON backward search is active
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

116/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

17 once the coast stop command is given and only provides torque within this band to decelerate below self-excitation speed. the torque limiters are ramped down to the values in parameter 21. scaling:1 == 1 21. scaling:1 == 1 % MSAI5150 ACS1000 117/389 .ABB 21.17 CoastStopMinTrq Minimum allowed torque to which the torque limiters is ramped during coast stop Unit: % Type: R Min: -100% Max: 100% Def: -3% Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DISABLED Function is disabled 1 ENABLED Function is enabled Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. the torque limiters are again set to the value as they have been before the stop command was given. Once stop has finished.16 and 21.16 CoastStopMaxTrq Maximum allowed torque to which the torque limiters is ramped during coast stop Unit: % Type: R Min: -100% Max: 100% Def: 3% Int. scaling:1 == 1 % 21.15 CoastStopTrqLim Selection of coast stop torque limit function. If this function is enabled.

I Signal and Parameter Table . NAME VALUE MEANING ACC/DEC 1 1 ACC/DEC 2 2 DI1 – IO2 3 DI2 – IO2 4 DI3 – IO2 5 DI4 – IO2 6 DI5 – IO2 7 DI6 – IO2 8 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 8 Def: 6 Int.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the limit is greater than the maximum limit. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000 s Def: 20s Int. The maximum speed is defined with parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20. 24V DC on DIx – IOEC2 = Acceleration ramp 2 and deceleration ramp 2 are used). If digital inputs are selected it is possible to switch over from ACC1/DEC1 to ACC/DEC2 (0V DC on DIx – IOEC2 = Acceleration ramp 1 and deceleration ramp 1 are used. scaling:10 == 1 s 118/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling: 22. The selection can be performed through digital inputs.02 AccelTime 1 [s] The time required for the speed to change from 0 to maximum speed.01 Acc/Dec 1/2 Sel This parameter selects the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp pair in use. Figure 22-1 Ramp Function Generator .Overview 22.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 22 RAMP FUNCTIONS 22 RAMP FUNCTIONS Speed reference ramp functions.

The maximum speed is defined with parameter 20. scaling:10 == 1 s 22. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 2000s Def: 20s Int. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000s Def: 60s Int. scaling:10 == 1 s 22.04 AccelTime 2 [s] The time required for the speed to change from 0 to the maximum speed.07 ShapeTime [s] Speed reference-softening time.02 MAXIMUM SPEED or 20.03 DecelTime 1 [s] The time required for the speed to change from maximum speed to zero. The time required for the speed to change from maximum speed to zero. or 20. scaling:10 == 1 s MSAI5150 ACS1000 119/389 . The maximum speed is defined with parameter 20.ABB 22. scaling:10 == 1 s 22.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the limit is greater than the maximum limit. scaling:10 == 1 s 22.Diagram Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 1000s Def: 0 s Int. the drive starts to decelerating according to this parameter value. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000s Def: 60s Int.03 is set to STOP RAMPING. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 2000s Def: 20s Int.06 ProcessStopRamp [s] If process stop is activated and parameter PROCESS STOP MODE 21. Function is deactivated during the emergency stop and process stop. The maximum speed is defined with parameter 20.05 DecelTime 2 [s] The time required for the speed to change from maximum speed to zero.02 MAXIMUM SPEED.02 MAXIMUM SPEED. Figure 22 2 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramp Shape .01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the limit is greater than the maximum limit. or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the limit is greater than the maximum limit.

Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2000 Def: 10 Int. scaling:10 == 1rpm 120/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.08 VARIABLE SLOPE is ON.09 VAR SLOPE RATE. If the drive is not able to decelerate within specified rate. scaling:100 == 1 22. Figure 22-3 Variable Slope Ramp .07.09 VAR SLOPE RATE [ms] Speed ramp time t for the speed reference change A.10 EStopRampTime Deceleration time for speed ramp function if MCW-B2 (OFF_3_N) is set to "0" (emergency stop function active). To get a straight line on SPEED REF3 the VAR SLOPE FUNCTION can be used. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Function is disabled. 1 ON Variable slope is enabled and the slope rate is defined by parameter VARIABLE SLOPE RATE 22. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1800 Def: 20 Int.11 EStopSpeedDiff Monitors the deceleration of drive speed after an EMERGENCY STOP command has been given.08 VARIABLESLOPE SEL This function is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. drive will be tripped and an EMERGENCY OFF will be initiated This function is only active if parameter is set > 0 rpm. 22. scaling:10 == 1 s 22.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 22. Example:Overriding system transmits the speed reference with his own interval time.Diagram Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.09 has to be increased until SPEED REF 3 is a straight line. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 200s Def: 0 s Int. This monitoring starts few seconds after the drive has received the emergency stop signal. when parameter 22. In this case the Par. The time t for step A is defined by parameter 22.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 == 1 22.

02 INCHING SPEED2 SPEED REF3 20. scaling:see par 50- 18000rpm 01 MSAI5150 ACS1000 121/389 .01 MINIMUM SPEED 24.ABB Group 23 SPEED REFERENCE 23 SPEED REFERENCE Speed reference functions.07 REMOTE REF 24.05 24.01 MINIMUM SPEED 24.07 SET POINT WEIGHT 20. scaling: see par 50-01 23.15 AC C COM P DER TIME 20.01 bit 8 is in state TRUE.17 3.02 ACCEL TIME 1 FILTER WIN DOW CTRL 22.06 SPEED ERROR FILTER TIM E 23.Overview 23.01 23.01 + SPEED SH ARE x _ 23. B9 MCW -B4 + SPEED REF2 INCHING SPEED1 _ MCW -B6 SPEED REF4 3. Unit: rpm Type: I Min: -18000 rpm Max: Def: 0 rpm Int.09 VARIABLE SLOPE RATE 23.03 DECEL TIME 1 - 22.01 SPEED REF.06 PROCESS STOP RAMP (-1) 23.07 RAMP SHAPE TIME 23. Unit: rpm Type: R Int.04 ACCEL TIME 2 22.16 AC C COMP FILT TIM E 20.01 22.02 MAXIMUM SPEED SETPOINT LIMITER W EIGHTING SPEED REF 23.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 24.09 WINDOW WID TH POS 22.11 + SPEED ERROR NEG dV/dt 3.10 WINDOW WID TH NEG ACW 1-B2 RAMP BYPASS ACW 1-B3 BAL RAMP OUT SPEED STEP Process Stop (D I / OCW-B12) PROCESS STOP RAMP ACTIVE 23.06 SET P W EIGHTING 20.07 WINDOW SEL ON 22.01 SPEED REF [rpm] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive.02 InchingSpeed 1 [rpm] Inching speed reference to replace the parameter 23.04 + LI MITER SPEED CORRECTI ON MCW -B8.02 MAXIMUM SPEED ACTUAL SPEED 0 MCW -B5 HOLD 0 DROOP RATE 22.08 WINDOW INTEG ON 22.02 MAXIMUM SPEED ACC / DEC / SHAPE 23.03 3.05 DECEL TIME 2 + x 22.02 20. LOCAL / REMOTE ACCELER ATION LI MITER COMPENSATION LOCAL REF TORQ ACC COMP REF 3.08 VARIABLE SLOPE 23.01 MINIMUM SPEED + RAMP 23. when OVERR CTRL WORD 7.03 Figure 23-1 Speed Reference Chain .

scaling:see par 50- 20. Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:10 == 1 % 23. 20.04 SPEED CORRECTION [rpm] This parameter value can be added to the filtered reference value. When the window control is enabled.03 InchingSpeed 2 [rpm] Inching speed reference to replace the parameter 23. Figure 23-2 Window Control.01 bit 9 is in state TRUE Unit: rpm Type: I Min: -18000 rpm Max: Def: 0 rpm Int.02 – Bit7) or by parameter 23. If speed error is larger than the number in WINDOW WIDTH.09) is added to the torque reference. When 23.08 = OFF. scaling:see par 50- 18000rpm 01 23.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS or 23. the speed controller output. When running with window control.01 SPEED REF. TORQ REF2 (3.07 SPC TORQMAX and 20. Window control mode can be selected by a signal from the fieldbus via AUX CTRL WORD 1 (7.02 01 23.01 TORQUE SELECTOR = ADD.08 WINDOW INTG ON.08 SPC TORQMIN and to how much it has adapted to correct the torque reference.02-Bit1) it is shown when speed error is greater than or less than the WINDOW WIDTH value. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 ms Max: 999999 Def: 0 ms Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 23. The size of the window (in window control mode) is determined by parameters 23. the speed controller output is zero if speed error is less than number in WINDOW WITH parameters.I Signal and Parameter Table .01 Max: Par. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par.Diagram 122/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. when OVERR CTRL WORD 7. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. Pay attention to the speed controller output limits. the window control works only as a P-controller.05 SPEED SHARE [%] Speed reference share coefficient. In AUX STATUS WORD 1 (8. Effect of Load Change on a Torque Controlled Drive . 20. scaling:1 == 1 ms ms WINDOW CONTROL When window control is used. normally parameter 26.06 SPEED ERROR FILT [ms] Speed reference and actual error filter time. the integrator of the speed controller can be released or blocked by parameter 23.10 WINDOW WIDTH NEG (rpm).07 WINDOW SEL ON.

09 and 23.02 MAXIMUM SPEED and 20.02 01 23. when the speed error is within the window.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS and 23. scaling:see par 50- 20.SPEED REF . For example. Speed control brings the speed difference back into the window. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: Par.10 WINDOW WIDTH NEG.Note!If the overriding system or AMC application itself sends a reference value to SPEED STEP. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: See Def: 0 rpm Int.01 Max: Par. 1 ON Speed controller is activated if the speed is outside the specified range (parameter 23. scaling:see par 50- 20. scaling:see par 50- 20. The total speed reference is limited by the parameter 20.02 01 MSAI5150 ACS1000 123/389 .07 WindowSelectOn The speed controller is deactivated as long as the speed deviation remains within determined limits. If the load of the follower disappears due to a disturbance in the process. in Master/Follower drives. WINDOW WIDTH POS. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Function is disabled.02 01 23. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Integrator of speed controller is blocked when window control is on 1 ON Integrator of speed controller is released when window control is on Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.ABB 23. The maximum limit is the absolute value of parameter 23.10) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.08 WINDOW INTG ON The idea of Window control is to deactivate the speed controller as long as the speed deviation remains within the window set by Parameters 23. scaling:1 == 1 23. where the follower is torque controlled. This allows the external torque reference to affect the process directly. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: See Def: 0 rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 23. the speed error will be outside of the window.10 WINDOW WIDTH NEG [rpm] Negative limit for the window control. window control is used to keep the speed deviation of the follower under control.09. The speed error output to the speed controller is zero.09 WINDOW WIDTH POS [rpm] Positive limit for the window control. This function could be called overspeed or underspeed protection in the torque control mode.01 MINIMUM SPEED (SPEED STEP max = MAXIMUM SPEED .11 must be set to zero before the stop command of the drive is given. Def: 0 rpm Int.11 SPEED STEP [rpm] An additional speed step value can be given to the speed controller directly as additive error input. The speed controller reacts and its output is added to the torque reference. the value of 23. otherwise the drive will keep running with the speed step value.SPEED CORRECTION). which allows the torque reference to affect the process directly. 20.

24. Use Data Logger tool instead of Monitoring tool.11 SPEED STEP = - 20rpm. actual torque 1. Increase the integral time constant parameter. Since a step given from DriveWindow is an absolute value. First. e. when the speed is stabilised.03 SPEED ERROR NEG .g. a step down.08 TIS is reduced until overshoot is observed in the response. to a high value so that its effect is small. The value 20 corresponds to 20 rpm.03 KPS is increased until the response is sufficient.02 SPEED SPEED . filtered speed difference Note: If the drive needs very fast response times a sample interval time shorter than 5ms are required. Step Response . The parameter 23. If the drive goes to torque limit during a step. the integral time constant can be set short and an overcompensated step response is obtained.Signal and Parameter Table ABB STEP RESPONSE TEST Manual tuning of the speed controller: The step-response based tuning of the speed controller can be done with DriveWindow tool. The integral time constant is then adjusted such that there is no overshoot or only a slight overshoot (depending on the drive application).08 MOTOR TORQUE FILT. The relative gain 24. 23.11 SPEED STEP is used in step response tests. Figure 23-3 Speed Control. Values for the steps can also be defined with DriveWindow.g. For monitoring the speed response the following signals can be selected on the display: 1.08 TIS. Bigger steps can also be used depending on the dynamic demands of the application. The integral time constant 24.11 SPEED STEP = 20rpm. a further compensation of the response should be attempted. The function of the integral part is to remove as quickly as possible the difference between reference and the actual value caused by the proportional control. it must be proportional to the maximum speed of drive. actual speed 3. If the drive is stable and allows a high proportional gain. e. Steps of 1% or 2% of the nominal speed are set. a step up is given.I Signal and Parameter Table . Then.Diagram 124/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 23. is given. For stepping up enter a positive value and for stepping down a negative value.

ABB Group 24 SPEED CONTROL 24 SPEED CONTROL Figure 24-1 Speed Controller .Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 125/389 .

Signal and Parameter Table ABB Figure 24-2 Speed Controller. is determined by means of this parameter.e. Set Point Weighting . with the torque reference at 100%. then.Overview 24. Drooping is used in drives where a mechanical connection is not strong enough to enable the use of torque control.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:10 == 1 % 126/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Figure 24 3 Drooping as a Function of Torque Reference .Diagram Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Example: If Droop Rate =10%. Avoid using drooping in drives where speed accuracy is important to the process. drooping.01 DROOP RATE [%] The amount of speed decrease caused by the load. the speed will decrease by 1% when calculated from the rated speed. i.

Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 150 Def: 10 Int. This parameter is a low-pass filter expressed in milliseconds. scaling:100 == 1 % 24.02 KPS. a 10% change in error value (e.05 KPS WP FILT TIME [ms] The rate of the change of the proportional gain can be smoothened by means of this parameter. where the gain is KPS Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 0.03 KPS MIN and 24.ABB ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL AS A FUNCTION OF TORQUE REFERENCE The adaptive gain of the speed controller is used to smooth out disturbances. When the output is zero. The rate of change of the proportional gain can be smoothed by means of parameter 24.02 KPS MIN is the proportional gain of the controller.Diagram 24. 24. If the value 1 is selected. reference . Figure 24 4 Adaptive Speed Control as a Function of Torque Reference .02 KPS [relat] Relative gain for the speed controller. When the output exceeds the value of parameter 24.04 KPS WEAKPOINT [%] The value of the speed controller output.g.04 KPS WEAK POINT. scaling:100 == 1 24.actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by 10%.03 KPS MIN [relat] KPS MIN determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output is zero. which are caused by e. scaling:1 == 1 ms ms MSAI5150 ACS1000 127/389 .g.5 Def: 0 Int.04 KPS WEAK POINT are used to determine the proportional gain through control output after the torque limit function. the proportional gain is determined by the parameter 24. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 999999 Def: 100 ms Int.06 SPEED ERR FILT TIME is typically not sufficient to tune the drive. scaling:100 == 1 24. Moderate filtering of speed error by parameter 23.05 KPS WP FILT TIME. low load and backlash. Parameter 24. Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 10 Int.

07 SETPOINT W GAIN [%] The value of the speed controller output.14 and 24.07). scaling:1 == 1 % 24. the speed controller does not follow strictly preset ramps anymore. the integral and derivative terms are normally weighted by a factor of 1. Figure 24 5 Speed Controller.Signal and Parameter Table ABB SET POINT WEIGHTING Set point weighting is a control method to improve the response of the speed controller to set point changes.10 ANTIWINDUP ENA The integrator of the speed controller can be forced to a certain value by setting this parameter to ON.3 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 24. Forcing the integrator does not influence the P-term. it is recommended to use the function Acceleration Compensation (see parameter 24. which means that weighting can be changed on-line NAME VALUE MEANING OFF 0 ON 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .Overview 24. If enabled (see parameter 24. If BAL is set to ON and the signal BAL_NCONT is available the integrator uses the value at BAL REF (see Figure 24-1). Set Point Weighting . If the function is enabled and the weighting factor is set to a value < 1.08 TIS [s] Integration time for the speed controller. scaling:100 == 1 % 128/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. the weighting function prevents the controller output from overshooting by weighting the set point with an adjustable factor (b in Block Diagram) before the actual value is subtracted from it (see block diagram). The change over is bumbles. scaling:1 == 1 24. where the gain is KPS Unit: % Type: R Min: 0. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF integrator in not forced 1 ON integrator is forced Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 1000s Def: 2. The factor (set in %) only affects the p-term of the control algorithm. Unit: % Type: R Min: -4 Max: 4 Def: 0 Int.06 SETPOINT SEL Set Point Weighing is enabled by this parameter. Therefore. scaling:1000 == 1 s 24.11 BAL REF [%] External value for the integral part of the speed controller when external setting BAL is used.06) and adjusted correctly (see parameter 24. the controller works normally in steady-state operation and corrects actual speed deviations from the set point to zero. For applications requiring the speed controller to follow preset ramps without delay.5 s Int. Defines the time in which the maximum output is achieved if a constant error value exists and the relative gain of the speed controller is 1.15).

04 TORQ REF B. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 100 s Def: 0 s Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. scaling:10 == 1 ms ms 24.12 DERIVATION TIME [ms] Derivation time for speed controller. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 100000 Def: 8 ms Int. and then the compensation torque is transmitted directly as a torque reference to address 25. If inertia changes during the process.17 SLIP GAIN is also valid. scaling:1 == 1 ms 999999 ms 24.07) relative to parameter 24. scaling:1 == 1 ms ms INERTIA COMPENSATION Inertia compensation torque can be calculated in the inverter when the time for derivative function is given.15 is set to zero. otherwise as a PID controller. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 ms Max: 1000 Def: 0 ms Int. scaling:1 == 1 % MSAI5150 ACS1000 129/389 . Make sure that overcompensation does not occur.Diagram 24. When an internal speed actual value is used. The acceleration compensator gives an additional torque reference (3. If parameter 24. Value 0 means no slip compensation and calculated speed equals motor frequency. the calculation of the inertia can be done with the overriding system.15 ACC COMP DER TIME. Value 100 corresponds to the rated slip of the motor. 100% means full slip compensation.14 ACC COMP DER TIME [s] Derivation time used for compensation during acceleration.15 ACC COMPFILT TIME [ms] Acceleration compensation term filter coefficient.ABB 24.09 TORQ REF2 should not become more negative (positive) during acceleration (deceleration) than when the speed reference was constant. Figure 24 6 Inertia Compensation . parameter 24. If set to zero the controller works as a PI controller. scaling:1000 == 1s 24. for example. the function is not activated. the value of speed controller output 3.16 ANTIWINDUP COEF [%] This parameter affects only when internal speed is used as speed feedback. Gain for the slip of the motor. Unit: ms Type: R Min: Max: 0ms Def: 8 ms Int.13 DERIV FILT TIME [ms] The derivative filter time constant. 0% means no slip compensation. Defines the time in which the speed controller derivatives the error value before the output of the speed controller are changed.

Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 80Hz Def: 4. This improves the performance of the speed control at low speeds. scaling:1 == 1 % 24.21 TIS VAL MIN FREQ. Changing the rate of relative gain and integration time parameters is done by parameters 24. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Hz Max: 80 Hz Def: 2 Hz Int. Figure 24-7 Adaptive Speed Control as a Func.18 KPS TIS MAX SPEED [rpm] The frequency point at which KPS and TIS become constant. scaling:100 == 1 Hz 24. The linear increase and decrease of these parameters is started at speed KPS TIS MIN FREQ and ended at speed KPS TIS MAX FREQ. of Speed .7 Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz 24.20 TIS VAL MIN SPEED [%] Relative integral time % of TIS at the speed defined by parameter KPS TIS MIN FREQ.I Signal and Parameter Table .Diagram 24.20 KPS VAL MIN FREQ and 24. Unit: % Type: R Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int.19 KPS VAL MIN SPEED [%] Relative gain % of KPS value at the speed defined by parameter KPS TIS MIN FREQ. Unit: % Type: R Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED In certain applications it is useful to increase the relative gain and decrease the integration time at low speeds. scaling:1 == 1 % 130/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.17 KPS TIS MIN SPEED [rpm] The minimum motor frequency limit above which the relative gains and integral time is defined by parameters KPS VAL MIN FREQ and TIS VAL MIN FREQ.

01 OU TPUT 03.02 TORQ REF A FTC [ms] TORQUE REF A low pass filter time constant.08 RAMPING 20.05 TORQ RAMP UP 25.02 TORQ REF A FTC x + TORQ REF SELECT LOAD SHARE LI MITER 25.06 TORQ RAMP DN Figure 25 1 Torque Reference . TORQUE REF A can be scaled by parameter LOAD SHARE.Overview t__sta_ref_vdcosc t__sta_ref_pullout t__sta_ref_slow t__sta_ref_user t__sta_ref_curr t__sta_ref_nrot t__sta_ref_spd t__sta_ref_bc Braking Rotor User Pull-out V_dc Current Chopper speed torque torque oscillation limitation duty cycle limitation limitation limitation damping limitation Figure 25 2 Details of the Torque Limiting Chain 25.10 25.03 TORQ REF1 3.04 + TREF TORQMIN 25. scaling: 100 == 1 % 25.ABB Group 25 TORQUE REFERENCE 25 TORQUE REFERENCE LIMITER TORQ REF SEL TORQ REF A APPL BLOCK 0 25. Unit: % Type: R Int. scaling:1 == 1 ms ms MSAI5150 ACS1000 131/389 . Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 60000 Def: 1000ms Int.09 TREF TORQMAX TORQ REF B 20.01 TORQUE REF A [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Torque reference.18 1 25.07 25.

10 TREF TORQMIN (see Figure 25 1).Diagram 132/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. and LOAD SHARE = 25. then 25.03 LOAD SHARE. where the motor size is taken into account. If the operator wants to adjust the load share between the master and slave(s). Figure 25-3 Torque Ref1 from Torque Ref A .SHARE CONTROL Load sharing between master drive and slave drive is done by parameter 25. The slave percentages sent to the drives are scaled in the control system. the scaling is calculated in the overriding system so that the percentage reference values means percentage of the actual load.03 LOAD SHARE is set to a constant value 100. This corresponds to 1/5 of the total load if the master and the slave section motors have equal power ratings.I Signal and Parameter Table .e. When the master and the slave are of equal size and the load is required to be equally divided. NOTE! It is possible for a slave to run at rated torque although it takes only 20% of the total load.Signal and Parameter Table ABB LOAD .09 TREF TORQMAX and 20. ¼ of the rated value. the torque reference of the slave is 25 i.e. Example: If the torque reference coming from the master is 100 i. the rated value. The TORQUE REF A are limited by the torque limit 20.

Unit: % Type: R Min: -4 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. scaling:100 == 1 s 25. scaling:10 == 1 % 25.09 TREF TORQMAX and 20.06 TORQ RAMP DOWN TIME.04 TORQUE REF B [%] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY TORQUE REF B is ramped by parameters TORQ RAMP UP and TORQUE RAMP DOWN.Diagram Unit: % Type: R Int.07 TorqRefA or B Sel This parameter defines the source of the external torque reference value.ABB 25. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 120s Def: 0s Int. This torque reference passes through a ramp. Then the torque reference is transmitted fro the overriding system. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 120s Def: 0s Int. NAME VALUE MEANING TORQ REF A 0 TORQ REF B 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:100 == 1 s 25.The TORQUE REF B is limited by the torque limit 20. which scales the external torque reference to a required level. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 133/389 . 25.10 TREF TORQMIN (see Figure 25 1). The time of the ramp is determined by parameters 25. Figure 25-4 Torque Ref1 from Torque Ref B . scaling: 100 == 1 % 25.06 TORQ RAMP DN [s] Ramp time down parameter for TORQUE REF B.05 TORQ RAMP UP TIME and 25.04 TORQUE REF B is used when load sharing is not needed or in case of a torque controlled single drive.03 LOAD SHARE [%] TORQUE REF A scaling factor.05 TORQ RAMP UP [s] Ramp time up parameter for TORQUE REF B.

The actual speed then remains below (above) the reference and the logic selects the smaller torque reference. • torque control selected (99.01 = 5) than the actual speed.01 (local) resp.11 TORQUE REFERENCE TORQUE S ELECTOR SELECTOR 26. speed reference route or addition of both torque and speed ref.01 Torque Selector The torque reference selector includes min/max-selectors.14 = Torque Ctrl) and/or follower selected (70.12 3.01 TORQUE SELECTOR is set to 4 (or 5). If a safety margin of the actual speed is needed.13 OS C_COMP_ON 126.02 OS C_COMP_PHASE LIMITAT IO NS 126. the drive follows the external torque reference (TORQUE REF A / B) and the actual speed is not controlled or limited. A changeover from speed control to torque control reference takes place when reference is lower (higher) than the controller output.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 26 TORQREF HANDLING 26 TORQREF HANDLING The torque reference can be given from the speed reference chain (TORQ REF2) or from the torque reference chain (TORQ REF1) depending on the control mode.08 = Follower). then 26. torque reference route. This function enables a smooth changeover from speed control to torque control and back.02 (remote).02 TORQUE REFERENCE LIMITING TORQ REF5 TORQ USED REF OSCILLATION DAMPING 3. 12. Then it is not possible to prevent the drive section from overspeeding. NAME VALUE MEANING ZERO 1 SPEED 2 TORQUE 3 MINIMUM 4 MAXIMUM 5 ADD 6 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int.09 + (SP EED CONTROLLER OUTPUT) + Figure 26-1 Torque Reference Selection .01 = 3). Then the speed controller of the drive has to receive a speed reference value from the overriding system which is slightly higher (lower if 26.01 OS C_COMP_FREQ 126. With the other control modes that can be selected in 99. A negative (positive) speed difference causes changeover to speed control. This group defines how to handle the reference after the torque selector block. scaling:1 == 1 134/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .10 4 MIN 5 6 MAX TORQ REF2 3. When running with pure torque control (26. TORQUE STEP 26.Overview 26.03 LOAD COMPENSATION 26.04 3. Note! The torque selector can be modified only when the following conditions are true: • Ref2 selected via 12.01 0 TORQ REF1 3.03 OS C_COMP_GAIN TORQ REF4 126.08 2 1 TORQ REF3 3 (EX TERNA L TORQUE REFERENCE) 3.14 the torque selector is fixed to ‘SPEED’.

Unit: % Type: R Min: See 20. scaling:100 == 1 % 20.ABB 26. scaling:100 == 1 % 20.06 Max: See Def: 0 Int.05 MSAI5150 ACS1000 135/389 .03 TORQUE STEP [%] It is possible to add an additional torque step to TORQ REF4. Unit: % Type: R Min: See 20.02 LOAD COMPENSATION [%] It is possible to add a load compensation value to TORQ REF3.05 26.06 Max: See Def: 0 Int.

thermal losses can be increased and the drive can be decelerated more effectively. During braking the mechanical energy of the drive has to be eliminated by the motor and inverter. scaling:1 == 1 % 27.01 FLUX OPT ENA (130.01) Flux reference maximum limit. Internal flux control sets the limits for the external flux control values according to the motor state.04 MAX FLUX REF [%] (130.03) Input for the external flux reference. -1 TRUE Flux optimisation function is active.24) The motor flux is optimised in order to minimise motor losses and reduce noise.02 FLUX BRK ENA (130. Function can be used in drives with no active front end.02) Flux reference minimum limit. scaling:1 == 1 27.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 27 FLUX CONTROL 27.03 FLUX REF IN [%] (130.I Signal and Parameter Table . Figure 27 1 Flux Braking .99998 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 FALSE Function is disabled.23) The braking ability of the drive is highly improved by using the flux braking.07 MIN FLUX OPT [%] Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 84. Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: FALSE Int. -1 TRUE Flux braking function is active. scaling: 136/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 FALSE Function is disabled. By modifying the magnetising level of the motor.Diagram Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: FALSE Int. scaling:1 == 1 % 27. The flux optimisation is used in drives that usually operate below nominal load.05 MIN FLUX REF [%] (130. Unit: % Type: R Min: 100 Max: 130 Def: 120 Int. scaling:1 == 1 27. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 20 Int. scaling:1 == 1 % 27. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 100 Int.

ABB

Group 28 DC LINK CONTROL

28 DC LINK CONTROL
Parameters for charging, discharging and neutral point voltage supervision.

All parameter in this group are inverter type specific and set during the commissioning according
the drive type code.
They are only visible after entering the service passcode.

28.01 MCB ClosingLevel
Not applicable for ACS1000 software.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

28.02 DC ChargingLevel [V]
DC link voltage level at which the protection IGCTs are closed.

Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 4300 Int. scaling:1==1V

28.03 ChargingTime [s]
Timeout for the charging sequence. If the DC link is not charged within this time, a trip will be
initiated.

Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 120 Def: 60 Int. scaling:10==1s

28.04 DischargeTime [s]
Timeout for the discharging sequence. If the DC link is not discharged within this time, a trip will be
initiated.

Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 300 Def: 60 Int. scaling:10==1s

28.05 DischargedLevel [V]
DC Voltage level at which the DC link is considered as discharged. Before the DC link is considered
as discharged (and for example the cabinet door locking is released) the measured DC voltage level
(2.01) has to be below the level defined by this parameter.

Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 50 Def: 50 Int. scaling:1==1V

28.06 MinChargingTime [s]
Monitoring of charging function. If the charging level is reached too soon, a fault will be generated. This
is a protection feature, preventing MCB closing, for example in a case of faulted voltage measurement.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 1 Int. scaling:10==1s

28.07 NpVoltDevLimit [V]
Maximum allowed level for the DC Voltage unbalance while charging up DC link. The neutral point
voltage actual value (parameter 2.08 NP VOLTAGE) is compared against this parameter value
during the charging sequence, and if the limit is reached the fault will occur.
Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 500 Def: 200 Int. scaling:1==1V

MSAI5150 ACS1000 137/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
28.08 ModulationDischrg
Not applicable for ACS1000.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: -1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

28.09 VLU CtrlSuperv
Not applicable for ACS1000.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: -1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

28.10 HV ChrgRelaySupv
Not applicable for ACS1000.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: -1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

28.11 VLU GUSP PowerLoss
Not applicable for ACS1000.
Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: -1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1

28.12 DUDT MAX CHARGING [V/ms]
Maximum rise of the DC-link voltage during charging.
If the voltage increases faster the charging circuit is probably defect and a fault message is generated.

Note:This parameter is automatically preset by the software loading package.
Unit: V/ms Type: R Min: Max: Def: 500 Int. scaling:

28.15 PassiveDischDelay
Parameter defines the waiting time until the grounding switch can be operated, if the TC Stałe Machine
still stays in the INIT sequence (6.42 TC STATE- Stałe 0, 1 or 2) or a communication fault is active after
the software initilization time has elapsed.
With this delay, it can be guaranteed that the DC-Link voltage is really zero also without communication
link between the measurement device and the AMC board not working.
During this sequence an additional alarm message is shown: „ PassiveDischarge”

Note!
Parameter change is only allowed by ABB service. If parameter is set to zero (0), the monitoring
function is disabled.
Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 900 Int. scaling:1==1s

28.16 NpVoltDevIncTime
NP voltage deviation increase time after modulation stop. The NP voltage threshold will be increased
after stopping modulation for the time set in this parameter.
Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 300 Int. scaling:1 == 1s

138/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB

Group 29 SCALAR CONTROL

29 SCALAR CONTROL
NOT AVAILABLE

When parameter 99.09 CONTROL MODE is set to SCALAR the scalar control mode is activated.
This parameter group is only visible if SCALAR - control mode is selected.
NOTE! All scalar control parameters above Group 99 have to be checked during commissioning.

29.01 FREQUENCY REF [Hz] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY
This is input for the frequency reference.
Unit: Hz Type: R Int. scaling: 100 == 1 Hz

29.02 FrequencyMax [Hz]
Operating range maximum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED
MAX. When changing the SPEED MAX value, the software updates this parameter accordingly.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: see 29.03 Max: 200 Hz Def: 50Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz

29.03 FrequencyMin [Hz]
Operating range minimum frequency. This parameter has an internal link to the parameter SPEED MIN.
When changing the SPEED MIN value, the software updates this parameter accordingly. For step-up
transformer option: if parameter 132.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum frequency is
limited to that minimum starting frequency for step-up.
Unit: Hz Type: R Min: -200 Hz Max: see Def: - 50Hz Int. scaling:100 == 1 Hz
29.02

MSAI5150 ACS1000 139/389

140/389
UDC1

UDC2
Local
DC-VO LTAGE
LIMITER CURRENT
Freq Ref LIMITATION
29.01 LIMITER ACC/DEC/SHAPE UDC
SCALAR CONTROL

Local Freq Ref
X
Load Share
23.05
DC OVE RVOLTAGE MAXIMUM
22.01 Acc/Dec 1/2 Sel 29.02 FREQUENCY MAX ACCEL TIME 1/2 CURRENT
Signal and Parameter Table

Inverter Current
Accel Ti me1 29.03 FREQUENCY MIN DECEL TIME 1/2
22.02
Accel Ti me2 22.06 PR STOP RAMP Max Motor Current
22.03 20.04
22.07 SHAPE TIME
Decel Ti me1 MIN
22.04 MaxInverterCurrent
22.05 Decel Ti me2

Figure 29-1 Scalar Control - Overview
OS CILATION MAKE FLUX REF
HYSTE RESIS CONTRO L
DAMP ING (sin e wav e gen erato r)

Flux X Act
Motor Torque
1.09 Flux Y Act

uses torque modul ator
FLUX REF SWITCHING FREQ
CONTROL CONTROL

3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I
Flux Used Ref Switch Freq Ref
3.14

IR COMP
COMPENSATION
CALCULATION

IR Compensation Flux Act
3.15

IR Comp Weak Flux X Act

Flux Y Act

99.03 MOTOR NOM VOLT
Frequency
99.05 MOTOR NOM FREQ 1.05
ABB

Signal and Parameter Table

ABB

Group 30 MOTOR PROTECTION

30 MOTOR PROTECTION
The motor can be protected against overheating by:

• temperature measurement of the motor using PT100 or PTC sensors by using analogue inputs
(with a separate transducer)
• a thermal switch inside the motor connected to digital input DI14-IOEC1

EXTERNAL: The motor over temperature detection is based on the measured values of the
motor temperature by means of PT100.
Motor Thermal Protection
30.01 EXT MOTOR THERM PROT
AI2 - IOEC2
(4.17) MotTempPhase U1
SCALING (4.09)
13.12 Ext ernal Alarm Motor Temp Alarm
: 30.05 M OT T EM P AL M L
MotTempAlarm U1

13.16 : Ext ernal Trip Motor Temp Trip
M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip U1
30.06
Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Alarm Alarm
enable
AI2-IOEC2 < 2mA Motor Temp Meas Lost
MeasLost Trip Trip
AI2-IOEC2
MeasLost Alarm U1
30.02 M OT TEM P M EA S U
MeasLost Trip U1

AI3 - IOEC2
(4.18) MotTempPhase V1
SCALING (4.10)
13.18
: 30.05 M OT T EM P AL M L
MotTempAlar m V1

13.22 : Mot TempTrip V1
30.06 M OT T EM P T RIP L

enable
AI3-IOEC2 < 2mA

AI3-IOEC2
MeasLostAlarm V1
30.03 M OT TEM P M EA S V MeasLost Trip U1

AI4 - IOEC2
(4.19) MotTempPhase W1
SCALING (4.11)
13.24
: 30.05 M OT T EM P AL M L
MotTempAlar m W1

13.28 :
M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip W1
30.06

enable
AI4-IOEC2 < 2mA

AI4-IOEC2
MeasLostAlarm W1
30.04 M OT TEM P M EA S W MeasLostTrip W1

Figure 30 1 Motor Thermal Protection - Overview

MSAI5150 ACS1000 141/389

Signal and Parameter Table ABB
30.01 ExtMotorThermProt
This parameter defines the operation in case the motor thermal protection function detects overheating
of the motor.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT If actual motor temperature exceeds the ALARM LIMIT (Par. 30.05) an
STOP alarm signal will be generated and if actual motor temperature exceeds the
TRIP LIMIT (30.06) a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be
stopped
2 WARNING If actual motor temperature exceeds the ALARM LIMIT (Par. 30.05) or the
TRIP LIMIT (Par. 30.06) only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO External motor temperature supervision is not active
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1

30.02 MotWdgUTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase U by using
analogue input AI2-IOEC2 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer
which provides a 0(4)...20mA signal for the AI). The supervision for measurement loss is only active, if
Par. 13.14 AI2 MINIMUM IO2 is set to 4mA/2V .

Note:
If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.: 30.02, 30.03, 30.04) a Soft Stop will only
be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.
2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO No action, motor temperature measurement is not used
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1

30.03 MotWdgVTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase V by using
analogue input AI3-IOEC2 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer
which provides a 0(4)...20mA signal for the AI). The supervision for measurement loss is only active, if
Par. 13.20 AI3 MINIMUM IO2 is set to 4mA/2V .

Note:
If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.: 30.02, 30.03, 30.04) a Soft Stop will only
be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.
2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO No action, motor temperature measurement is not used
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1

142/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table

ABB
30.04 MotWdgWTempMeas1
This parameter activates the first motor winding temperature measurement of phase W by using
analogue input AI4-IOEC2 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer
which provides a 0(4)...20mA signal for the AI). The supervision for measurement loss is only active, if
Par. 13.26 AI4 MINIMUM IO2 is set to 4mA/2V.

Note:
If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.: 30.02, 30.03, 30.04) a Soft Stop will only
be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost.
VALUE NAME MEANING
1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.
2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. In case of measurement loss the
drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated
3 NO No action, motor temperature measurement is not used
Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1

30.05 MotTempAlarmLevel [C]
Motor temperature alarm limit. When measured temperature of external sensor (range e.g. –
10...180° C) rises above this limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: 50 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C

30.06 MotTempTripLevel [C]
Motor temperature trip limit. Drive is tripped when measured temperature of external sensor (range e.g.
-10...180° C) rises above this limit.
Unit: °C Type: R Min: Par. 30.05 Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C

MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION

i / in

Par.: 30.07: 400%
MotorProtCurrLev 1

OVERLOAD

Par.: 30.08: 200%
MotorProtCurrLev 2

Par.: 30.09: 150%
MotorProtCurrLev 3

20 480 t/s
1200
Par.: 30.10 Par.: 30.11
MotorProtTime1 MotorProtTime2 Par.: 30.12
MotorProtTime3
Figure 30 2 Motor Overload Protection - Diagram

MSAI5150 ACS1000 143/389

If motor frequency is below this level.: 06. scaling:1 == 1% 144/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.07 MOTCURR PROTLVL 1 [%] Motor protection current level 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:100 == 1% 30.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 30. If motor RMS current is above this level. if motor is stalled.15 StallCurrHLim Defines the motor current high level.03) * 2 Figure Unit: % Type: R Min: 20 Max: 400 Def: 400 Int. the first condition to supervize the motor for stall conditions is fulfilled.08 MOTCURR PROTLVL 2 [%] Motor protection current level 2 (maximum limit see Parameter 30.13 StallFunction This parameter defines the reaction of the stall protection once it gets active. Unit: % Type: R Min: 20 Max: 400 Def: 200 Int.14 StallFreqLLim Defines the motor stall frequency low level. motor stall protection is not active. an alarm signal will be generated 3 FC2 Motor stall protection is active. Note!The maximum limit could be less but not over 400% (up to selected ratio between inverter and motor). Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 1200 Def: 20 Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 500 Def: 150 Int. 2 ALARM Motor stall protection is active. The maximum value is calculated by following formular: InvNomCurrent (Par. scaling:1 == 1Hz 30.09 MOTCURR PROTLVL 3 [%] Motor protection current level 3 (maximum limit see Parameter 30. scaling:1 == 1 30. a trip signal will be FAULT generated and the modulation will be stopped. NAME VALUE MEANING 1 DISABLED No action. scaling:100 == 1% 30.07).12 MOT PROT TIME 3 [s] Motor protection time 3 that correspond to motor protection current level 3. scaling:1 == 1s 30. scaling:1 == 1s 30.11) * 3 Max = * 100% MotorNomCurrent (Par.07).: 99. if motor is stalled. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 1200 Def: 480 Int.10 MOT PROT TIME 1 [s] Motor protection time 1 that corresponds to motor protection current level 1. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 1200 Def: 1200 Int. scaling:100 == 1 % 30.I Signal and Parameter Table .11 MOT PROT TIME 2 [s] Motor protection time 2 that correspond to motor protection current level 2. Unit: % Type: R Min: 20 Max: 400 Def: 150 Int. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1s 30. the second condition to supervize the motor for stall conditions is fulfilled.

Diagram Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 30 Int. I % FILT MOT RMS CUR Stall area Operation area 30.16 MaxStallTime Time value for the stall protection logic (delay time for the stall alarm or fault generation after the above detection conditions one and two have been fulfilled). Frequency Limit .14 StallFreqLowLimit Figure 30-4 Stall Protection. scaling:1 == 1s MSAI5150 ACS1000 145/389 .ABB 30.15 StallCurHighLim INU FREQ ACT (ABS) f Hz 30.

. if motor is underloaded. an alarm signal will be generated.17 UnderloadFunc Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The protection is activated if : .the motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 30. . a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped. 3 FAULT Motor underload protection is active.19 UNDERLOAD CURVE.18 UNDERLOAD TIME [s] (186. The protection function assumes that the drive is equipped with a motor of the rated power.this condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 30. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No action.output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal frequency of the motor. motor underload protection is not active. 2 WARNING Motor underload protection is active. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 600 Def: 10 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 == 1 30. Figure 30-5 Motor Underload Protection . scaling:1 == 1s 146/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.18 UNDERLOAD TIME.44) Time limit for underload logic.Diagram Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. if motor is underloaded.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 30.

07) Enables single phase-to-earth detection (“Floating Ground Supervision”).ABB 30.08.20 Floating Gnd Sel (152.Diagram Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 147/389 . Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: FALSE Int.12. drive trips with FC2 fault reaction if in motor overload protection area Unit: Type: Enum Min: 0 Max: 2 Def: 2 Int.07 to 30. For reaction selection (alarm/trip) see 152.47) Selection of reaction if motor overload (motor UL) protection is active.19 UNDERLOAD CURVE (186. only alarm appears if in motor overload protection W/ALARM area PROT W/TRIP 2 Function enabled. scaling:1 == 1 30.21 MOT OVERLOAD PROT (186. Further settings for the motor overload protection must be set in paramters 30.45) One of the 5 fixed underload curves can be selected for underload protection: Figure 30-6 Motor Underload Curves . NAME VALUE MEANING PROT 0 Function disabled DISABLE PROT 1 Function enabled. scaling:1 == 1 30.

The function is only activated if the parameter 13. alarm bit is set (AW5 – Bit 03) and drive SPD15 runs continuously with constant speed15 (Par. scaling:1 == 1 31. scaling:1==1 148/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.07 AUTORESTART CW BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 ENA AR EXU Enable Auto Restart for EXU Trips B1 ENA AR UV Enable Auto Restart for Undervoltage Trips B2 ENA AR OV Enable Auto Restart for Overvoltage Trips B3 ENA AR OC Enable Auto Restart for Overcurrent Trips B4 ENA AR SF Enable Auto Restart for Switching Frequency Trips B5 ENA AR FC2 Enable Auto Restart for motor side FLTCL2 Trips B6 ENA AR RBM Enable Block Modulation Auto Restart for Redundant SD Unit: Type: PB Min: Max: Def: Int.03 AI1 MINIMUM IOEC1 is set to 4mA/2V.16). scaling:1 == 1 31.16) 4 LAST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with the last speed SPEED reference Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.08 AI1 MINIMUM IOEC2 is set to 4mA/2V. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No action 2 FAULT Drive trips in case of analogue signal loss 3 CNST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with constant speed15 SPD15 (Par. when it is selected as the control location for the drive (e.g.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 31 FAULT FUNCTIONS 31.03 AI<MinFuncExtRef1 Operation in cases the reference value 1 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC2) drops below the minimum limit.34.I Signal and Parameter Table . VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No panel link supervision 2 FAULT Fault indication is displayed. local mode). make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case communication with the Control Panel fails.04 AI<MinFuncExtRef2 Operation in cases the reference value 2 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC1) drops below the minimum limit. The function is only activated if the Parameter 13.34. fault bit is set (FW5 – Bit 09) and drive stops according to the setting of Parameter 21.16) 4 LAST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with the last speed SPEED reference Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No action 2 FAULT Drive trips in case of analogue signal loss 3 CNST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with constant speed15 SPD15 (Par.06 PanelLossSuperv Defines the operation of the drive if the control panel stops communicating. scaling:1 == 1 31. alarm bit is set (AW5 – Bit 03) and drive SPEED runs continuously with the last actual speed Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.02 STOP FUNCTION 3 CNST Warning indication is displayed. 4 LAST Warning indication is displayed.34. NOTE! If you select CNST SPD 15 or LAST SPEED.

scaling: 16777.09 MAX NR OF SUCC AR [pcs] Maximum number of successive Auto Restarts.2s 31. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 Max: Def: 30000 Int. Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: Def: 3000ms Int. During this time control tries to reset pending faults. This parameter defines the maximum allowed time to delay the trip reaction on pending faults. Control is in state AUTORESET. drive will trip due to Autorestart Loop. After this time has elapsed the internal counter of successive auto restarts will be reset. If this time elapses drive trips. which require an Auto Restart. scaling: 16777. scaling:1==1 8388610 31. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: Def: 5 Int. If the internal AR successive counter is bigger than the value given by this parameter.08 AR TIMEOUT MAX [ms] Maximum value of Auto Restart timeout timer.2s MSAI5150 ACS1000 149/389 .ABB 31.10 TIME SUCC AR [ms] Evaluation time to check if Auto Restart was successful or not.

12 Overl@LowFreq.) I_inv_rms [%] 100% 70% (133.30) 5Hz n [Hz] (133. the overload protection is active and drive will trip after a delay time. depending on the selection in this parameter.10 70%LIM DELAY TIME or 33.12. If 33. Independent on overload condition. 133. drive will trip. .g.10 divided by 2).Signal and Parameter Table ABB 31. trip delay at 110% overload = 133.g. scaling:1 == 1s 150/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NAME VALUE MEANING 31.10 / 2. the delay time is 133. but trip delay is dependent on overload condition (e.12 and not dependent on overload condition. Once the inverter rms current is within overload area for a time equal or longer than set in this parameter.11 Overl@LowFreq Sel Overload protection for low frequency speed ranges. The delay time can be set in parameter 133.11 is set to 33. If 133...10. As long as motor frequency is in the range of 0Hz to 5Hz (adaptable by parameter 133.30 70% LIM I LIMIT (0Hz) to 100% (5Hz).05) Figure Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.12 0 Overload protection delay time is set with parameter 31.10 is selected as source for the time delay.10 1 Overload protection delay time is set with parameter 133. the delay is depending on how much the inverter is overloaded (e. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 60 Int.12 Overl@LowFreq Time Overload maximum time delay in low frequency speed ranges.10. the delay time is indepent of overload condition. trip delay at 120% overload = 133. if inverter is 120% overloaded.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 == 1 31.05 FREQ HYST 70%) and inverter RMS current is bigger than the linear approximation from 133.

Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 120 Def: 5 Int. The status of each limit supervision function will be shown in Par. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT If one of the supervision functions below is active.Diagram 32. scaling:1 == 1 32. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit.02 LimSupervDelTime [s] If one of supervision function is active this delay timer will be started. only an alarm signal will be generated 3 NO No alarm/fault will be set if one of the supervision functions below is active Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:10 == 1s 32. scaling:1 == 1 rpm / 1Hz MSAI5150 ACS1000 151/389 .01 LimSupervAction This parameter defines the operation in case one of the supervision functions below is activated.07). Free programmable relay output can be used to indicate a supervision limit. 8.07 LIMIT WORD2. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.03 SpeedRefFunction This parameter activate the speed reference supervision function. a trip signal will be STOP generated and the drive will be stopped 2 ALARM If one of the supervision functions below is active. The limit bit from each supervision function is set in Limit Word 2 (Par.ABB Group 32 SUPERVISION 32 SUPERVISION These parameter values can be altered while the ACS1000 is running. Figure 32 1 Limit Supervision (Actual and Reference Signals) .04 SpeedRefLimit [Hz] Speed reference supervision limit. 3 HIGH LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit. If one of the supervision functions is active the delay time will be started. scaling:1 == 1 32. Unit: rpm /Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 21000 Def: 0 Int. 8.

07 MotCurrentFunction This parameter activates the motor current supervision function. LIMIT 3 HIGH Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit.11 SupSig1 Function This parameter allows activating the “supervision signal 1” function.05 SpeedActFunction This parameter allows activating the actual speed supervision function.08 MotCurrentLimit [A] Motor current supervision limit.09 MotTorqueFunction This parameter activates the motor torque supervision function. Setting in actual ampere. LIMIT 4 ABS LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. scaling:10 == 1 % 32.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 32. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.. adjustable 0.. scaling:1 == 1 32.5000A Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 0 Int. Limit is LIM supervised in both rotating directions. step is 1% of In.06 SpeedActLimit [Hz] Actual speed limit supervision Unit: rpm/Hz Type: R Min: -21000 Max: 21000 Def: 0 Int. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table . Setting in 0% . Limit is LIM supervised in both rotating directions.. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4 Def: 0 Int. LIMIT 3 HIGH Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit.10 MotTorqueLimit [%] Motor torque supervision limit. scaling:1 == 1 32. scaling:1 == 1 152/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling:1 == 1 A 32. scaling:1 == 1 32. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. 3 HIGH LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit. scaling:1 == 1 rpm/ 1 Hz 32. LIMIT 4 ABS LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit.. 400% of the nominal torque of the motor. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. 3 HIGH LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW LIMIT Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. forward and reverse. forward and reverse.

where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. ACTUAL VALUE 2. The default setting of 32. scaling:1 == 1 32. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 8501 Int.ABB 32. where (x)x the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. Example: When the actual value of INVERTER AIR TEMPERATURE should be supervised. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.15 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 100 Int. scaling:1 == 1 32.13 SupSig1 Limit Signal 1 supervision limit of previous selected signal in 32. LIMIT 3 HIGH Supervision will be activated if value is above the set limit. The format is (x)xyy. scaling:1 == 1 32. Limit is LIM supervised in both rotating directions. LIMIT 4 ABS LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit.12 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from.12 SupSig1Group+Indx A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to “supervision signal 1” by setting parameter 32.12 is set to 216 with 2 representing the group and 16 representing the index.15 SupSig2Group+Indx A numerical value of the AMC-table is assigned to “supervision signal 2” by setting parameter 32.16 SupSig2 Limit Signal 2 supervision limit of previous selected signal in 32.14 SupSig2 Function This parameter allows activating the “supervision signal 2” function.21 is 8502.15 is set to 216 with 2 representing the group and 16 representing the index.18 is 8501. scaling:1 == 1 32. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 153/389 . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 8502 Int. ACTUAL VALUE 1. parameter 32. parameter 32. The default setting of 32.12 Unit: Type: R Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 100 Int. Example: When the actual value of INVERTER AIR TEMPERATURE should be supervised. The format is (x)xyy. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Supervision not used 2 LOW Supervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. forward and reverse.15 to the parameter group and index the value is to taken from.

ranging from 0 to 18000rpm. Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque reference or process PID reference is followed (see Torque Control and PID Control Macros). Negative speed values cannot be given directly. In External. this has to be done with the digital input SIGNAL DIRECTION. the absolute value of the speed is read from parameter group 33. when External Control Location EXT1 is selected. The sign of constant speed 15 is considered when used as a Fault Speed (sees parameter 30. If constant speed is activated.19 and figure 12-3).Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 33 CONSTANT SPEED 33 CONSTANT SPEED The following parameters (except those marked with “O”) can be altered while the ACS1000 is running. Figure 33-1 Constant Speed Selection .I Signal and Parameter Table .Diagram 154/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.18 and 30. constant speed override any other references. The ACS1000 has 15 programmable constant speeds.

scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm MSAI5150 ACS1000 155/389 . scaling:1 == 1 33. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 900rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.5. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 rpm Max: Def: 300rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 600rpm Int.5. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.03 ConstantSpeed 2 [RPM] Constant speed 2 selection.5 12 DI4. 2 8 DI3.6 13 DI3.07 ConstantSpeed 6 [RPM] Constant speed 6 selection Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 300rpm Int.04 ConstantSpeed 3 [RPM] Constant speed 3 selection.08 ConstantSpeed 7 [RPM] Constant speed 7 selection Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.05 ConstantSpeed 4 [RPM] Constant speed 4 selection.4.01 ConstantSpeedSel This parameter defines which digital inputs (IOEC2 .6 14 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 14 Def: 10 Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.06 ConstantSpeed 5 [RPM] Constant speed 5 selection. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.2.3 11 DI 3.02 ConstantSpeed 1 [RPM] Constant speed 1 selection.DI6) are used to select Constant speeds.ABB 33.4.. 4 9 DI5. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT SEL 1 DI1 (SPEED 1) 2 DI2 (SPEED 2) 3 DI3 (SPEED 3) 4 DI4 (SPEED 4) 5 DI5 (SPEED 5) 6 DI6 (SPEED 7 DI1..DI1.6 10 DI 1.

13 ConstantSpeed 12 [RPM] Constant speed 12 selection.12 ConstantSpeed 11 [RPM] Constant speed 11 selection.14 ConstantSpeed 13 [RPM] Constant speed 13 selection. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.15 ConstantSpeed 14 [RPM] Constant speed 14 selection.09 ConstantSpeed 8 [RPM] Constant speed 8 selection.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 33.I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33.10 ConstantSpeed 9 [RPM] Constant speed 9 selection. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 156/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 33. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.11 ConstantSpeed 10 [RPM] Constant speed 10 selection.16 ConstantSpeed 15 [RPM] Constant speed 15 selection.

02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW Start of critical speed 1 (low value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. With this parameter group it is possible to select up to five different speed ranges that the ACS 1000 will avoid. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Critical speed supervision is not active 1 ON Critical speed supervision is active. as long as the LOW parameter of one set is lower than the HIGH parameter of the same set. Figure 34-1 Critical Speed.03 CRITICAL SPEED 1 HIGH. Sets may overlap. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm MSAI5150 ACS1000 157/389 .01 CRIT SPEED ENABLE Enable of filtering critical speeds. but the skip will be from the lower LOW value to the higher HIGH value. Function of High and Low Limit .04 CRITICAL SPEED 2 LOW is higher than Parameter 34. drive avoids the defined critical speeds Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: 0 Int. It is not required that Parameter 34. scaling:1 == 1 34.Diagram 34.ABB Group 34 CRITICAL SPEED 34 CRITICAL SPEED In some mechanical systems. certain speed ranges can cause resonance problems.

scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW Start of critical speed 2 (low value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW Start of critical speed 3 (low value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.09 CRIT SPEED 4 HIGH Stop of critical speed 4 (high value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.11 CRIT SPEED 5 HIGH Stop of critical speed 5 (high value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH Stop of critical speed 1 (high value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.08 CRIT SPEED 4 LOW Start of critical speed 4 (low value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH Stop of critical speed 3 (high value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 34.10 CRIT SPEED 5 LOW Start of critical speed 5 (low value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH Stop of critical speed 2 (high value) Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: Def: 0rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 158/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling:1 == 1 rpm 18000rpm 34.

bearing temperature supervision (35. bearing temperature supervision (35.06 BrgTmpTripLevNDE [C] Motor bearing temperature trip level for Non Driven End.180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int.03) is active.. Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int.. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and measurement loss.ABB Group 35 EXT MOTOR PROT 35 EXT MOTOR PROT Only available with IOEC 3 / 4 Board (see Parameter 75.03 BrgTmpTripLevDE [C] Motor bearing temperature trip level for Driven End side. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and measurement loss. bearing temperature protection is not used. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range -10. scaling:1 == 1 35. NAME VALUE MEANING SOFT STOP 1 ALARM 2 NO 3 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Bearing temperature protection is used. scaling:1 = 1 °C 35.180°C) rises above this limit. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range -10.05 BrgTmpAlarmLevNDE [C] Motor bearing temperature alarm level for Non Driven End.180°C) rises above this limit.02 BrgTmpAlarmLevDE [C] Motor bearing temperature alarm level for Driven End...04 BearingTmpProtNDE Motor bearing temperature protection for Non Driven End.. 3 NO No action. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (PT100 range -10. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.02 and 35. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (PT100 range -10. scaling:1 = 1 °C MSAI5150 ACS1000 159/389 ..03) is active.180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int.02 and 35.. scaling:1 = 1 °C 35. 2 ALARM Bearing temperature protection is used.02) 35. scaling:1 = 1 °C 35.01 / 75..01 BearingTmpProtDE Motor bearing temperature protection for Driven End. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated. scaling:1 == 1 35. Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int.

With parameter 82.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 35.05 DI8 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is high or low active.04 DI6 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is high or low active. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the load bearing temperature 1 (35.14) and the transformer temperature ext/3 (36. 81.10 VibrationProtAI1 Vibration signal 1 supervision.12 and 35. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated.I Signal and Parameter Table .06 DI11 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select if the digital input for the alarm signal is high or low active IOEC3-DI11 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF External motor protection function is disabled 1 ON External motor protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. IOEC3-DI6 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated IOEC3-DI7 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped by and a fault message will be generated VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF External motor cooling protection function is disabled 1 ON External motor cooling protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. With parameter 82. scaling:1 == 1 160/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling:1 == 1 35.DI11).26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 3 ‘VibraSens1’. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Vibration protection is used.13) is active. scaling:1 == 1 35. With parameter 82. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int.07) are disabled.13) is active. Reaction in case of too high vibrations and measurement loss.08 MotorCoolingProt Selection of external motor cooling protection.12 and 35. IOEC3-DI8 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated IOEC3-DI9 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped by and a fault message will be generated. NOTE! If this function is enabled par.07 ExtMotorProtAlarm Operation in case the external motor protection is active (IOEC3 . VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF External vibration protection function is disabled 1 ON External vibration protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. 2 ALARM Vibration protection is used. 3 NO No action.02 and 36. Vibration supervision (35. bearing temperature protection is not used.09 VibrationProtDI External vibration protection function: This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Vibration Supervision Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI8) and ‘Vibration Supervision Trip’ IOEC3-DI9’. In case of measurement loss the drive will be STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. Vibration supervision (35. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Motor Cooling Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI6) and ‘Motor Cooling Trip’ (IOEC3-DI7). Selection of external motor protection. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘External Motor Protection Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI11). scaling:1 == 1 35.

Unit: % Type: R Min: 0. Protection is activated by parameter 35.18 VibraSens2) rises above this limit. 81.18 VibraSens2) rises above this limit. scaling:1 == 1 35.02 and 36.13 and 35. NOTE! If this function is enabled par.12 and 35.14 LoadBrgTmpProt1 Motor bearing temperature protection 1. Vibration supervision (35.13 and 35.12 VibrationAlmLev [%] Vibration alarm level.12) are disabled. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and measurement loss.04). Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 110 °C Int. (37.ABB 35. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0. the second cooling water pressure (190. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 1 (35. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Bearing temperature protection is used. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated. 2 (35. bearing temperature supervision (35. Protection is activated by parameter 35.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 3 ‘VibraSens2’. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range – 10…180° C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int.13) is active. the outside air temp. In case of measurement loss the drive will be STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.01 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.10) and the transformer temperature ext/3 (36. scaling:1 = 1 °C 35.01 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. 3 NO No action. scaling:1 == 1 % 35.17 VibraSens1 or 80. (36. 2 ALARM Vibration protection is used. scaling:1 == 1 35.17). bearing temperature protection is not used. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. bearing temperature protection is not used.07) are disabled. scaling:1 == 1 % 35. A trip will be generated when the measured vibration (80. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. NOTE! If this function is enabled par. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the load bearing temp.14) is active. Reaction in case of too high vibrations and measurement loss. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. 81.26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 2 ‘LoadBearTemp1’. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (PT100 range –10…180° C) rises above this limit. bearing temperature supervision (35.09 VibrationProtect. An alarm will be generated when the measured vibration (80.16 LoadBrgTmpTrpLev1 [C] Load bearing temperature trip level 1. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Vibration protection is used.12 and 35.44) and the output trafo temp. 2 ALARM Bearing temperature protection is used.15 LoadBrgTmpAlmLev1 [C] Load bearing temperature alarm level 1. scaling:1 = 1 °C MSAI5150 ACS1000 161/389 .09 VibrationProtect.13) is active. 3 NO No action.14) is active.13 VibrationTripLev [%] Vibration trip level.11 VibrationProtAI2 Vibration signal 2 supervision. Vibration supervision (35.17 VibraSens1 or 80.

44) and the output trafo temp.12) are disabled.180°C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int. the second cooling water pressure (190. NOTE! If this function is enabled par. Reaction in case of bearing over temperature and measurement loss.I Signal and Parameter Table . In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped . 81. scaling:1 = 1 °C 162/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.only an alarm signal will be generated.04).17 LoadBrgTmpProt2 Load bearing temperature protection 2. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. scaling:1 = 1 °C 35..18 LoadBrgTmpAlmLev2 [C] Load bearing temperature trip level 2. bearing temperature protection is not used. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Bearing temperature protection is used.. 2 ALARM Bearing temperature protection is used.. (36. scaling:1 == 1 35. bearing temperature supervision (35. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int.19 LoadBrgTmpTrpLev2 [C] Load bearing temperature trip level 2. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35.180° C) rises above this limit and a FAULT message will be generated Unit: °C Type: R Min: -10 °C Max: 180 °C Def: 120 °C Int. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range - 10.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 2 ‘LoadBearTemp2’. (37.17) is active..Signal and Parameter Table ABB 35. bearing temperature supervision (35. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (PT100 range - 10.11).17) is active 3 NO No action.16 and 35. the outside air temp.16 and 35.

.14 : 30.20.: 35.IOEC4 (85. 86.05 M OT T EM P AL M L MotTempAlarm U2 86.IOEC4 (85.20 M OT TEM P M EA S U MeasLost Trip U2 AI3 . The supervision for measurement loss is only active.20mA signal for the AI). scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 163/389 .20 : 30. 86.08) MotTempPhase V2 SCALING (85. 2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used.06 M OT T EM P T RIP L enable AI3-IOEC4 < 2mA AI3-IOEC4 MeasLostAlarm V2 35.24 : M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip W2 30.12 : Ext ernal Trip Motor Temp Trip M OT T EM P T RIP L MotTempTrip U2 30.26 ‘AI2 Select IO4’ is set = 2 ‘MotWgTmpPhU2’ VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. If this function is enabled par. 35.04) 86.08 External Alarm Motor Temp Alarm : 30..22 M OT TEM P M EA S W MeasLostTrip W2 Figure 35-1 Optional Motor Thermal Protection .05 M OT T EM P AL M L MotTempAlar m V2 86.20 MotWdgUTempMeas2 This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase U by using analogue input AI2-IOEC4 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer which provides a 0(4).21 M OT TEM P M EA S V MeasLost Trip V2 AI4 . 35.05) 86. Motor Thermal Protection 30. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.06 Motor Temp Meas Lost MeasLost Alarm Alarm enable AI2-IOEC4 < 2mA Motor Temp Meas Lost MeasLost Trip Trip AI2-IOEC4 MeasLost Alarm U2 35.03) 86.09) MotTempPhase W2 SCALING (85.06 enable AI4-IOEC4 < 2mA AI4-IOEC4 MeasLostAlarm W2 35.22) a Soft Stop will only be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated 3 NO No action.IOEC4 (85.21.07) MotTempPhase U2 SCALING (85. if Par.Overview 35.01 EXT MOTOR THERM PROT AI2 .ABB MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION (OPTIONAL) Motor thermal protection with second winding temperature measurements on optional I/O-board IOEC4: temperature measurement of the motor using PT100 or PTC sensors by using analogue inputs (with a separate transducer).18 : Mot TempTrip V2 30.05 M OT T EM P AL M L MotTempAlar m W2 86.10 AI2 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V . Note! If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par. motor temperature measurement is not used Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int.

2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. Note! If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 35. Note! If more than one motor winding measurement is active (Par.. 2 ALARM Motor temperature measurement is used. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used.20. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.16 AI3 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V .. 35. 35. 35.22 MotWdgWTempMeas2 This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase W by using analogue input AI4-IOEC4 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer which provides a 0(4).22) a Soft Stop will only be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost. 86. 86. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. The supervision for measurement loss is only active.21.: 35.. motor temperature measurement is not used Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int.20. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated 3 NO No action.20mA signal for the AI). 35.. if Par.22 AI4 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V. scaling:1 == 1 164/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.21 MotWdgVTempMeas2 This parameter activates the second motor winding temperature measurement of phase V by using analogue input AI3-IOEC4 connected to an external sensor (PT100 or PTC is connected to a transducer which provides a 0(4). if Par.: 35.21.22) a Soft Stop will only be generated when all off the selected AI signals are lost.I Signal and Parameter Table . motor temperature measurement is not used Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling:1 == 1 35. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped – only an alarm signal will be generated 3 NO No action. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Motor temperature measurement is used. The supervision for measurement loss is only active.20mA signal for the AI).

26 AI1 Select IO3 is set = 1 ‘TrafoTmpExt/3’. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 90 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C 36.14) are disabled. With Par. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 1 (35. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (80. Protection is activated by parameter 36. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Trafo temperature protection is used. With ACS 1000: If this function is enabled. 82. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Trafo Temperature Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI2) and ‘Trafo Temperature Trip’ IOEC3-DI3’. Operation in case of trafo temperature to high and measurement loss.ABB Group 36 TRANSFORMER PROT 36 TRANSFORMER PROT Only available with IOEC3-Board (see Parameter 75. scaling:1 == 1 36.10) and the load bearing temperature 1 (35. Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated.04 TrafoTmpTrpLExt/3 [C] Transformer temperature trip level. 3 NO No action.01 TrafoTempExt/3) rises above this limit.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.: 41. NOTE! This parameter will be fixed set to “SOFT STOP” to prevent overheating of the transformer. analogue trafo protection is not used.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI Selection of analogue trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). In case of measurement loss the drive STOP will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. Protection is activated by parameter 36. scaling:1 = 1 °C MSAI5150 ACS1000 165/389 . Trafo temperature supervision is active.03 TrafoTmpAlmLExt/3 [C] Transformer temperature alarm level. scaling:1 == 1 36. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped .only an alarm signal will be generated.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.02 DI2 INVERT IO3 it is possible to select. if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. 2 ALARM Trafo temperature protection is used.07 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN INST) or with ACS 1000i.01 TrafoTmpProtectDI Selection of binary trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). if “Integrated Transformer Fan” option is used (Par. par. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 70 °C Int. Trafo temperature supervision is active. IOEC3-DI2 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated IOEC3-DI3 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped and a fault message will be generated VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF External transformer protection function is disabled 1 ON External transformer protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.01) or ACS 1000i 36. 81.

Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 150 °C Int. Protection is activated by parameter 36. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 190.: 41. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (4. if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active. NOTE! This function is only available if the “Integrated Transformer Fan” option is not used ((Par. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Transformer buchholz protection function is disabled 1 ON Transformer buchholz protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. With parameter 82.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 = 1 °C 36. With parameter 82.07 INTEGRATED TRAFO FAN INST is set to “NO”) and this function is not available with ACS 1000i.09 TrafoTmpTripLev1 [C] Only ACS 1000i: Transformer temperature trip level. scaling:1 = 1 °C 36.08 TrafoTemp2) rises above this limit. This parameter activates the binary inputs ‘Trafo Buchholz Alarm’ (IOEC3- DI4) and ‘Trafo Buchholz Trip’ (IOEC3-DI5).08 TrafoTmpAlarmLev1 [C] Only ACS 1000i: Transformer temperature alarm level. Protection is activated by parameter 36. IOEC3-DI5 = “0” (low signal) : drive will be stopped by and a fault message will be generated.01 DI1 INVERT IO3 it’s possible to select. 2 12 temperature sensor 1 and 2 used. scaling:1 == 1 36. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 2 Int.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 120 °C Int. NOTE! This function is not available with ACS 1000i. 2 and 3 used. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (4. scaling:1 == 1 36.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 36.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI. scaling:1 == 1 36. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Transformer oil level protection function is disabled 1 ON Transformer oil level protection function is active Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: 0 Int.04 DI4 INVERT IO3 it’s possible to select. if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active.05 TrafoBuchholzProt Selection of Trafo Buchholz. 3 123 temperature sensor 1.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI.08 TrafoTemp1) rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated.10 TrafoTmpAlarmLev2 [C] Only ACS 1000i: Transformer temperature alarm level. scaling:1 = 1 °C 10°C 166/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. IOEC3-DI4 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 1 only temperature sensor 1 used.02).07 TrafoTmpSelect Only ACS 1000i: Selection of the transformer temperature sensors that are used for the supervision function (36.07 TrafoTemp1) rises above this limit. Protection is activated by parameter 36. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (4.06 TrafoOilLevProtec Selection of trafo oil level protection. This parameter activates the binary input ‘Trafo Oil Level Alarm’ (IOEC3-DI1).1 + Int. I IOEC3-DI3 = “1“ (high signal) : only an alarm message will be generated.

scaling:1 = 1 °C 10°C 36. scaling:1 == 1 36.only an alarm signal will be generated. 2 ALARM Output trafo temperature protection is used. par. NOTE! If this function is enabled. Protection is activated by parameter 36. Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated.ABB 36.44) are disabled.12 OutpTrafoTmpProt. Protection is activated by parameter 36.11 TrafoTmpTripLev2 [C] Only ACS 1000i: Transformer temperature trip level. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200°C Def: 70 °C Int. (37.11). Trafo temperature supervision is active. 81.04) and the second cooling water pressure (190. analogue output trafo protection is not used. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 200 °C Def: 190. Protection is activated by parameter 36.2 + Int.21 OutputTrafoTemp) rises above this limit. scaling:1 = 1 °C 36. the outside air temp. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 5 ‘OutpTrafoTmp’.12 OutpTrafoTmpProt Selection of analogue trafo temperature protection (oil or winding). the load bearing temp.12 OutpTrafoTmpProt. Operation in case of trafo temperature to high and measurement loss. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped .13 OutpTrafoTmpAlmL [C] Output transformer temperature alarm level.08 TrafoTemp2) rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated.02 TrafoTmpProtectAI. Trafo temperature supervision is active. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature (80. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Output trafo temperature protection is used. 2 (35. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35. 3 NO No action. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 90 °C Int. scaling:1 = 1 °C MSAI5150 ACS1000 167/389 .14 OutpTrafoTmpTrpL [C] Output transformer temperature trip level. Drive is tripped when measured temperature (4.17).

03 InpSw TypeSelect This parameter is used to select the type of the INPUT SWITCH. scaling:1 == 1 37. IOEC4-DI1 . which is installed between the INU output and the motor. NOTE! Parameter has to be set according to installed input switch type. This parameter activates the binary output 'External Water Cooling Unit Start' (IOEC4-DO5) as well as the binary inputs ‘External Water Cooling Alarm’ (IOEC4- DI1) and ‘External Water Cooling Trip’ IOEC4-DI2’. With parameter 87. 3 GND SW Inverter input side switch is a grounding switch. which is installed between the Inverter input and the transformer (or the Main Circuit Breaker in case of DTL configuration). 2 ISOLATOR Inverter input side switch is an isolator. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. ensuring safe motor side maintenance operations.I Signal and Parameter Table . 2 ISOLATOR Inverter output side switch is an isolator. NOTE! Parameter has to be set according to installed output switch type VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT USED Inverter output side switch is not used or not existing. scaling:1 == 1 168/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01 / 75.drive will be stopped by a low signal value and a fault message will be generated VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF External water cooling function is disabled 1 ON External water cooling function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 37. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT USED Inverter input side switch is not used or not existing.02) 37. 3 GND SW Inverter output side switch is a grounding switch.an alarm message will be generated IOEC4-DI2 .01 DI1 INVERT IO4 it is possible to select if the digital input for alarm signal is high or low active.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 37 EXT INV PROTECT 37 EXT INV PROTECT Only available with IOEC 3 / 4 Board (see Parameter 75. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.02 OutpSw TypeSelect This parameter is used to select the type of the OUTPUT SWITCH. The output side switch is used for drive operation prevention purposes.01 ExtWtrCoolingProt Selection of external water cooling operation. ensuring safe supply side maintenance operations. The input side switch is used for drive operation prevention purposes.

IOEC3). Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.ABB 37. scaling:1 == 1 37. Enabling is only possible when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35. 2 (35. NAME VALUE MEANING TWO SIGNALS 1 Both. NAME VALUE MEANING TWO SIGNALS 1 Both. protection. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. close and open feedback signal is available OPEN FDB 2 Only open feedback is available. close and open feedback signal is available OPEN FDB 2 Only open feedback is available. outside air temperature supervision (37. CLOSED FDB 3 Only closed feedback is available. outside air temperature protection is not used. In case of measurement loss the drive will not be stopped . scaling:1 = 1°C 37. CLOSED FDB 3 Only closed feedback is available.05 and 37.06) is active. An alarm will be generated when measured temperature rises above this limit. 3 NO No action. the second cooling water pressure (190. Operation in case of outside air temperature and measurement loss (AI4 . scaling:1 = 1°C 37.11). outside air temperature supervision (37.06 OutAirTmpTripLev [C] Outside air temperature trip level. 2 ALARM Outside air temperature protection is used.07 OutpSw FeedbackSig This parameter is used to select the type and amount of output switch feedback signals NOTE!All feedback signals are meant as high active signals. the load bearing temp.08 InpSw FeedbackSig This parameter is used to select the type and amount of input switch feedback signals NOTE!All feedback signals are meant as high active signals. (36. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 169/389 .04 Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 200 °C Def: 45 °C Int.44) and the output trafo temp. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. Protection is activated by parameter 37. NOTE! If 1 or 2 is selected.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 1 ‘OutsideAirTemp’.12) are disabled.only an alarm signal will be generated.05 OutAirTmpAlmLev [C] Outside air temperature alarm level. Protection is activated by parameter 37. In case of measurement loss the STOP drive will be stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated.04 OutsideAirTmpProt Selection of outside air temperature measurement &amp. scaling:1 == 1 37.04 Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 200 °C Def: 55 °C Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Outside air temperature protection is used.17). Drive is tripped when measured temperature rises above this limit and a fault message will be generated.05 and 37.06) is active. par 81.

The digital output IOEC1-DO3 will be de-energized. the motor heater order on command is controlled from digital output DO5-IOEC1.only an alarm signal will be generated.01 is set to “NO”. scaling:1 == 1 s 38.board is installed). 38. The motor heater trip signal is connected to IOEC1-DI12 (in series with cabinet heater). even if parameter 38. scaling:1 == 1 38.I Signal and Parameter Table . If the ORDER ON command is set and the trip signal has a low value. If the function is activated. function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. 2 ALARM Motor cooler is used. If the function is activated. an alarm message will be generated. Normally the digital output DO5-IOEC1 (NO MOTOR HEATER ON) is energized. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO Motor heater function is not active 1 YES Motor heater is installed. the motor cooler trip signal is connected to IOEC3- DI12.01 MotorHeater This parameter activates the motor heater function. the motor cooler order on command is controlled from output IOEC3-DO1. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered while the ACS1000 is stopped. scaling:1 == 1 38. If motor cooler trip signal is active the drive will not be stopped .02 MotorCooler This parameter activates the motor cooler function. function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. motor cooler is not used. scaling:1 == 1 170/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. no HEATER ALARM signal is active (DI12 – IOEC1) and digital output MOTOR COOLER ORDER ON (IOEC3 – DO1) is not activated.03 MotorCoolerTimeOff [S] Delay time to switch off the motor cooler when drive is stopped. scaling:1 == 1 38. If motor cooler trip signal is active the drive will be STOP stopped with SOFT STOP and a fault signal will be generated. the drive is not in “RUNNING” – state. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO Cabinet heater function is not active 1 YES Cabinet heater is installed. The cabinet heater trip signal is connected to IOEC1-DI12 (in series with motor heater).05 BrkChop Installed This parameter activates the brake chopper function (only available if IOEC4. If the cabinet heater function is selected and the trip signal has a low value.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 38 OPTIONAL FUNC 38 OPTIONAL FUNC Optional function used by the customer. an alarm message will be generated.04 CabinetHeater This parameter activates the cabinet heater function. NAME VALUE MEANING NO 0 YES 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. if parameter 38.01 is set to “YES”. 3 NO No action. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 1200s Def: 300s Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 SOFT Motor cooler is used.

Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 9999 Def: 1 Int.05 BRAKE CHOPPER INSTALLED is set to “YES”. scaling:1 == 1 38. Will be set automatically if internal resistor is selected.ABB 38. scaling: 38.11 BrkChop coeff s0 Thermal time constant of braking resistor without forced cooling. If the parameter is set to: NAME VALUE MEANING SBYP 2-4 MTR 1 SBYP FOR 1 MTR 2 NO 3 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. scaling: 38. scaling:1 == 1 38. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 Max: 9999 Def: 1 Int.08 BrkResi Therm Cap [kJ/K] Value of the external resistor.09 BrkChop coeff s1 Thermal capacity of the brake resistor. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 171/389 .06 BrkResi Overtemp If parameter 38. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLE CHOP 0 ALARM 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Unit: kJ/K Type: R Min: 2 Max: 1000 Def: 10 Int.12 BrkChop TimeConst [s] This parameter activates the braking chopper fan.07 SynBypassFunction This parameter activates the Synchronized Bypass function for starter. scaling: 38.10 BrkResi Resistanc [ohm] Braking chopper resistor trip temperature value. Unit: Ω Type: R Min: 4 Max: 100 Def: 4 Int. NAME VALUE MEANING NO 0 YES 1 Unit: Type: B Min: Max: Def: NO Int. scaling: 38. scaling:1==1 38.13 BrkResi coeff c2 Thermal time constant of braking resistor with forced cooling. Will be set automatically if internal resistor is selected. This will be set automatically if internal resistor is selected. the braking chopper supervision function is active as well. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 100 Int.

14 SafeTrqOffCtrl This parameter activates the safe torque off (STO) function (connected to digital input selected in parameter group 72). is still possible) Þ ACS 1000 state changes also to "NOT READY RUN" Þ CDP312R Panel shows INU Status "Ready ON". ACS 1000 is in "Ready ON" – State : Safe Torque Off active Þ ACS 1000 remain in "READY ON" – state (MCB ON.Link stays charged Þ ACS 1000 state changes to " NOT READY RUN " Þ CDP312R Panel shows INU Status "Not Ready Run" and "SafeTrqOffCtrl" ACS 1000 is in "Ready REF" – State : Safe Torque Off active Þ reaction depending on selection of parameter 38. scaling: 172/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NAME VALUE MEANING NO REACTION 1 STOP RAMP 2 STOP TORQ 3 STOP COAST 4 Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 38.15 SAFE TORQUE OFF STOP MODE NAME VALUE MEANING NOT USED 1 LOW ACTIVE 2 HIGH ACTIVE 3 Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. If Emergency Stop monitoring function is used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE. If Safe Torque Off monitoring function is used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE. "Not Ready Run" and "SafeTrqOffCtrl".16 EmergeStopCtrl This parameter activates the Emergency Stop function (connected to digital input selected in parameter group 72). ACS 1000 is in "Ready RUN" – State : Safe Torque Off active Þ MCB will not open.15 SafeTrqOffStopM This parameter defines the drive reaction when the ACS 1000 is in "Ready REF" – State and the Safe Torque Off function became active. Emergency Stop is a category 1 stop which finally ends by hardwired timer relays in an emergency off (category 0 stop). FUNCTION: Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. charging. DC . FUNCTION: Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. scaling: 38. scaling: 38. The safe torque off signal operates also the INU Output Isolator or INU Grounding Switch if installed and selected.I Signal and Parameter Table . NAME VALUE MEANING NOT USED 1 LOW ACTIVE 2 HIGH ACTIVE 3 Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.

18 GndCurrent1Prot Selection of analogue ground current protection reaction. analogue ground current protection is not used.21 GndCurrent2Prot Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 25 Int. NAME VALUE MEANING NOT USED 1 LOW ACTIVE 2 HIGH ACTIVE 3 Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.21 GndCurrent2Prot.ABB 38. If Arc Fault monitoring function is used this parameter is normally set to LOW ACTIVE. FUNCTION: Parameter Setting: LOW ACTIVE / HIGH ACTIVE. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. Protection is activated by parameter 38. scaling: 38. scaling: 38.17 ArcFaultDetection This parameter activates the Arc Fault Detection function (connected to digital input selected in parameter group 72).18 GndCurrent1Prot Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 25 Int.23 GndCurrent2TrpL [mA] Ground current protection 2.20 GndCurrent1TrpL [mA] Ground current protection 1. scaling: 38.21 GndCurrent2Prot Selection of analogue ground current protection 2 reaction. scaling: 38. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 173/389 .18 GndCurrent1Prot. Protection is activated by parameter 38. Protection is activated by parameter 38. A fault will be generated when measured current rises above this limit. scaling: 38. NAME VALUE MEANING SOFT 1 Ground current supervision 2 is used and if trip level is reached reaction is STOP SOFT STOP ALARM 2 Ground current supervision 2 is used and if alarm level is reached reaction is an ALARM NO 3 No action. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 5000 Int. Unit: mA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 5000 Int. Protection is activated by parameter 38.22 GndCurrent2AlmL [mA] Ground current protection 2. analogue ground current protection 2 is not used. A fault will be generated when measured current rises above this limit. An alarm will be generated when measured current rises above this limit. NAME VALUE MEANING SOFT 1 Ground current supervision 1 is used and if trip level is reached reaction is STOP SOFT STOP ALARM 2 Ground current supervision 1 is used and if alarm level is reached reaction is an ALARM NO 3 No action. scaling: 38. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. An alarm will be generated when measured current rises above this limit.19 GndCurrent1AlmL [mA] Ground current protection 1.

the motor is accelerated to the speed setting that was active before the input power failure. Otherwise the voltage cannot be kept. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 15s Def: 5s Int. and the maximum time allowed for ride-through to be active. After the transition to normal operation. If the input power is not restored before the set time and speed limits are reached. the motor speed drops. The ride-through function of the ACS 1000 is expected to keep the drive in operation and prevent a trip when the main (input) power fails. the mode automatically changes from ride-through to normal operation. the voltage of the DC bus is kept at a specified level. In the process. D 100 C A Undervoltage Trip Level 65% B B Undervoltage Alarm Level 71% A C Ride-Through Level 80% D Overvoltage Trip Level 129% time t1 t2 t3 Figure 39-1 Ride Through. If it is disabled.06 MINIMUM TORQUE) must not be 0. energy from the rotating mass of the motor and load is taken through the inverter to compensate for losses and maintain the DC bus voltage. within the permitted time and speed. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Ride through function is disabled 1 ON Ride through function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. then the drive is tripped.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 39 RIDE THROUGH 39 RIDE THROUGH The ride through function prevents an under voltage fault when short voltage dips in the DC intermediate circuit occur. ATTENTION: If ride through is enabled the negative torque limit (20.Diagram 39.01 RIDETHRU ENA This parameter activates the ride through function. If the input power is restored. The ACS 1000 ride-through function provides adjustable limits for the minimum speed permitted during ride-through. Voltage Levels . [%] DC Bus Voltage The ride-through voltage levels are explained on the basis of Figure 39-1. a trip will follow. scaling:1000 == 1 s 174/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.02 MAX RIDETHRU LEN [s] Time limit to activate ride through function. scaling:1 == 1 39. During ride-through operation. If time elapsed. For this purpose. The ride-through mode can be maintained as long as the rotating mass has sufficient energy that can be extracted to keep the DC bus voltage up. then the drive trips immediately if the input power is lost.I Signal and Parameter Table . It is also possible to disable ride-through operation completely.

05 AuxRideThrghTime [s] Time limit within the aux.09 BattFaultRemTime [h] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the remaining time till an battery fault message will be generated in case of an active battery alarm. ride through function not used 1 ON Aux. the aux. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 Fault A fault message will be generated. scaling: 10=1h MSAI5150 ACS1000 175/389 . ride through function will be activated. scaling:1000 == 1 s 39. Unit: h Type: R Int. Unit: h Type: R Min: 1 Max: 720 Def: 336 Int. ride through function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Only active if parameter 39. scaling:1==1 39.07 BattFaultReact is set to Alarm. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 5 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:1000==1s 39. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 5s Def: 1s Int. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 2 Int. 2 Alarm Only an alarm message will be generated. power has to exceed minimum voltage level after a voltage drop during the drive is offline. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Aux.ABB 39. scaling:1 == 1 39. the drive will trip and a fault message will be generated. scaling:10=1h 39. If the auxiliary voltage does not come back before the AUX RIDE THROUGH TIME has elapsed. If the auxiliary voltage drops below the minimum voltage level.07 BattFaultReact This parameter activates the back-up supply battery supervision (DI4 .06 AuxRideThTimeOffl [s] Time limit within the aux.IOEC1).04 AuxRideThrghEnabl This parameter activates the auxiliary voltage ride through function. power has to exceed minimum voltage level after a voltage drop.08 BattFaultDelayTime [h] This parameter defines the remaining time till a battery fault message will be generated in case of an active battery alarm.

The minimum and maximum values of the PID Controller output are the same as Parameter 20. and automatically adjust the speed of the drive to match the actual signal to the reference. If the Maximum SPEED is set to 1500 rpm for example.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED. a 10% change in error value causes the PID Controller output to change by 10%..I Signal and Parameter Table .Defines the time in which the maximum output is achieved if a constant error value exists and the relative gain is 1. scaling:100 == 1 s 176/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. the actual speed reference is changed by 150 rpm.1 Max: 100 Def: 1 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 40 PID-CONTROL 40 PID-CONTROL Intended for use with different closed loop control systems such as pressure control. scaling:100 == 1 40. The PID Control Macro allows the ACS 1000 to take a reference signal (setpoint) and an actual signal (feedback).02s Max: 320s Def: 10s Int. The setting range is 0.1 .. level control and flow control. Integration time 1s denotes that a 100% change is achieved in 1s. If 1 is selected.This parameter defines the gain of the PID Controller. Process Error Value Gain PID Controller Output Gain PID Integration Time Figure 40-1 PID Controller Gain. Figure 40-1 PID Controller Gain Settings (MAXIMUM SPEED is 1500 rpm) Unit: Type: R Min: 0. 100. NOTE! These parameters can only be seen when the PID Control Macro is selected.02 PID IntegratTime [s] PID Controller integration time selection. I-Time and Error Value – Diagram 40. Unit: S Type: R Min: 0.01 PID Gain PID Controller Gain selection.

a decrease in Actual Signal (feedback) causes an increase in drive speed. addition.03 PID DerivTime [s] PID Controller derivative time selection. multiplication or other function as listed below: • MIN (A1. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO PID Controller error value inversion is not active 1 YES PID Controller error value inversion is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. NAME VALUE MEANING ACT1 1 ACT1 . Analogue input AI1- IOEC4 is fix connected to actual signal 1 (ACT1) and analogue input AI2. If a decrease in actual is desired to cause a decrease in speed. Unit: S Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 1 s Int. scaling:1 == 1 40. Derivative is calculated according to two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula: in which TS = 12ms sample time For example: If there is a 10% step in error value. scaling:100 == 1 s 40.A2) 7 sqrt (A1 .A2) sets the parameter value either ACT1 or ACT2.04 PID DerivFilter [s] Time constant of the 1-pole filter. scaling:100 == 1 s 40. Normally.ACT2 2 ACT1 + ACT2 3 ACT1 * ACT2 4 ACT1 / ACT2 5 MIN (A1.05 ErrorValueInvers PID Controller error value inversion.4 PID DERIV FILTER defines the time constant of the filter Figure Unit: S Type: R Min: 0 s Max: 10 s Def: 0 s Int. Parameter 40. depending which one has the biggest value • sqrt (A1–A2) sets the parameter value to square root of (ACT1 – ACT2) • sqA1 + sqA2 sets the parameter value to square root of ACT1 plus square root of ACT2 Note! Use the sqrt (A1-A2) or sqA1+sqA2 function if the PID-Controller controls flow with a pressure transducer measuring the pressure difference over a flow meter. This parameter allows inverting the Error Value (and thus the operation of the PID Controller). In the list of parameter values choices AI denotes ACT1 and A2 denotes ACT2. depending which one has the smallest value • MAX (A1. set Error Value Invert to YES.A2) 8 sqA1 + sqA2 9 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 9 Def: 1 Int. ACT1 and ACT2 are combined by subtraction. the error in the output of the PID Controller is: The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 177/389 .ABB 40.IOEC4 is fix connected to actual signal 2 (ACT2) for the PID controller.A2) sets the parameter value either ACT1 or ACT2.06 ActualValueSel Actual signal source for the PID Process Controller is selected by this parameter.A2) 6 MAX (A1.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 40. scaling:10 == 1 % 178/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.07 Act 1 Minimum [%] Minimum value for actual value 1. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and maximum settings.I Signal and Parameter Table . Figure Unit: % Type: R Min: -10 Max: 10 Def: 0 Int.

08 Act 1 Maximum [%] Maximum value for actual value 1.08. scaling:1 == 1 40.12. scaling:10 == 1 % 40. Figure Unit: % Type: R Min: -10 Max: 10 Def: 1 Int. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. 1 = rpm actual value 1 will be displayed in rpm 2 =bar actual value 1 will be displayed in bar 3 = % actual value 1 will be displayed in % 4 =C actual value 1 will be displayed in °C 5 =mg/l actual value 1 will be displayed in milligram / litre 6 =kPa actual value 1 will be displayed in kilo Pascal Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 3 Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: -10 Max: 10 Def: 0 Int.07. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. Unit: Type: R Min: -1000 Max: 1000 Def: 1 Int. scaling:10 == 1 % 40. For scaling refer to parameter 40.19) to the Unit defined by Parameter 40.ABB 40. For scaling refer to parameter 40. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and maximum settings. Refer to Parameters group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and maximum settings. Unit: % Type: R Min: -10 Max: 10 Def: 1 Int. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. Refer to parameter group 85 and 86 for IOEC4 analogue input minimum and maximum settings. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 179/389 . scaling:10 == 1 % 40.12 Act1Unit Selection of the Unit of the actual 1 value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.11 Act1UnitScale This parameter matches the actual value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.09 Act 2 Minimum [%] Minimum value for actual value 2.19).10 Act 2 Maximum [%] Maximum value for Actual value 2.

scaling:1 == 1 40.34.04 AI1 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V. scaling:1 == 1 40. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No action 2 FAULT Drive trips in case of analogue signal loss 3 CNST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with constant speed15 SPD15 (Par.15 AI<MinFuncExtAct1 Operations in case of actual value 1 (analogue input signal AI1-IOEC4) drops below the minimum limit.34. The function is only activated if the Parameter 86. Unit: Type: R Min: -1000 Max: 1000 Def: 1 Int.13 Act2UnitScale This parameter matches the actual value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03. scaling:1 == 1 180/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.14. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 rmp actual value 1 will be displayed in rpm 2 bar actual value 1 will be displayed in bar 3 % actual value 1 will be displayed in % 4 C actual value 1 will be displayed in °C 5 mg/l actual value 1 will be displayed in milligram / litter 6 kPa actual value 1 will be displayed in kilo Pascal Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 3 Int.20).16) 4 LAST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with the last speed SPEED reference Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int. The function is only activated if the parameter 86.16) 4 LAST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with the last speed SPEED reference Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.10 AI2 MINIMUM IO4 is set to 4mA/2V. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO No action 2 FAULT Drive trips in case of analogue signal loss 3 CNST Alarm will be set and drive runs continuously with constant speed15 SPD15 (Par.14 Act2Unit Selection of the Unit of the Actual 2 value displayed in the Control Panel (Parameter 03.I Signal and Parameter Table .20) to the Unit defined by Parameter 40.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 40. scaling:1 == 1 40.16 AI<MinFuncExtAct2 Operations in case of actual value 2 (analogue input signal AI2-IOEC4) drops below the minimum limit.

ABB ACTUAL VALUE SCALING 10V (100%) 100% 10V (100%) 100% 100% 100% 8V (75%) 8V (80%) 60% 4V (25%) 4V (40%) 2V (0%) 20% 0V 0% 0V 0% 0% 0% Actual Scaled Actual Actual Scaled Actual Actual Scaled Actual Minimum AI 2V / 4mA Minimum AI 0V / 0mA Actual 1 Maximum 75% Actual 1 Maximum 80% Actual 1 Maximum 20% Actual 1 Minimim 25% Actual 1 Minimim 40% Actual 1 Minimim 60% Figure 40-5 PID Control. Actual Value Scaling MSAI5150 ACS1000 181/389 .

Automatic Change Over Fan/Pump with Redundant Cooling System With “Redundant Cooling System” (two fans or pumps are selected) the continuous operation of the drive is guaranteed if a fan (air) or pump (water) failure occures. Automatic Fan / Pump Change . Switch-over from the faulty to the stand-by device will take place automatically. If for example a cycle time of 10h and a Fan1/Pump1 run time of 6h is selected. With the “Automatic change over” .function the cycle time and running time for both fans/pumps can be set. Then they will be stopped and Fan2/Pump2 will run for 4h. 1st cycle start 1st cycle finished Fan1/Pump 1 2nd cycle start ON OFF t Fan2/Pump 2 ON OFF 6h 4h t 10h 10h 40. With water cooling the supervision of the conductivity is disabled for the time defined by par.I Signal and Parameter Table .01 FAN/PUMP CYCLE TIME Figure 41-1 Redundant Cooling System.15 WtrPmpChangeMask after a change-over. After 4h Fan1/Pump1 are swiched on again. Fan1/Pump1 will run for 6 hours.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 41 COOLING SYSTEM 41 COOLING SYSTEM Cooling system parameter of ACS1000.Diagram 182/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.02 FAN1/PUMP1 RUN TIME 40. 41.

Figure 41 1 Redundant Cooling System. Fan1/Pump1 will run for 6 hours. Automatic Fan / Pump Change .10 DriveStatus). Figure 41-2 Cooling System.function the cycle time and running time for both fans/pumps can be set. With the “Automatic change over” .02 Fan1/Pump1RunTime Parameter defines the switch over time between Fan1 / Pump1 and Fan2 / Pump2.01 – Def: 6 Int.Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 183/389 . After 4h Fan1/Pump1 are swiched on again.15 WtrPmpChangeMask after a change-over.: 8. With water cooling the supervision of the conductivity is disabled for the time defined by par.Diagram This parameter defines the cycle time of the redundant cooling system. the cooling system will not be switched off immediately.01 Fan/PumpCycleTime Automatic Change Over Fan/Pump with Redundant Cooling System With “Redundant Cooling System” (two fans or pumps are selected) the continuous operation of the drive is guaranteed if a fan (air) or pump (water) failure occures. scaling:1 == 1 41. Then they will be stopped and Fan2/Pump2 will run for 4h. Switch-over from the faulty to the stand-by device will take place automatically. Unit: h Type: R Min: 2 Max: 24 Def: 10 Int. Therefore the cooling system is running longer after switching of the MCB for a programmable time. Fan / Pump Off Delay . If for example a cycle time of 10h and a Fan1/Pump1 run time of 6h is selected. scaling:100 == 1h 1h COOLING SYSTEM OFF DELAY For cooling down the power system after switching off the MCB. 41. During this time the status “CoolOffDely” will be shown on Panel status (Par.ABB 41. Unit: h Type: R Min: 1 Max: 41.

Cooling start of "OFF" . IOEC1 . Fan / Pump Off Delay . If function is activated and digital input signal is high. scaling:1 == 1 184/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.04 FanAlarmReset Resetting of an active fan ALARM. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 ONE (FAN 1) Cooling fan 1 is installed 2 ONE (FAN 2) Cooling fan 2 is installed (only with IOEC 3) 3 TWO (FAN12) Redundant cooling fans 1 2 are installed (only with IOEC 3) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 41.05 InvAirFilterSupvi Parameter activates monitoring of air filter in an air cooled drive.03 AirCoolFanSel This parameter activates the selected cooling fan in an air cooled drive.04 PUMP/FAN OFF DELAY default = 300s Figure 41-3 Cooling System. In case one of the fan is disturbed. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Fan alarm reset not active 1 RESET Reset command will be set Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Note! Parameter will be set back automatically to OFF.command System cooling Fan/Pump On Cooling System Cooling System Running Off Delay Time Off t s 41. an ALARM will be generated.I Signal and Parameter Table . If parameter selection is set to TWO (FAN1&2) the redundant cooling fan function is active. the other fan is switched on automatically.DI09 VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Air filter supervision function is disabled 1 ON Air filter supervision function is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB cooling system off comand. scaling:1 == 1 41.delay switch "OFF" .Diagram 41.20/28.

Fan 2 Aux. fan is installed 3 3 -K11 -K12 Pump 1 Pump 2 -Q13 -Q14 Aux. If this parameter is set to “Yes” and one of the two aux. fans. If both aux. The function is only available if IOEC4 – board is installed. Fan 1 Faulty Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 2 Figure 41-4 Redundant Auxiliary Cooling Fan .Fan 2 3 3 -K13 -K14 M M Aux. controls both aux. The selection is only possible in water cooling unit and if Par.Fan 2 Aux. Hardware – controlled relays.Fan 2 3 IOEC1 3 IOEC4 -DI3 -DI9 -K13 -K14 -Q13 -Q14 Aux.06 RedAuxFanInstall This parameter activates the redundant auxiliary fan function.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 2 Normal Operation Aux.Fan 2 Aux.Fan 1 Aux. 0 =NO Redundant aux. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 185/389 .Overview Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. only alarm will be set. fault will be set and drive trips according to “Trip 1b” reaction.Fan 1 Aux. Only trip and alarm signals are monitored by software.ABB 41.09 AMOUNT OF COOLING PUMP is set to “TWO (PUMP1&2)”.Fan 1 Aux. fans trips.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 1 Aux. fan is not installed 1 = YES Redundant aux.Fan 2 -K13 -K14 -K13 -K14 -K13 -K14 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 1 Aux.Fan 1 Aux. fans are tripped. Fan 2 Faulty -K11 -K12 -K11 -K12 -K11 -K12 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 1 Pump 2 -Q13 -Q14 -Q13 -Q14 -Q13 -Q14 Aux.: 41.

02 IntTrafoFanReset Fan2/Pump2OrderOn 41.IOEC3) 41.15 Fan/PumpCycleTime ActRunTimeFan2/Pump2 / IntTrafoFan2Trip Fan2 41.55 > AW2 / Bit 05 Automatic Change Over Function / IntTrafoFan1Trip Fan1 Supervision 8.08 IntTrafFan1Order On DO5 . parameter 36.16 Supervision 8.01 5. To protect the Transformer against overheating. Note! If one or both (in redundant trafo fan control) fan(s) has (have) tripped only an Alarm will be set.05 Trafo Buchholz Protection). function is active 3 ONE (FAN 2) Integrated transformer cooling fan 2 is installed. function is active 4 TWO Integrated transformer cooling fans 12 are installed.IOEC3) Fan1/Pump1RunTime Fan 2/Pump2 Fan1/Pump1OrderOn MSW / Bit 07 41.Signal and Parameter Table ABB INTEGRATED TRANSFORMER FAN The function of Integrated Transformer Fan has to be used if an integrated transformer is installed.01 AirCoolingFanSel (DI4 . The selection is only possible if IOEC3-Board is installed. scaling:1 == 1 186/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.09 9. the Buchholz protection will be deactivated (see group 36.IOEC3 IntTrafFan1 & & > Alarm 5. function is not active 2 ONE (FAN 1) Integrated transformer cooling fan 1 is installed. scaling:1 == 1 41.I Signal and Parameter Table . Depending on the installed fans the parameter has to be set to the correct value.07 > (TWO(FAN1&2) WtrCoolingP umpSel IntTrafFan2 Alarm 41. redundant function is (FAN12) active Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 4 Def: 1 Int.55 (TWO(PUMP1&2) ActRunTimeFan1/Pump1 > AW2 / Bit 06 Fan1/Pump1 5.03 MSW / Bit 07 (TWO(FAN1&2) IntTrafoFanReset 41.07 IntegTrafoFanInst This parameter activates the integrated transformer function. Note! Parameter will be set back automatically to OFF. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Integrated transformer fan is not installed.02 Trafo Temp Protection AI will be fixed set to “SOFTSTOP” and parameter 81.14 IntTrafFan2 Alarm & ActRunTrafoFan IntTrafFan2Order On DO6 .IOEC3 IntTrafFan2 & & > Alarm 5.04 AI1 MINIMUM IO4 to “4 mA”.Overview 41.07 NO ONE (FAN1) 1 ONE (FAN2) TWO (FAN1&2) IntTrafFan1 Alarm 9.08 TrafoFanAlmReset Resetting of an active integrated transformer fan ALARM. There is no trip supervison for integrated transformer fan.08 IntegTrafoFanInst Auto Chg Active 41.01 (DI5 . If function is activated. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Fan alarm reset not active 1 RESET Reset command will be set Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.14 IntTrafFan1 Alarm & ActRunTrafoFan Figure 41 5 Integrated Transformer Fan . not available with ACS 1000i. not available with ACS 1000i. In tegrated Trafo Fan Option IntegTrafoFanInst 41.

Temperature Supervision – Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 187/389 .) against overheating the air cooling temperature inside the cubicle is monitored. diodes. choke etc. Figure 41-6 Air Cooling System. Note: For security reason the auto-cooling is only started with open ground switch (doors closed).ABB INVERTER AIR COOLING TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION To protect the ACS 1000 (IGCTs.

5°C) Time Trip "Inverter Air Temperature". Auto-Cool Level Hysteresis (5°C) (Par. Temperature Supervision .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Cooling Air Temperature °C Air Temperature Trip Level (Par.Diagram 188/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.: 41.: 41. ACS1000 is ready to switch on Auto-cooling on (MCB off.19 = 55°C) Hysteresis (5°C) Air Temperature Alarm Level (Par. power external) Warning -> Inverter Air Temperature to high Trip -> Inverter Air Temperature to high Trip reset possible -> Inverter Air Temperature to high Warning disapear -> Inverter Air Temperature to high Auto-cooling off Figure 41 7 Air Cooling System. aux.18 = 45°C) Air Temp.I Signal and Parameter Table . ACS1000 switch on prevented s Trip "Inverter Air Temperature" reset possible.: 41.18 .2°C = 43°C) Hysteresis (1°C) Air Temperature Low Trip 0 (fixed = -0.

The following figure shows only the difference pressure for ACS 1000 (ACS 1000i not shown).ABB INVERTER AIR COOLING DIFFERENCE PRESSURE SUPERVISION To protect the ACS 1000 (IGCTs. change over fans (Redundant Cooling System) and normal run! B1 ControlBox WR P p < . choke etc. Pressure Supervision – Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 189/389 . diodes.250 Pa Cooling Air Difference Pressure FAN Figure 41-8 Air Cooling System.) against overheating the air-cooling temperature inside the cubicle and the air flow/pressure is monitored. Pressure transducers –B5261 and in case of ACS1000i –B5262 monitor the air pressure (connected to DI3 on IOEC1). In case of the ACS 1000i the air pressure across the inverter (fan group 1/3 ) and the transformer (fan group 2/4 ) is monitored. AIR PRESSURE SUPERVISION Trip Delay Air Difference Pressure Air Press Trip Delay Digital Input DI3 .IOEC1 Note! Default: 5s AIR PRESSURE FAIL Supervision signal during 41.21 ON DELAY fan start. Therefore a pressure differential sensor is installed in the control box to measure the pressure between control box and power part of the inverter.

I Signal and Parameter Table .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Single and Redundant Cooling Fan System: 190/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

IOEC 0 Air differential - Air differential.IOEC Cooling Air Pressure Pa 0 DI3 .ABB Cooling Air Pressure Pa DI3 . pressure sensor pressure sensor "Air diff pressure to low Trip "Air diff pressure to low "Air pressure to low " => Start "Fail On Delay Warning "Air pressure to low " ( MSAI5150 ACS1000 Warning "Air pressure 191/389 to low .

If parameter is selected to TWO (PUMP 1 and 2) the redundant water cooling pump function is active.10 PumpAlarmReset Resetting of an active pump ALARM. scaling:1 == 1 41.I Signal and Parameter Table . the other pump is switched on automatically.Diagram 41. scaling:1 == 1 192/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Note! Parameter will be set back automatically to OFF.09 WtrCoolPumpSel This parameter activates the selected water cooling pump in a water cooled drive. Pressure Supervision . In case one of the pump is disturbed.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Figure 41-9 Air Cooling System. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Pump alarm reset not active 1 RESET Reset command will be set Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 ONE (PUMP 1) Water cooling pump 1 is installed 2 ONE (PUMP 2) Water cooling pump 2 is installed 3 TWO (PUMP 1 and 2) Redundant water cooling pump is installed (Pump 1 2) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.

Therefore the “Auto cooling control” . Auto Cooling Sequence .10 DriveStatus).time (par. 5. After exceeding cooling off delay time pump 1 will stop.: 8. 41. Water conductivity starts to decrease and if conductivity is below alarm limit the auto cooling sequence will stop (drive status “AutoCoolOn” disappears) and the pump off delay time (Par.27 Alarm Level 41.Diagram MSAI5150 ACS1000 193/389 . Water conductivity starts to increase again.20 Pump Off Delay) starts. If water conductivity is above alarm limit the auto cooling sequence starts again but this time with starting of pump 2. To avoid a long waiting time until the MCB can be switched on again. 41.26 WtrAutoCoolStCond 41.17 AutoCoolWaitTime (counting down to zero!).ABB AUTO COOLING CONTROL WITH WATER COOLING SYSTEM The water conductivity increases if water cooling pumps have been switched off for a longer time (after switching off the MCB). Water Cooling On Delay "Start" Conductivity us Cooling Pump 1 "ON" Cooling Pump Off delay "ON" Cooling Pump 1 "OFF" Cooling On Delay "Start" 41.09 Water CoolingPumpSelection is set to “TWO(Pump12) otherwise only selected pump (Pump1 or Pump2) will start.function can be used. it is necessary to bring the water conductivity down into the allowed operating range. After cooling on delay time has been exceeded cooling pump 1 will start automatically. The “Auto cooling start sequence” will not be started if parameter 41.11 41.17 WtrAutoCoolStCond the “Auto Cooling On Delay”. if parameter 41. During this time the status “CoolOffDely” will be shown on panel status (Par.10 DriveStatusWord). It can be enabled with par.11 AutoCoolOnDelay is set to ZERO.: 8. Function! If water conductivity is above the value of par.17 t Pump 1 ON OFF t Pump 2 Auto Cooling Pump 1 On ON OFF t Auto Cooling Pump 2 On Figure 41 10 Water Cooling System. 41.11 AutoCoolOnDelay) is started.16 WtrAutoCoolMode.: 41. The waiting time before the auto cooling sequence will be started can be seen on the panel at Par. On the Panel the drive status “AutoCoolOn” will be shown (Par.20 Cooling Pump 2 "ON" Cooling Pump Off delay "ON" Trip Level Cooling Pump 2 "OFF" 41. Note! The auto cooling system is always alternating between cooling pump 1 and pump 2.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41.11 AutoCoolOnDelay Parameter defines the time delay for the automatic cooling system on command. The cooling pump will be switched on automatically after the AUTO COOL ON DELAY time has elapsed. In the drive status word the message “AUTO COOLING” will be displayed (an alarm will not be generated).I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 3600 Def: 120 Int. scaling:1 == 1min 194/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.If the MCB is open and the actual water conductivity is higher than the ALARM limit the automatic cooling sequence will be started.

To avoid a trip after the automatic switch over function changes to pump 2 (see Figure 41 1). Note! The “Start Sequence” will not be started if water conductivity is below alarm limit after switching on the auxiliary power. Power On Water Start of 15s delay time Cond uctivity Init Done us Pump change over Start of 15s delay time Drive Start allowed Trip Level Alarm Level Pump 1 ON OFF Pump 2 ON OFF Cooling Pump "Start sequence" Figure 41-11 Redundant Water Cooling System.Diagram MSAI5150 ACS1000 195/389 . After pump1 has started it could be that the water conductivity is bad again (from pump1 system.: 8.10 DriveStatusWord). Therefore Pump1 will start immediately. Aux. Start Sequence . pump 2 will be started immediately to bring down the water conductivity. After water conductivity is below alarm limit the 1st delay time of 15s is started and if time is over without reaching the alarm limit again the cooling system will be switched over to pump1. pipe …) and the alarm level will be exceeded. Function! If water conductivity is above alarm limit after initialisation. Therefore it is necessary to bring the water conductivity down into the allowed operating range before the drive can be started again. On the Panel the drive status “StartSeqOn” will be shown (Par. After water conductivity is below alarm limit the 2nd delay time of 15s is started and if time is over without reaching the alarm limit again. it is helpful to check the water conductivity in pump 2 systems as well. the drive status changes to “RdyForMCB On” and the “Start Sequence” is swiched off.ABB START SEQUENCE OF REDUNDANT WATER COOLING SYSTEM The water conductivity increases if drive has been switched off for a longer time.

temperature and pressure of the cooling water in the main cooling circuit and the level in the expansion tank are monitored. Figure Valve and Motor type 196/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41. Water conductivity.¨ Note! If start sequence is active the drive is not ready for closing the MCB.12 WtrCoolStartSeq Selection of redundant cooling system start sequence function. Due to different water valves and valve motors the parameter has to be set to the right value (normally done by loading package). VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF Redundant water cooling system start sequence is not active 1 ON Redundant water cooling system start sequence is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. The motor valve in the raw water circuit is closed or opened depending on the temperature of the main cooling circuit. This function can only be selected if ACS1000 is a water cooled system and parameter 41.I Signal and Parameter Table .09 AMOUNT OF WATER COOLING PUMPS is set to “TWO (PUMP1&2)”. scaling:1 == 1 INVERTER WATER VALVE CONTROL The cooling system is controlled and monitored by the ACS 1000.

The conductivity supervision is released earlier if the actual conductivity value after the pump changeover is below the alarm level (parameter 190.09 InvWtrCondAlmLev). Note! This parameter can only be changed by service.ABB Figure 41-12 Water Cooling System. Control Valve .Overview 41. Note! This parameter can only be changed by service. scaling:1 == 1 mm 41.14 WtrValvePulseWidth [s/C] Parameter defines the “Motor lift” . Unit: mm Type: R Min: 1 Max: 50 Def: 10 Int. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 625 Def: 60 Int. Unit: s/mm Type: R Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 3 Int.15 WtrPmpChangeMask [s] Water cooling system. Masking (supervision disabling) time for the internal cooling water conductivity supervision after the pump change-over.value of the installed water valve motor (see Table 41-1). scaling:1 == 1s MSAI5150 ACS1000 197/389 .value of the installed water valve (see ).13 WtrValvePulseIntv [s*C] Parameter defines the “Lifting height” . scaling:1 == 1 s/mm 41.

16 WtrAutoCoolMode Water cooling system.03 PumpOffDelay).Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41. 3 AUTOM Auto cooling control is active (see Figure 41 10). VALUE NAME MEANING 1 RUN Water cooling pumps are running unless there is a pump related fault. Selection of pump auto cooling mode. OFF ON Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 198/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. The off delay time starts as soon the MCB is open.I Signal and Parameter Table . ALWAYS 2 AUTOM Pumps will be stopped after the off delay time is over (defined by OFF parameter 190.

17 WtrAutoCoolStCond [uS] Water cooling system. Parameter defines the water conductivity value when the automatic cooling sequence will be started (see Figure 41 10). MSAI5150 ACS1000 199/389 .ABB 41.

4 Int.5 s WTR PRESSURE normal run! FAIL ON FIX DELAY 0 Water Inp.20 0. 13. Press.23 WATER PRESSURE 2 Default: 0mA AI4 Offset IO3 SUPERVISI ON 81.34 80.22 AI4 Minimum IO3 41. Water Inp. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed AI I I < = L2 Limit L2 . Water Outp.36 TRIP LEVEL HIGH FAIL ON FIX DELAY 3mA L1 Ana logue Input WATER PRESS DIFF AI3 . Press.6.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 13. system I > = H1 Water Pressure 2 Limit H1 0.IOEC3 < 3mA) 3mA L1 Default: Ana logue Input 0.20 WATER PRESS DIFF WATER PRESSURE 1 SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION Trip Lo w Trip Delay Var + Water Diff. Note! 0.22 WTR PRESSURE 41. Water Press. system Alarm High 0. AI I High Alarm I > = H1 B11 B13 B12 Limit H1 P T Q 0.IOEC3 WATER PRESSURE 2 WATER PRESSURE 2 SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION Trip Lo w Trip Low Delay Fix Water Inp. 1 MeasLost Default: AI I 6 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE 2s I < = L1 (AI3 .IOEC1 < 3mA) 41. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed AI I I < = L2 Limit L2 0.36 AI3 LowValue IO1 41.38 ALARM LEVE L LOW 80.6.35 ALARM LEVE L HIGH Default: 4mA 13.35 AI3 HighValue IO1 Default: Default: 0bar 5.0bar) 2.25 Alarm L ow WATER PRESSURE Water Inp.43 1s TRIP LEVEL LOW FAIL ON FIX DELAY Figure Inverter Water Cooling Pressure Supervision Unit: us Type: R Min: -5 Max: 5 Def: 0.05bar HHyst Water Press.39 TRIP LEVEL LOW FAIL ON DELAY Cooling System) WATER PRESSURE 1 SUPERVISION Trip Delay Fix Water Diff. Water Diff.IOEC1 SUPERVISI ON Alarm High Water Diff.40 ALARM LEVE L HIGH WATER PRESSURE SCALING WATER PRESSURE 2 WATER PRESSURE 2 SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION Trip High Trip High Delay Fix Water Inp. Press. Press. High Alarm AI I closed cool. Press.1s SUPERVISI ON SUPERVISION 13. High Trip High Trip Delayed AI I I > = H2 Default: 6bar AI4 HighValue IO3 Limit H2 81.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.39 AI3 Offset IO1 High Trip High Trip Delayed AI I WATER PRESSURE I > = H2 SUPERVISI ON Limit H2 Measuremen t Lost 0. Water Inp. Press. Press. 2 MeasLost 0..I Signal and Parameter Table .05bar HHyst Default: 0bar AI4 LowValue IO3 81.. Press.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 4. Press.41 5s FAIL ON FIX DELAY TRIP LEVEL HIGH Default: 0. Press.03 WATER PRESSURE 1 WATER PRESSURE SUPERVISI ON SCALING Alarm High Water Outp..0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE 81. scaling:100 == 1uS 200/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.05bar LHyst AI I I < = L1 (AI4 .2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.05bar HHyst Default: 6bar 13. Low Trip Delayed following supervisions only active with closed cooling system: Note! 41..05bar HHyst Water Pressure Input (4.42 ALARM LEVE L LOW AI4 . Diff. Press.5 s over pumps (Redundant 1.0bar) Limit H1 0.38 AI3 Filter IO1 Trip High Trip High Delay Fix Default: 0mA Water Outp.20 mA = AI I I > = H1 0..05bar L2 Hyst Supervision signal during Default: pump start and change Default: 2.05bar L1 Hyst Default: 2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.. SUPERVISI ON Low Alarm Measuremen t Lost AI I I < = L1 Limit L1 Water Press.19 WATER PRESSURE 2 Supervision signal during SUPERVISI ON open cool.37 AI3 Minimum IO1 WATER PRESSURE 1 WATER PRESSURE 1 Default: 0..5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.21 Default: Default: 4mA 3. Press. Press. AI I Low Alarm I < = L1 Limit L1 0..20 mA = Default: 0.1s AI4 Filter IO3 81.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.1 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE 41.05bar LHyst Default: 0. Water Pressure 1 High Alarm (4.05bar H1 Hyst I I I V5 Default: TO CO NV ERTER 4.37 ALARM LEVE L HIGH PART OF WATER CO OLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM WATER PRESS DIFF (see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISI ON Alarm L ow Water Diff. Press.

29) rises above this limit an alarm signal will be generated. and the drive will be stopped (analogue input AI4 - IOEC1).24 InvWtrTmpTripLev [C] Inverter water temperature trip level. scaling:1== 1°C 41. scaling:1000==1s 41. an alarm/fault signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped. scaling:1000== 1s 41.IOEC1). the delay time will be started. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 2°C Max: 60°C Def: 15°C Int. When measured water temperature rises above this limit a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped (AI2 . If the pressure didn’t come back during this time. (AI2 – IOEC1) Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 °C Max: 59 °C Def: 39 °C Int.29) rises above this limit a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped. scaling:1 = 1uS 41. scaling:1==1°C °C 41. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 20s Def: 5s Int.5s Int. If the pressure drops below the minimum limit. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 60°C Def: 41°C Int.27 InvWtrCondTripLev [uS] Inverter water conductivity indication. If the pressure drops under the minimum limit. scaling:1 = 1°C 41.5uS Int.9uS Def: 0.. scaling:1 = 1°C 41. When the measured water temperature drops below this limit the pump will be switched on automatically to increase the water temperature before the drive is started. Unit: uS Type: R Min: 0uS Max: 1. When measured water conductivity rises above this limit. When the measured air temperature (ADCVI or IOEC1-AI2.Note: The default value depends on the inverter type. a trip signal will be activated after a delay of 30 min.IOEC1). an alarm/fault signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 900s Def: 300s Int. scaling:1 = 1uS MSAI5150 ACS1000 201/389 . selected with 41.. Unit: uS Type: R Min: 0uS Max: 1. scaling:1000== 1s 41. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 72°C Def: 55.23 InvWtrTmpAlmLevel [C] Inverter water temperature alarm level.21 AirPresFailOnDela [s] Delay time for air pressure fail use. an alarm signal will be activated (analogue input AI4 .26 InvWtrCondAlmLev [uS] Inverter water conductivity indication. the delay time will be started.71 °C Int.20 Pump/Fan OffDelay [s] Delay time to switch off the pump when the MCB is open.22 WtrPresFailOnDela [s] Delay time for water pressure fail. When measured water temperature value rises above this limit an alarm signal will be generated. When measured water conductivity rises above this limit.ABB 41.18 InvAirTmpAlmLevel [C] Inverter air temperature alarm level. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0s Max: 4s Def: 2. If the pressure does not come back during this time.25 InvWtrTmpPumpOn [C] Inverter water temperature pump on level. When the measured air temperature (ADCVI or IOEC1-AI2. selected with 41.7uS Int.8uS Def: 0. scaling:1 = °C 41.Note: The default value depends on the inverter type.19 InvAirTmpTripLev [C] Inverter air temperature trip level. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0°C Max: 69 °C Def: 45…66 Int.

28 RefWtrTemperature [C] Inverter water temperature reference value.1 °C) 41.5°C Int. This system needs the second water pressure measurement (input pressure) on IOEC3. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10°C Def: 0.34 WtrCoolSysClosed Selection of the closed water cooling system. 11: max.The pump will be switched on as soon as the temp. When the measured water temperature rises above this limit the pump will be switched off automatically. Default value depends on type code pos. 2 (35. because the cooling water is freezing. NOTE! If Yes is selected.11).31 InvWtrTmpPmpOffHi [C] Inverter water temperature pump off high level. is 1 °C above the limit. the outside air temp. (36.04) and the output trafo temp.25 . 41. The external cooling water motor valve control is based on this internal cooling water temperature measurement. scaling:1==1 41.1 °C Max: min (10 Def: 2°C Int.29 InvAirTempSelect This parameter selects the input signal for the inverter air temperature supervision. AI4. scaling:1==1 202/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.12) are disabled.30 InvWtrTmpPmpOffLo [C] Inverter water temperature pump off low level. scaling:1==1 41.33 WtrCoolSysLeakage Liquid leakage sensor selection.When the reference value was reached once after starting and then drops more than 5 °C an alarm is generated.24 + 4°C Max: 99 °C Def: 60°C Int.17).32 InvWtrTmpDeadBand [C] Reserved for future use!This parameter defines the dead band value for the measured internal cooling water temperature. Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 5°C Max: 50°C Def: 30°C Int. raw water temperature + 2 °C.Only air cooled type! NAME VALUE MEANING InvAirTmp1 1 InvAirTmp2 2 InvAirTmp12 3 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO Open water cooling system 1 YES Closed water cooling system Unit: . Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 =1°C 41. scaling:10==1°C 41. used for the internal cooling water temperature control. the load bearing temp.27 AI4 Select IO3 is set = 4 ‘CoolWtrPres2’. NAME VALUE MEANING NO 0 YES 1 Unit: .Enabling is only possible for water cooled types when the supervision functions of the vibration sensor 2 (35. is 10 °C below the limit. par 81.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:10 = 1°C °C.The pump will be switched on as soon as the temp.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0. (37. When the measured water temperature drops below this limit the pump will be switched off automatically. Unit: °C Type: R Min: 41. scaling:10 = 1°C 41.

an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.1 Max: 5. high trip limit.36 WtrPres1TripLevHi [b] Inverter water pressure 1 in the cooling system (analogue input AI3 .9 Def: 5.34 = YES). If the water pressure difference sinks below this limit after the delay WtrPresFailOnDel (par.IOEC3).5 Int.40 WtrPres2AlmLevHi [b] Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 .1 Max: 5.8 Int. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. If the water pressure difference sinks below this limit an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop. after a delay of 2s a trip signal is activated and the drive will stop.ABB 41.34 is set to NO the input pressure is zero (diff. scaling:100==1bar 41.0 Int. and after resetting the alarm the faulty pump will be selected again.IOEC1).22) a trip signal is activated and the drive will stop. If the water pressure difference rises above this limit an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.When the pressure rises above this limit.39 WtrPresDifTripLo [b] Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) low trip level.37 WtrPresDifAlmHi [b] Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) high alarm level.1 Max: 5. pressure = output pressure).When the pressure rises above this limit. the pump will be changed.5 Int. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. scaling:100==1bar 41.If parameter 41.IOEC1). scaling:100==1bar 41.1 Max: 5. When the pressure rises above this limit. scaling:100==1bar 41.5 Int.9 Def: 2. Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41. an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop. high alarm limit.38 WtrPresDifAlmLo [b] Inverter water difference pressure (pressure 1 – pressure 2) low alarm level. In addition an alarm will be generated. scaling:100==1bar MSAI5150 ACS1000 203/389 .9 Def: 1. 41.1 Max: 5. high alarm limit. high trip limit.9 Def: 4. When the pressure rises above this limit. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. Note!If parameter 41.34 = YES). Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0.IOEC3).5 Int. Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41.1 Max: 5.1 Max: 5.41 WtrPres2TripLevHi [b] Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 . Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0.9 Def: 5. after a delay of 5s a trip signal is activated and the drive will stop. Note! If water pressure sinks below this limit with redundant cooling pumps.34 = YES).35 WtrPres1AlmLevHi [b] Inverter water pressure 1 in the cooling system (analogue input AI3 . Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41. pressure = output pressure). scaling:100==1bar 41.9 Def: 2 Int.9 Def: 2. scaling:100==1bar 41.34 is set to NO the input pressure is zero (diff. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0.

When the pressure sinks below this limit.IOEC3).9 Def: 0. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. Unit: bar Type: R Min: 0. Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41. an alarm signal is generated and the drive will not stop.1 Int.43 WtrPres2TripLevLo [b] Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 .9 Def: 0. scaling:100==1bar 204/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. When the pressure sinks below this limit.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41.1 Max: 5.42 WtrPres2AlmLevLo [b] Inverter water pressure 2 (input pressure) in the cooling system (analogue input AI4 .2 Int. low alarm limit. scaling:100==1bar 41.IOEC3). after a delay of 1s a trip signal is activated and the drive will stop. low trip limit.34 = YES).34 = YES).1 Max: 5.I Signal and Parameter Table . Note!This parameter is only active with closed cooling system (parameter 41.

MSAI5150 ACS1000 205/389 .ABB INVERTER WATER COOLING PRESSURE SUPERVISION To protect the ACS1000 against water flow inside the cubicle (leakage) and overheating of power components (IGCTs. diodes. choke etc.) the water pressure is monitored.

Water Outp.5 s 1.36 AI3 LowValue IO1 41.1 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE 41.21 Default: Default: 4mA 3.38 ALARM L EVE L LOW 80.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE 81.39 AI3 Offset IO1 High Trip High Trip Delayed AI I WATE R PRESSURE I > = H2 SUPERVISION Limit H2 Measurement Lost HHyst 0.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 4..42 ALARM L EVE L LOW AI4 .6.0 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.20 WATER PRESSURE DIFF WATE R PRESSURE 1 SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISI ON Trip Lo w Trip Delay Var + Water Diff.20 mA = Default: 0.IOEC3 WATER PRESSURE 2 WATE R PRESSURE 2 SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON Trip Low Trip Low Delay Fix Water Inp. Press.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed AI I I < = L2 Limit L2 . Water Inp. 2 MeasLost 0.05bar L2 Hyst Supervision signal during D efault: pump start and change Default: 2. Water Pressure 1 High Alarm (4.22 WTR PRESSURE over pumps (Redundant 41.37 AI3 Minimum IO1 WATER PRESSURE 1 WATE R PRESSURE 1 Default: 0.1s SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON 13. Press.. Low Trip Low Trip Delayed AI I I < = L2 Limit L2 0. Water Press.IOEC3 < 3mA) 3mA L1 Default: Ana log ue Input 0. Water Inp. system I > = H1 Water Pressure 2 Limit H1 0..05bar LHyst AI I I < = L1 (AI4 . SUPERVISION Low Alarm Measurement Lost AI I I < = L1 Limit L1 Water Press. Press.20 0.37 ALARM L EVE L HIG H PART OF WATE R COOLING SY STEM FLOW DIAGRAM WATER PRESSURE DIFF (see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISION Alarm Low Water Diff. Press.IOEC1 SUPERVISION Ala rm High Water Diff.I Signal and Parameter Table .40 ALARM L EVE L HIG H WATE R PRESSURE SCALING WATER PRESSURE 2 WATE R PRESSURE 2 SUPERVISION SUPE RVISI ON Trip High Trip High Delay Fix Water Inp. Press. Press. Pressure Supervision – Overview 206/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.36 2s T RIP LEVEL HIGH FAIL O N F IX DELAY 3mA L1 Ana log ue Input WATER PRESSURE DIFF AI3 .5 s WTR PRESSURE normal run! FAIL O N F IX DELAY 0 Water Inp..5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 13. Press.05bar H1 Hyst I I I V5 Default: TO CONV ERTER 4. AI I High Alarm I > = H1 B11 B13 B12 Limit H1 P T Q 0. Water Diff.39 T RIP LEVEL LOW FAIL O N DELAY Cooling System) WATE R PRESSURE 1 SUPE RVISI ON Trip Delay Fix Water Diff.5 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.05bar HHyst Default: 0bar AI4 LowValue IO3 81. Press. Press.IOEC1 < 3mA) 41.41 5s FAIL O N F IX DELAY T RIP LEVEL HIGH Default: 0. Press. High Trip High Trip Delayed AI I I > = H2 Default: 6bar AI4 HighValue IO3 Limit H2 81. 1 MeasLost Default: AI I 6 b ar INV WTR PRESS URE WTR PRESSURE I < = L1 (AI3 . system Ala rm High 0.0b ar) Limit H1 0.6. High Alarm AI I closed cool. Press.20 mA = AI I I > = H1 0.05bar L1 Hyst Default: 2 b ar INV WTR PRESS URE 41. AI I Low Alarm I < = L1 Limit L1 0. 13..34 80.05bar LHyst Default: 0.0b ar) 2.05bar HHyst Water Pressure Input (4. Note! 0.03 WATER PRESSURE 1 WATE R PRESSURE SUPERVISION SCALING Ala rm High Water Outp.05bar HHyst Default: 6bar 13.1s AI4 Filter IO3 81.43 1s T RIP LEVEL LOW FAIL O N F IX DELAY Figure 41-13 Water Cooling System. Press..19 WATER PRESSURE 2 Supervision signal during SUPERVISION open cool. Diff.35 ALARM L EVE L HIG H Default: 4mA 13. Press. Low Trip Delayed following supervisions only active with closed cooling system: Note! 41.35 AI3 HighValue IO1 Default: Default: 0bar 5.05bar Water Press.38 AI3 Filter IO1 Trip High Trip High Delay Fix Default: 0mA Water Outp.25 Alarm Low WATE R PRESSURE Water Inp..23 WATER PRESSURE 2 Default: 0mA AI4 Offset IO3 SUPERVISION 81. Press.22 AI4 Minimum IO3 41..2 bar INV WTR PRESS URE 41.

05bar) Output Pressure Alarm High Level (Par.05bar) (Par. Output / Diff.0 bar) Difference Pressure Trip Low Level Hysteresis (0. Ouput / Difference Pressure Supervision .05bar) Difference Pressure Alarm High Level (Par.36 = 6.Diagram MSAI5150 ACS1000 207/389 .: 41.0 bar) Hysteresis (0.38 = 2.: 41.: 41.39 = 1.: 41.05bar) (Par.35 = 5.5 bar) Time s Warning -> Difference pressure too low Warning disappears -> Difference pressure too high Trip -> Difference pressure too low (0.ABB Cooling Water Pressure.05bar) Difference Pressure Alarm Low Level Hysteresis (0. bar Output Pressure Trip High Level (Par.5 bar) Hysteresis (0.5s / 190.37 = 4.5 bar) Hysteresis (0.05 delayed) Warning disappears -> Output pressure too high Trip reset possible -> Difference pressure too low Trip reset possible -> Output pressure too high Warning disappears -> Difference pressure too low Trip -> Output pressure too high (2s delayed) Warning -> Output pressure too high Warning -> Difference pressure too high Figure 41-14 Water Cooling System.: 41.

05bar) Input Pressure Alarm High Level (Par.0 bar) Hysteresis (0.05bar) (Par.Diagram 208/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.1bar) Time s Warning -> Input pressure too low Warning disappears -> Input pressure too high Trip -> Input pressure too low (1s delayed ) Trip reset possible -> Input pressure too high Trip reset possible -> Input pressure too low Trip -> Input pressure too high (5s delayed ) Warning disappears -> Input pressure too low Warning -> Input pressure too high Figure 41-15 Water Cooling System.: 41. Input Only Closed Cooling System bar Input Pressure Trip High Level (Par. Input Pressure Supervision .43 = 0.2bar) Input Pressure Trip Low Level Hysteresis (0.: 41.41 = 3.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Cooling Water Pressure.I Signal and Parameter Table .05bar) (Par.40 = 2.42 = 0.: 41.0 bar) Hysteresis (0.05bar) Input Pressure Alarm Low Level Hysteresis (0.: 41.

Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 209/389 . Cooling Default: 0mA 13.30 AI2 HighValue I O1 Default: 0°C Default: 39°C 13.) against overheating the water temperature is monitored. WATER TEMPERATURE WATER TE MPERATURE SUPERVISION SCALING Alarm ACT Water Temperature AI I Water Temperature Alarm (4.25 PUMP ON WATER TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION Low Trip AI I Water Temperature Low Trip I < = L2 Limit L2 (Pump Off) 1°C L2 Hyst Default: 2°C INV WTR TEMP 41.. AUTOCOO L LEVEL Ana logue Input AI2 .Cooling P ump On) 1°C L1 Hyst Default: 15°C INV WTR TEMP 41.31 PUMP OFF Figure 41-16 Water Cooling System..30 PUMP OFF WATER TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION High Trip AI I Water Temperature High Trip I > = H1 Limit H1 (Pump Off) 10°C H1 Hyst Default: 60°C INV WTR TEMP 41.24 INV WTR TEMP PART OF TRIP LEVEL WATER COOLING SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM WATER TEMPERATURE (see Figure 41-7) SUPERVISION Low Trip AI I Water Temperature Low Trip I < = L1 Limit L1 (Aut o.ABB INVERTER WATER COOLING TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION To protect the power components of ACS1000 (IGCTs.5s SUPERVISION 13.. diodes.IOEC1 WATER TEMPERATURE SUPERVISION Trip AI I Water Temperature High Trip I > = H3 B11 B13 B12 Limit H3 P T Q 1°C H3 Hyst I I I V5 TO CO NVERTER Default: 41°C 41.02 1°C H2 Hyst 13.31 AI2 LowValue IO1 41.33 AI2 Filter IO1 Auto.IOEC1 < 3mA) 2°C ..100°C) I > = H2 Limit H2 Default: 100°C 4.20 mA = 0.23 INV WTR TEMP ALARM LEVEL Default: 4mA 13. Cooling Pump On I > = H1 SUPERVISI ON Limit H1 Measurement Lost 1 °C H1 Hyst AI I Water Temp MeasLost INV WTR TEMP 3mA L1 I < = L1 (AI2 . Temperature Supervision .32 AI2 Minimum IO1 WATER TEMPERATURE Default: 0. choke etc.34 AI2 Offset I O1 WATER TE MPERATURE AI I Auto.

Temperature Supervision .: 41.31 = 60°C) Hysteresis (10°C) Temperature Trip Level (Par.23 = 39°C) Hysteresis (1°C) Hysteresis (1°C) Temperature Pump On Level (Par.: 41.24 = 41°C) Hysteresis (1°C) Temperature Alarm Level (Par. (Par.: 41.25 = 15°C) Hysteresis (1°C) Temperature Pump Off Low Lev.30 = 2°C) Time Trip.Diagram 210/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .: 41. Pump OFF (depends on autocooling setting) Warning -> Water temperature too high Trip -> Water temperature too high Pump OFF Pump ON Trip reset possible -> Water temperature too high Warning disappears -> Water temperature too high Figure 41-17 Water Cooling System. Pump ON -> Water temperature too low s Pump OFF Pump ON Trip reset possible -> Water temperature too low.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Cooling Water Temperature Internal °C Temperature Pump Off High Lev.: 41. (Par.

That is to avoid erroneous alarm or trip messages when the cooling pump starts to run.17 AUTO COOL LE VEL DELAY Default: 4mA 13.. diodes.44 AI4 Offs et IO1 SUPE RVISI ON Alarm WATER CONDUCTIVITY SUPERVISI ON Water Conductivity Alarm Measurement Lost AI I I > = H1 Limit H1 Water Cond MeasLost 0. Conductivity Supervision .26 ALARM LEVE L AI4 .40 AI4 HighValue IO1 Default: 0.2.08 13.5us INV WTR COND Ana logue Input 41.1us H1 Hyst PART OF Default: W ATE R CO OLING SY STEM 0..42 AI4 Minimum IO1 Default: 2h Default: 30s 41.1us H1 Hyst AI I (AI4-IOEC1 < 3mA) I < = L1 3mA L1 Default: 0.27 30 min (see Figure 41 -7) LEVEL FIX DELAY Figure 41-18 Water Cooling System.43 AI4 Filter IO1 Default: 0mA WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY 13... Function not included in the picture: During 5 minutes after switching the MCB on the inverter conductivity alarm and trip thresholds are set to 1.41 AI4 Low Value IO1 41.) against flash over the water cunductivity inside the water cooling system is monitored.20 mA = 0.05us Default: 0. WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY WATER CONDUCTIVITY SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISION SCALING Auto Cooling On Auto Cooling On Auto.Overview MSAI5150 ACS1000 211/389 .7us FLOW DIAGRAM INV WTR COND TRIP INV WTR COND TRIP 41.4us INV WTR COND AUTO COOLING ON 13.04 0.05. choke etc.0us) I >= H1 Limit H1 4.5 mS. Cooling ACT Water Conductivity On AI I (4.IOEC1 WATER CO NDUCTIVITY WATE R CO NDUCTIVITY SUPE RVISI ON SUPE RVISI ON Trip Trip Delay Water Water Conductivity Conductivity B11 B13 B12 Trip Delayed AI I Trip P T Q I I I I > = H1 Limit H1 V5 TO CO NV ERTER 0.1us H1 Hyst Default: 2us 13.ABB INVERTER WATER COOLING CONDUCTIVITY SUPERVISION To protect the ACS1000 power components (IGCTs.

16 s Warning -> Water conductivity to high Trip -> Water conductivity to high (30min delayed) Trip reset possible -> Water conductivity to high Warning disapears -> Water conductivity to high Figure 41-19 Water Cooling System.7uS) Hysteresis (0.27 = 0.17 = 0. Conductivity Supervision .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Cooling Water Conductivity uS Conductivity Trip Level (Par. 41.5uS) Hysteresis (0.: 41.: 41.1us) WtrAutoCoolStCond (Par.: 41.I Signal and Parameter Table .1us) Conductivity Alarm Level (Par.26 = 0.Diagram 212/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.4uS) Time Start Autocooling when MCB open and enabled with par.

ABB WATER COOLING STATE MACHINE MSAI5150 ACS1000 213/389 .

Signal and Parameter Table ABB MCB On Drive Alarm MCB Off MCB Control Reset MCB Open Drive Trip Feedback 1b Closed Autoc ooling On Delay Delay Reset Pum p Off Bypass Auto Cooling Delay Pump On Water Cooling Redundant System Single Pu mp2 Pu mp Selection Pump1 Pump1 Pump2 Yes Tripped Yes Tripped NO NO Pump1 Pump2 Start Star t Pump Running Trip Water Pressu re OK Delay Time Delay Time Pump Start Pu mp Run Trip Trip Trip Water Alarm T empera ture LOW Trip Water Alarm T empera ture HIGH OK Trip Water Alarm Conductivity OK Reset Drive Ready to Start Figure 41-20 Single Water Cooling System .State Machine 214/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .

State Machine MSAI5150 ACS1000 215/389 .ABB WATER COOLING STATE MACHINE Water Coolin g System Single Redundant Cooling Off Seq Start On On Pu mp Auto Ch an ge Off High Pump Co unter Reset Con ductivity Interval Time OK Co oling Pump1 Off Pump2 Off Seq Finished Run Time Run Time On On Reset Reset Alarm Trip Alarm Trip Pump1 Pump2 On Command On Command Yes Yes 1st Alar m 1st Alar m Pump1 2nd Pump2 2nd Pum p1 Yes Pump2 Yes Tripped Trip Tripped Trip Tripped Tripped No No Tripped 1st Alarm nd 2 Trip 1st Alar m Tripped 2nd Trip 1st Alarm 1st Alar m Pump1 Pump2 Pressure 2nd Pressure 2nd Start Start Pump1 Trip Pump2 Trip Pump Pump1 Pump2 Runni ng Runni ng Runni ng Figure 41-21 Redundant Water Cooling System .

NAME VALUE MEANING NOT USED 1 Level sensor is not installed.IOEC1). which is connected to DI10 on IOEC4. scaling:1=1°C 41. scaling:1 == 1 216/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.44 InvWtrTmpTripLevLo [C] Inverter water temperature trip level (low). Unit: °C Type: R Min: 0 Max: 60 Def: 10 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 41.45 InvWtrLevLowProt Inverter water low level detection selection. When measured water temperaturer falls below this trip limit a trip signal will be generated and the drive will be stopped (AI2 . Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. ALARM HA 2 Level sensor is installed and the alarm apears with a high active signal. ALARM LA 3 Level sensor is installed and the alarm apears with a hlow active signal.I Signal and Parameter Table .

02 LoadProtDelayTime [s] If the actual rms motor current is above overload or below underload current limits this delay timer will be activated. motor load protection is not used.Diagram 42. If the actual motor frequency is above the start frequency (Par.07 LoadProtStartFrequency) the calculation of ideal motor current and monitoring function will be started.underload protection parameter of ACS1000. scaling:1 == 1 42. scaling:1 == 1s MSAI5150 ACS1000 217/389 . Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 60 Def: 30 Int. This function prevents running the motor within unpermitted operating ranges for a longer period. Figure 42-1 Motor Over– / Underload Protection .: 42. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF No action. 1 ON Motor load protection is active.ABB Group 42 LOAD PROTECTION 42 LOAD PROTECTION Motor over.01 LoadProtFunction This parameter activates the motor load protection function.

09 Max: 100Hz Def: 15 Hz Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 120 Int.1). Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par. scaling:10 == 1% 42. see figure 42. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 110 Int.14 FrequencyLevel_P7 [Hz] Frequency of load point 5.54 AW4 – Bit13).02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. see figure 42.42. If the motor current does not drop under the trip current within the delay time a fault will be occur (9. scaling:10 == 1% 42.12 Max: 100Hz Def: 30Hz Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 70 Int. If the motor current does not fall below the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (9.12 FrequencyLevel_P5 [Hz] Frequency of load point 5. If the actual rms motor current is within the alarm and trip range (below alarm and above trip current) the programmable delay timer (Par.20 FW4 – Bit1) and the drive will be stopped according to SOFTSTOP sequence. see figure 42.: 42.10 Max: 100Hz Def: 20Hz Int.06 OverLoadTripLim [%] This parameter defines the over load trip limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current. scaling:10 == 1% 42.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. scaling:10 == 1Hz 42.1). Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.: 42.13 FrequencyLevel_P6 [Hz] Frequency of load point 6.: 42. If the motor current exceeds the alarm current limit an alarm will disappear.04 UnderLoadTripLim [%] This parameter defines the under load trip limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current. If the actual rms motor current exceeds the trip range. scaling:10 == 1Hz 42. If the motor current is below alarm current limit the alarm will disappear.20 FW4 – Bit0) and the drive will be stopped according to SOFTSTOP sequence.: 42. see figure 42. If the actual rms motor current remains under the trip range.I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.11 Max: 100Hz Def: 25Hz Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 42. If the motor current does not exceed the trip current within the delay time a fault will be occur (9.1). If the motor current does not exceeds the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (9. scaling:10 == 1Hz 218/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. the programmable delay timer (Par.10 FrequencyLevel_P3 [Hz] Frequency of load point 3.05 OverLoadAlarmLim [%] This parameter defines the over load alarm limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current.03 UnderLoadAlarmLim [%] This parameter defines the under load alarm limit (in percentage of the ideal motor current. If the actual rms motor current is within the alarm and trip range (above alarm and below trip current) the programmable delay timer (Par.42. scaling:10 == 1Hz 42.42. scaling:10 == 1% 42.42.11 FrequencyLevel_P4 [Hz] Frequency of load point 4. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par.1). scaling:10 == 1Hz 42.09 FrequencyLevel_P2 [Hz] Frequency of load point 2.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started.42.57 AW4 – Bit12). scaling:10 == 1Hz 42.13 Max: 100Hz Def: 35Hz Int.08 Max: 100Hz Def: 10 Hz Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 200 Def: 80 Int.42.02 LoadProtectionDelayTime) will be started. the programmable delay timer (Par.

which corresponds to Par.24 CurrentLevel_P7 [A] Current of load point 7.15 Frequency Level P8. which corresponds to Par.22 CurrentLevel_P5 [A] Current of load point 5.12 Frequency Level P5. which corresponds to Par. 42. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par. 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42.21 CurrentLevel_P4 [A] Current of load point 4.18 CurrentLevel_P1 [A] Current of load point 1. which corresponds to Par. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000A Def: 190A Int. 42.26 CurrentLevel_P9 [A] Current of load point 9.16 Frequency Level P9. 42.07 Load Protection Start Frequency. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 30A Int. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000A Def: 110A Int. 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42.14 Frequency Level P7. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: Par. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 70A Int. scaling:1 == 1A 42. which corresponds to Par.23 CurrentLevel_P6 [A] Current of load point 6. 42.17 LoadProtStartCurr [A] Current of start load point.20 CurrentLevel_P3 [A] Current of load point 3.14 Max: 100Hz Def: 40Hz Int.10 Frequency Level P3. which corresponds to Par. scaling:10 == 1Hz 42. which corresponds to Par. 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42. scaling:1 == 1A MSAI5150 ACS1000 219/389 .16 FrequencyLevel_P9 [Hz] Frequency of load point 9. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000A Def: 170A Int. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 10A Int. scaling:1 == 1A 42.25 CurrentLevel_P8 [A] Current of load point 8. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000A Def: 150A Int. which corresponds to Par.11 Frequency Level P4. scaling:1 == 1A 42.08 Frequency Level P1. which corresponds to Par.42.09 Frequency Level P2. 42. 42. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 90A Int.15 Max: 100Hz Def: 45Hz Int. 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42.ABB 42.15 FrequencyLevel_P8 [Hz] Frequency of load point 8. scaling:10 == 1Hz 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42. scaling:1 == 1A 42. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 4000A Def: 50A Int.42.13 Frequency Level P6 Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000A Def: 130A Int.19 CurrentLevel_P2 [A] Current of load point 2. which corresponds to Par.

Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10 Def: 5 Int. scaling: 42. scaling: 220/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.27 MotCurrFiltTime [ms] The actual motor current used for the load protection can be filtered. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0 Max: 5000 Def: 500 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 42. This is needed for small motors with very low motor current to allow small hysteresis values.28 MotCurrHyst [A] The over-/underload indication is reset with a hysteresis for the actual motor current.The hysteresis can be adjusted with this parameter.I Signal and Parameter Table .

02 MotNomCurrent * Par.: 43. During operation the ACS 2000 software continuously calculates the maximum difference between the three motor phases.: 1. If the actual motor unbalance current is inside the operating range (below motor unbalance alarm and trip current) no alarm/fault is active.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent = 100 % Par.: 43.m in. If the actual motor unbalance current is outside the operating range an alarm/fault will be generated. IMotPhase Par.: 110.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim motor phase unbalance alarm (start of delay time) fMot Hz motor phase unbalance trip (start of delay time) Par. it is necessary to supervise the motor phase unbalance between the three motor phases in order to prevent overheating of one motor phase.28 Motor Phase Unbalance Current . Mo to r P hase Cu rrent) (Difference = m ax.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripLim MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent = 100 % Figure 43-1 Motor phase unbalance protection diagram MSAI5150 ACS1000 221/389 .26 MotCurrent Phase V (RMS) (RMS) Par. running the motor within permitted operating ranges for a longer period.: 1.: 43.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent MotPhaseUnbalTripLim Par.ABB Group 43 43 MOTOR PHASE UNBALANCE SUPERVISION Due to special kind of cables used for an ESP application.: 110.25 MotCurrent Phase U A (RMS) Par.27 MotCurrent Phase W Par. Mo to r P hase Cu rrent Par.: 43.: 1. This function makes it possible to avoid.: 1.02 MotNomCurrent * Par.

Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.: 43.03 MotPhaseUnbalAlmLim MotPhaseUnbalAlarmCurrent = 100 % Par.03 MotNomCurrent * Par.01 MotPhaseUnbalFunc This parameter activates the motor phase unbalance protection function. scaling:1 == 1s 222/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.04 MotPhaseUnbalTripLim MotPhaseUnbalTripCurrent = 100 % Figure 43-1 Motor Phase Unbalance Protection . motor phase unbalance protection is not used.03 MotNomCurrent * Par.Diagram 43. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 60 Def: 30 Int. 1 ON Motor phase unbalance protection is active.I Signal and Parameter Table .: 43.: 99.02 MotPhUnbalDelTime [s] If the maximum deviation between the three motor phases exceeds the alarm or trip current limits this delay timer will be activated. scaling:1 == 1 43.: 99. Note! This parameter can only be overwritten from service. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 OFF No action. Par.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 43 ESP PROTECTION 43 ESP PROTECTION ESP application protection parameter of ACS1000.

1). see figure 43.ABB 43.1).: 43.02 MotPhaseUnbalDelayTime) will be started. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 10 Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 15 Int.03 MotPhUnbalAlmLim [%] This parameter defines the motor phase unbalance alarm limit (in percentage of the nominal motor current.04 MotPhUnbalTripLim [%] This parameter defines the motor phase unbalance trip limit (in percentage of the nominal motor current. If the actual motor phase unbalance current is above alarm current the programmable delay timer (Par. If the motor current does not drop under the trip current within the delay time a fault will be occur (FW1 – Bit5) and the drive will be stopped according to SOFTSTOP sequence. see figure 43.02 MotPhaseUnbalDelayTime) will be started. scaling:10 == 1% MSAI5150 ACS1000 223/389 . If the motor unbalance current drops under the alarm current limit the alarm will disappear.: 43. If the actual motor phase unbalance current is above trip current the programmable delay timer (Par. If the motor phase unbalance current does not drop under the alarm current within the delay time an alarm will be occur (AW1 – Bit5). scaling:10 == 1% 43.

VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT SEL Function is not active 2 ONLY Only status indication is active STATUS 3 ALARM If supervision signal is active.03 CustSig1.1 NOT SEL CustSig1.3 (ASW3 .2 BitNum 48.01 CustSig1Reaction This parameter activates the customer supervision signal 1.1 Invert 48.04 CSS1.3) and their logical interconnection (OR or AND .gate).2 Grp&Idx (ACW2 .B07 Figure 48-1 Customer Supervision Signal 1 . It is possible to define three different signals (CSS1.04 AUX STATUS WORD 3 will be set. TRIP 1a or TRIP 1b is chosen. If ALARM is selected. an alarm will be generated 4 SOFT STOP If supervision signal is active.3 Invert 48. If NOT SEL is selected. drive stops according selected trip reaction and the fault message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel.3 BitNum 48. the function is disabled.10 Bit Number -1 Output OR CustSupSig1 Fault CSS1.2 Act CustSig1.3 Grp&Idx 48.04 Bit Number -1 OR ALARM Output 9.1 Act > CSS1 (AW7 .11 CustSupSig1 Active Signal Selection > 8.2 Invert Act SO FTSTOP 48.B01 48.B02 CustSig1.08 7. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Trip 1a” trip reaction 6 TRIP 1B If supervision signal is active.09 Group & Index CustSig1.1 Grp&Idx 48.1 BitNum ONLY STATUS 48. CustSig1 Reaction 48.B07 CustSig1. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Softstop” trip reaction 5 TRIP 1A If supervision signal is active.06 Group & Index TRIP 1b A ND 7.Overview 48.05 Signal Selection CSS1.3 Act > 9. This parameter group allows the customer to define an own supervision function.1 … CSS1.01 CustSig1 TypeSel 48. No trip reaction is active.03 CustSig1.I Signal and Parameter Table .03 (ACW2 .17 CSS1.02 CustSig1. only the status bit in parameter 8. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Trip 1b” trip reaction Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 1 Int. only the alarm message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel. no alarm or fault will be initiated.03 Group & Index CustSig1. If ONLY STATUS is selected. If SOFTSTOP. scaling:1 == 1 224/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Additionally is it possible to invert (high or low active) those signals.2 7.B06 Signal Selection TRIP 1a CSS1.09 (FW9 .07 Bit Number -1 (ACW2 .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG 48 CUSTOMER SUP SIG Customer application supervison function of ACS1000.B02 Output & OR CSS1.

04 CustSig1.2Grp+Idx Selection of Group and Index of Customer Supervision Signal 1.04 is set to “0”. has to be selected with parameter 48. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int.2).08 CustSig1. customer supervision signal 1 will be set if one of three signals (CSS1.1) by setting parameter 48..gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR – gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.1 (CSS 1. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.03.03 is set to “809” and 48. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR .04.. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int.1). VALUE NAME MEANING 0 AND gate is active 1 OR gate is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.e.2 (CSS 1. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 225/389 .1 is set to “0”. Additionally the bit number.03 CustSig1. By default CS1.gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR .. customer supervision signal 1.07 CustSig1.gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.1 … CSS1..3) are active. scaling:1 == 1 48.ABB 48.1BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0.06 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int.1 … 1. from a status word) is assigned to Customer Supervision Signal 1. 48. scaling:1 == 1 48.1 (CSS 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int. Example: If Par. scaling:1 == 1 48. Description see parameter 48.09 DI1-14 STAUS WORD IOEC2 / BIT 0 is “1” (digital input 1 of IOEC2 is active). If OR is selected.3 INVERT is set to DIRECT.2BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0.2).06 CustSig1. scaling:1 == 1 48.15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48.2 is set to “0”. The format is (x)xyy.03 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.1 … CSS1. customer supervision signal 1 will only be set if all three signals (CSS1. scaling:1 == 1 48. which identifies the signal within the status word.1Grp+Idx A binary signal (i.2Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 1.3) is active.02 CustSig1TypeSel With this parameter the logical interconnection (AND or OR) of customer supervision signal 1 is selected.1Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 1.03 By default CS1. If AND is selected. scaling:1 == 1 48. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR .2 (CSS 1.15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48. Note! Only if CSS1.1 is active when 8.05 CustSig1.

2 Grp&Idx (ACW2 .3BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0.B08 Figure 48-2 Customer Supervision Signal 2 .18 Bit Number -1 (ACW2 .03 (ACW2 .1 NOT SEL CustSig2.1 Invert 48.. the function is disabled.B08 CustSig2. If NOT SEL is selected. CustSig2 Reaction 48. No trip reaction is active.11 CustSig1.3 BitN um 48. no alarm or fault will be initiated.B06 Signal S election TRIP 1a CSS2.Overview 226/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. drive stops according selected trip reaction and the fault message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel.2 BitN um 48.17 CSS2.3Grp+Idx Selection of Group and Index of Customer Supervision Signal 1. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int.1 … CSS1.3).3 Invert 48.13 CustSig2.21 Bit Number -1 Output OR CustSupSig2 Fault CSS2. Description see parameter 48.gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR – gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.1 Grp&Idx 48. If ALARM is selected.15 Bit Number -1 OR ALARM Output 9.I Signal and Parameter Table .3 Grp&Idx 48. scaling:1 == 1 CUSTOMER SUPERVISION SIGNAL 2 This parameter group allows the customer to define an own supervision function.09 (FW9 .03 By default CS1.15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48..04 (ASW3 .03 CustSig2.10 CustSig1.09 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int.B02 Output & CSS2.B03 CustSig2.3 > 8. If ONLY STATUS is selected.3 (CSS 1.gate).09 CustSig1. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR .3Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 1.1 BitN um ONLY STATUS 48.22 CustSupSig2 Active Signal S election CSS2.17 Group & Index TRIP 1b AN D 7.03 CustSig2. only the status bit in parameter 7. It is possible to define three different signals (CSS1.19 7.B01 48.14 Group & Index CustSig2.3 is set to “0”.1 Act > CSS2 (AW7 . only the alarm message “CustSupSig1” will be displayed on the panel. TRIP 1a or TRIP 1b is chosen.3 Act > 9.2 7.03 AUX STATUS WORD will be set.2 Invert Act SOFTSTOP 48.2 Act OR CustSig2.3 (CSS 1. scaling:1 == 1 48.20 Group & Index CustSig2. Additionally is it possible to invert (high or low active) those signals. If SOFTSTOP.12 CustSig2 TypeSel 48.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 48. scaling:1 == 1 48.16 Signal S election CSS2.3).3) and their logical interconnection (OR or AND .

scaling:1 == 1 48.3) are active.1 is set to “0”. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT SEL Function is not active 2 ONLY Only status indication is active STATUS 3 ALARM If supervision signal is active.12 CustSig2Reaction This parameter activates the customer supervision signal 2.ABB 48.17 CustSig2.1Grp+Idx A binary signal (i. By default CS2. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 227/389 . VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR . Note! Only if CSS1. scaling:1 == 1 48. an alarm will be generated 4 SOFT STOP If supervision signal is active.15 is set to “0”.1 … CS2.15. The format is (x)xyy.1BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int.1 (CSS 2.09 DI1-14 STAUS WORD IOEC2 / BIT 0 is “1” (digital input 1 of IOEC2 is active).13 CustSig2TypeSel With this parameter the logical interconnection (AND or OR) of customer supervision signal 2 is selected. has to be selected with parameter 48.2). scaling:1 == 1 48.14 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.14 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int. the customer supervision signal 2 will be set if one of three signals (CSS2.2 (CSS 2.1 … 1. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 AND gate is active 1 OR gate is active Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. If OR is selected.1Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 2.15 CustSig2.gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR . Description see parameter 48.16 CustSig2. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Trip 1a” trip reaction 6 TRIP 1B If supervision signal is active.3) is active. the customer supervision signal 2 will only be set if all three signals (CSS2.2 is set to “0”.1 is active when 8.1) by setting parameter 48.14 is set to “809” and 48.gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. from a status word) is assigned to Customer Supervision Signal 2. Additionally the bit number.1 (CSS 2. which identifies the signal within the status word.2Grp+Idx Selection of Group and Index of Customer Supervision Signal 2.1).3 INVERT is set to DIRECT. customer supervision signal 2. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. scaling:1 == 1 48.e.1 … CS2. scaling:1 == 1 48. Example: If Par.. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Trip 1b” trip reaction Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 1 Int. a fault will be generated and the drive trips according to “Softstop” trip reaction 5 TRIP 1A If supervision signal is active.14 CustSig2..15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48. If AND is selected.14 By default CS2. 48.

10 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int.15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR .04 . Description see parameter 48.B10) & 9.Example 1 (Alarm) 228/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.2Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 2.B02) Figure 48-3 Customer Supervision .3 is set to “0”.3BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0.2). scaling:1 == 1 48. scaling:1 == 1 48.gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.11 .B08) CustSup1SigAct 1 Consta nt "1" (8.22 CustSig2.B14) 8.gate Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.17 Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 13 Int.3Invert Inversion selection for selected Customer Supervision Signal 2.IOEC4 is not set (OFF) ACS1000 Running AN D (8..3 (CSS 2.3).2BitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0.gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR ..3).04 (ASW3 .3 (CSS 2.18 CustSig2.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 48.2 (CSS 2.21 CustSig2.. scaling:1 == 1 48.3Grp+Idx Selection of Group and Index of Customer Supervision Signal 2.17 (AW7 .19 CustSig2. scaling:1 == 1 EXAMPLE 1: A special customer ALARM is generated if ACS1000 is running and digital input DI11 .20 CustSig2.01 . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 804 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DIRECT selected signal sent directly to AND / OR .I Signal and Parameter Table .14 By default CS2.gate 1 INVERTED selected signal sent inverted to AND / OR ..15) of the selected parameter group and index in 48.IOEC4 (85. scaling:1 == 1 48.B2) ALARM DI11 .

04 .19 SupSig1Limit : 40 Figure 48 4 Customer Supervision .04 (ACW2 .04 .02 LimSupDelayTime : 3s 32.Example 2 (DO) EXAMPLE 3 It is also possible to combine the customer supervision signal 1 2 : Drive trips with trip reaction TRIP 1a if ACS1000 is running in LOCAL – Mode or digital Input DI6 – IOEC2 is set to ON ACS1000 Running AN D (8.B14) (ASW3 .01 .17 SupSig1Function : HIGH LIMIT 32.IOEC 32.B2) CustSup1SigAct REMOTE .01 LimitSupervisAction : NO 32.04 (8.B9 REMOTE) & 8.B5) > 8.IOEC2 1 Constant 1 (8.09 .18 SupSig1Group+Indx : 216 32.B02) CustSup2SigAct DI6 .04 OR (ASW3 .B01) Figure 48 5 Customer Supervision .01 .B8 AT SETPOINT) CustSup2SigAct REMOTE .Mode (8.07 . actual speed equals reference speed and inverter air temperature is above 40°C ACS1000 Ref S peed = Act Speed AN D (8.01 .B7 SUP SIG1) Digital Output Selection Limit Supervision Selection 14.B03) Inv Air Temp > 40°C (8.B9 REMOTE) & 8.01 .04 (ASW3 .01 DO1 Group+Index IO2 : 804 14.02 DO1 Bit Number IO2 :3 14.ABB EXAMPLE 2 Digital output DO1-IOEC2 is set if ACS1000 is running in REMOTE mode.Example 3 (Trip) MSAI5150 ACS1000 229/389 .Mode (8.02 DO1 Inv ert IO2 : DIRECT DO1 .B13) Trip 1a 8.B03 Constant 0 0 (8.

SPE ED MEASURE MT Mot or Model Motor Speed 1.05 ENCODER ALM/FLT Figure 50-1 Speed Measurement .Overview 230/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. running or stopping the speed feedback selection will be switched to INTERNAL and an alarm / fault message will be displayed.02 SPEED MEAS MO DE 50.04 FILTER 50.04 ENCODER PULS NUMBER 50.02 ENCODER Speed Measured 1.I Signal and Parameter Table .06 SD ACT FILT TIME 50.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT 50 SPEED MEASUREMENT If measurement from ENCODER is faulty during magnetizing.03 50.03 SPEED FB SEL Motor Speed Filt 50.01 SP EED SCALING 1.

scaling:1 == 1 ms ms MSAI5150 ACS1000 231/389 .04 PULSE NR [p] Number of encoder pulses per revolution. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 A_. Unit: Type: R Min: 1 Max: 30000 Def: 2048 Int. Figure Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0rpm Max: 18000rpm Def: 1500rpm Int. scaling:1 == 1 50.03 SpeedFeedbackSel Source of the speed feedback to the speed controller.01 SPEED SCALING [rpm] This parameter defines the actual speed (in rpm) that corresponds to the value of 20000 in the overriding system.ABB 50. which can be read from the overriding system (integer scaling). Unit: ms Type: R Min: 0ms Max: 999999 Def: 0 ms Int.02 MEAS MODE Selects the measurement type of the pulse encoder mode.03 ENCODER MODULE) Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 2 Def: 1 Int. channel B: direction 3 A_-_B_-_ channel A B: positive and negative edges for speed and direction Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 3 Int. This parameter has only scaling effect to the actual speed signals. scaling:1 == 1 50. 75. channel B: not used 2 A_-_B DIR positive and negative edges for speed . scaling:15000 == 1500 rpm 50.B DIR positive edges for speed . VALUE NAME MEANING 1 INTERNAL internal actual speed 2 ENCODER pulse encoder module is used (see also Par.06 SP ACT FILT TIME [ms] Time constant of the first order actual speed filter. scaling:1 == 1 50. channel B: direction 1 A_-_ positive and negative edges for speed .

03 FIELDBUS PAR3 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.10 FIELDBUS PAR10 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 51 MASTER ADAPTER 51 MASTER ADAPTER This parameter group defines the communication parameters when FBA (Field Bus Adapter) is used. 51. Note! The changes to the parameters in group 51 do not come into effect immediately but only when the power of the fieldbus adapters was switched off and then switched on again.g. scaling: 51. Parameter names depend on the selected FBA type. which can be selected with a parameter. This group name identifies which communication hardware module is connected to the ACS 1000 drive.02 FIELDBUS PAR2 Different meanings depending on module type Unit: Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.01 MODULE TYPE Module type and software version Unit: Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. The setup parameters can be modified either by using the drive panel or by PC software. scaling: 51.06 FIELDBUS PAR6 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51. Some option modules support multiple protocols.07 FIELDBUS PAR7 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. e.08 FIELDBUS PAR8 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 232/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.05 FIELDBUS PAR5 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51.04 FIELDBUS PAR4 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51.09 FIELDBUS PAR9 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51. scaling: 51. DriveWindow. scaling: 51.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling: 51.

13 FIELDBUS PAR13 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.14 FIELDBUS PAR14 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51.ABB 51.12 FIELDBUS PAR12 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.11 FIELDBUS PAR11 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 51.15 FIELDBUS PAR15 Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 233/389 . scaling: 51. scaling: 51.

To enable the EC fan functionality first set parameter 75. Figure 52-1 Inverter fan speed reference calculation overview Unit: rpm Type: R Int. Refer to the graphic below for a better understanding of the inverter fan speed calculation.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 52 EC FAN 52 EC FAN ACS1000 EC (electronically commutated) fan parameter group. 52. scaling: 1 == 1 234/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.06 to EC FAN. otherwise the whole parameter group is read protected. The actual reference shown in this signal will be converted to an analog signal (IOEC1-AO1).I Signal and Parameter Table . which is given to the EC fan.01 InvFan RefSpeed ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Inverter fan reference speed signal.

25)]^2)*max(52.06 PrSens ExpectVal ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameters shows the expected value of the pressure sensor in Pascal [Pa]. scaling: 1 == 1 52.06(52.05 AirFiltPressMon ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Air filter pressure monitoring signal.52.52.02) = (52. Unit: Pa Type: R Int. Figure 52-2 Tranformer reference speed calculation Unit: rpm Type: R Int.01.02 TraFan RefSpeed ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Integrated transformer fan reference speed signal.34/[max(52.ABB 52.52.15.02)^2 Unit: Pa Type: R Int. scaling: 1 == 1 52. scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 235/389 . 52. Measures pressure from ambient to inverter compartment. which is calculated depending on the fan speed reference.01. which is given to the integrated transformer fan. The actual reference shown in this signal will be converted to an analog signal (IOEC3-AO1). Refer to the graphic below for a better understanding of the transformer fan speed calculation.

the fans are stopped if the drive is in RdyRun state (MCB closed.34 ExpPressAtNomSpd. scaling:1 == 1 52. Fan speed at nominal inverter operation. scaling:1 == 1 52.15 InvFanNomSpd Inverter fan nominal speed. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 Calibration not active. which is taken for the slope calculation of the monitoring function. CALIBRATION 1 Calibration is active.10 AirPressSensCalib to CALIBRATE 3.26 AirPress MinExpect & 210. scaling:1 == 1 52. but not modulating) Unit: s Type: R Min: 30 Max: 300 Def: 60 Int.17 InvFanMinSpd Minimum fan speed of inverter fan. scaling:1 == 1 236/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. the final result must be in a certain range (define by parameters 210. for both. transformer fan 2 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. The calibration sequence is as follows: 1.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 52. The calibration process is finished and parameter 52. If the range is exceeded the “old” value from 52. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.10 AirPressSensCalib reset to DISABLED. Fan(s) will now turn to nominal speed (without software filter) and run there for 30sec.34 is not changed and a calibration fault is active.16 InvRedFanNomSpd Inverter fan nominal speed in redundant configuration. Grp2 --> inverter fan MIX 2. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 1350 Int. transformer fan 2 OPT 1 Option seperate: Grp1 --> inverter fan 1. IOEC3 . NAME VALUE MEANING NO 0 No EC fan redundancy configuration. inverter fan 2. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.I Signal and Parameter Table .18 Def: 900 Int.11 FanRedundancy Selection of EC fan redundancy configuration.27 AirPress MaxExpect). Note! In order to ensure the measurements which are taken during the calibration process. Fan speed of both inverter fans at nominal inverter operation. transformer fan 1. Grp2 --> transformer SEP fan 1. NAME VALUE MEANING OPT 0 Option mixed: Grp1 --> inverter fan 1.AO1 &amp. Start calibration sequence by setting parameter 52. scaling:1 == 1 52. 5. This parameters allows to select between two different hardware approaches.10 AirPress SensCalib The air pressure sensor must be calibrated to ensure proper measurements. Init condition: DC link discharge & grounding switch open 2. YES 1 EC fan redundancy configuration. 4.AO2). Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 1700 Int.12 FanOption IntTr The EC fans are splitted in two groups. After 30 seconds. During the calibration process an active alarm is present “PressMonCalibAct”. the actual measured differential pressure is written to parameter 52. single and redundant configuration. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.13 FanRdyRunStopDel After the set time in this parameter. scaling:1 == 1 52. Each group is controlled by one analog output (IOEC1 .

The input must be given in percentage of the maximum allowed current of the inverter. Therefore it is calculated as follows: TransfPower = 1. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 5 Int.28 Def: 900 Int.28 TraFanMaxSpd Maximum fan speed of transformer fan for both.18 InvFanMaxSpd Maximum fan speed of inverter fan for both. where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum fan speed (Parameter 52.26 TraRedFanNomSpd Transformer fan nominal speed in redundant configuration.05 x 161. single and redundant configuration.19 InvFanRefFiltTime Inverter fan reference filter time.27 TraFanMinSpd Minimum fan speed of transformer fan for both. scaling:1 == 1 52.ABB 52.17 Max: 2500 Def: 1770 Int. The input must be given in percentage of the maximum allowed current of the inverter. scaling:1 == 1 52. Fan speed of both transformer fans at nominal transformer power.81).81).16 FILTERED POWER Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 1680 Int. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52. single and redundant configuration. Therefore it is calculated as follows: TransfPower = 1. Note! There is no measurement of the transformer power. Fan speed at nominal transformer power. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 85 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. NAME VALUE MEANING LINEAR 0 The fan reference is linear dependent on the inverter rms current (160. Note! There is no measurement of the transformer power. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 75 Int. The reference given to the fan is filtered using this time.17) for single configuration. scaling:1 == 1 52. where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum fan speed (Parameter 52. scaling:1 == 1 52.27 Max: 2500 Def: 1770 Int. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 237/389 . Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 52.81).21 MaxCurAtMinSpd Maximum allowed inverter RMS current.22 MaxCurAtRedMinSpd Maximum allowed inverter RMS current. scaling:1 == 1 52. The speed reference to the fan can be quadratic or linear depending on inverter rms current (=160.20 InvFanRefWaveForm Inverter fan reference waveform. QUADRATIC 1 The fan reference is quadratic dependent on the inverter rms current (160.25 TraFanNomSpd Transformer fan nominal speed.05 x 161. scaling:1 == 1 52. scaling:1 == 1 52. Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 52.16 FILTERED POWER Unit: rpm Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 1200 Int.17) for redundant configuration. single and redundant configuration. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.

16 FILTERED POWER). If the air pressure calibration is used. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 75 Int.30 TraFanRefWaveForm Transformer fan reference waveform. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 99 Def: 85 Int.16) transformer power.5 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table . which can be measured. scaling:1 == 1 52.31 MaxPowAtMinSpd Maximum allowed transformer power (=1. where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum fan speed (52. The reference given to the fan is filtered using this time.05 x 161. The speed reference to the fan can be quadratic or linear depending on inverter transformer power (=1. supplied to analog input 1 on IOEC1 Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10 Def: 4.16) transformer power Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. The input must be given in percentage of the maximum allowed power of the transformer.32 MaxPowAtRedMinSpd Maximum allowed transformer power (=1. scaling:1 == 1 52.05 x 161. this value is automatically written at the end of the calibration.29 TraFanRefFiltTime Transformer fan reference filter time.33 TraNominalPower Integrated transformer nominal power in kVA. Note! The data must be taken from the transformer name plate! Unit: kVA Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 500 Int.35 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 5 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. The input must be given in percentage of the maximum allowed power of the transformer.37 PressMon SensMax Pressure sensor maximum voltage signal.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 52. scaling:1 == 1 52.05 x 161. which can be measured. Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 2500 Def: 500 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52. where the fan is still allowed to run with minimum speed (52.36 PressMon LowValue Pressure sensor dependent minimum/low value.16 FILTERED POWER). Note!In case of cooling fan redundancy it takes the redundant fan nominal speed. scaling:1 == 1 52. scaling:1 == 10 238/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.27) for single configuration. NAME VALUE MEANING LINEAR 0 The fan reference is linear dependent on the calculated (1. scaling:1 == 1 52.27) for redundant configuration.05 x 161.35 PressMon HighValue Pressure sensor dependent maximum/high value.34 ExpPressAtNomSpd Expected pressure at nominal fan speed (maximum of inverter and transformer fan).05 x 161. This parameter is dependent on drive type. Unit: Pa Type: R Min: 0 Max: 10000 Def: 120 Int. QUADRATIC 1 The fan reference is quadratic dependent on the calculated (1.16 FILTERED POWER).

With redundant fan: Delay time for the alarm message.52.06 x (1 + 52.5 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. scaling:1 == 1 52. in order to keep the drive running. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 25 Int. if actual measured pressure is below or above the trip limits.43 PressMon TripLevLo Pressure monitoring low trip level.12 AI1 IOEC1) a fault class 1 trip will be generated.39 PressMon AlmDelay Pressure monitoring alarm delay. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 2 Int. Delay time for the fault class 1 trip. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 239/389 . If 52. Delay time of the pressure alarm. Without redundant fan: Delay time for the alarm message.45 FanDist AlmDel Fan disturbed alarm delay time. Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 52.06 x (1 .41 PressMon AlmLevLo Pressure monitoring low alarm level. if whether the inverter or the transformer fan is disturbed. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 50 Int.42 PressMon AlmLevHi Pressure monitoring high alarm level.37 Def: 0. Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 6 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52.12 AI1 IOEC1) an alarm will be generated. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 3 Int.38 PressMon SensMin Pressure sensor minimum voltage signal. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 5 Int.40 PressMon TripDelay Pressure monitoring trip delay. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 20 Int. scaling:1 == 1 52. Additionally the still operational fan speed will be increased as it would be operated with single fan configuration. if whether the inverter or the transformer fan is disturbed. If 52. scaling:1 == 1 52. Delay time of the pressure alarm.43) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.41) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.12 AI1 IOEC1) an alarm will be generated. scaling:1 == 1 52.06 x (1 + 52. If 52.12 AI1 IOEC1) a fault class 1 trip will be generated.44 PressMon TripLevHi Pressure monitoring high trip level.42) is lower than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.ABB 52. supplied to analog input 1 on IOEC1. scaling:1 == 1 52. if whether the inverter or the transformer fan is disturbed.06 x (1 .46 FanDist FltDel Fan disturbed trip delay time. If 52. if actual measured pressure is below or above the alarm limits. scaling:1 == 10 52. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 100 Def: 10 Int.52.44) is higher than the calculated differential pressure (from analog input value 4.

48 FanDist ResDel1 Fan disturbed reset delay/wait time for inverter fans.49 FanDist ResDel2 Fan disturbed reset delay/wait time for transformer fans.50 FanAuxSupplyType Parameter selection whether the fans are internally or externally supplied. The parameter is set by manufacturing key. scaling:1 == 1 52. INTERNAL 1 The fans are supplied internally (only supplied if MCB is closed) Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. the fan control automatically changes back to redundant operation with all fan running with less fan speed. If not operational fan recovers at least for the time set in this parameter. scaling:1 == 1 52. Note! Only relevant in redundant configuration. NAME VALUE MEANING EXTERNAL 0 The fans are supplied from externally.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 52. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 10 Int. If not operational fan recovers at least for the time set in this parameter. Note! Only relevant in redundant configurations. Note! Only relevant in redundant configurations. scaling:1 == 1 52. the fan control automatically changes back to redundant operation with all fan running with less fan speed. the still operational fan speed will be increased to single configuration speed after this delay time. respectively software download.I Signal and Parameter Table . If one of the fans is disturbed. scaling:1 == 1 240/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 10 Int.47 FanDist IncDel Fan disturbed fan speed increase delay time. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 10 Int.

scaling:see par 50- 18000rmp 2014 01 55.01 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE to 0 all values from the standard groups are copied to group 51.01 Motor Nom Voltage [V] Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate. scaling:10 == 1A 55. Unit: kW Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int.(see Figure 23-1)For step-up transformer option: if parameter 132. 99 .01 Max: Def: see par. Unit: A Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. The values are then copied to the standard parameter groups (20.08 Maximum Speed [rpm] Positive speed reference limit in rpm.20. scaling:1==1rpm 55. scaling:see par 50- 20. Unit: Hz Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int.23 (StepUpMinFreq) is not equal 0 the minimum speed is limited according to that minimum starting frequency for step-up. 55.02 Motor Nom Current [A] Rated motor current. Unit: Type: R Min: 0.06 Motor Nom CosFii Motor cos phi from the motor rating plate. Unit: V Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. Def: see par. Unit: % Type: R Min: 1% Max: 400% Def: 120% Int. Each of these motors can be selected by parameter 99.00 Def: 0 Int. It is not possible to start the ACS 1000 Drive Macro without setting this parameter.14 01 55. Int.15.150). 55.g.ABB Group 55 MOTOR DATA 1 55 Motor Data 1 These group can be used to define 4 different sets of motor parameters.04 Motor Nom Speed [rpm] Nominal speed from the motor rating plate. Unit: rmp Type: R Min: 0 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. When setting the first parameter e. scaling:1==1V 55. scaling:10==1% MSAI5150 ACS1000 241/389 . scaling:1==1kW 55.02 20. Unit: rmp Type: R Min: -20000 rpm Max: Par.03 Motor Nom Freq [Hz] Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate.09 User Max Mot Cur [%] Maximum output current in motor mode in % of the motor nominal current.05 Motor Nom Power [kW] Nominal power from the motor rating plate. scaling:100==1 55. Int.00 Max: 1.07 Minimum Speed [rpm] Negative speed reference limit in rpm. scaling:100== 1Hz 55. (see Figure 23-1) Unit: rmp Type: R Min: Par.

0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.12 SigmaLs [mH] Stator stray inductance. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. scaling: 55. scaling: 55. scaling: 55.11 Ls [mH] Stator main inductance. scaling: 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.22 Lm [T = 87.18 Lm [T = 37. scaling: 55.13 Rotor TimeConst [ms] Rotor time constant.16 Lm [T = 12. scaling: 55. Unit: ms Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. scaling: 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. scaling: 55.20 Lm [T = 62.15 Lm [T = 0. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.19 Lm [T = 50. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.17 Lm [T = 25. Unit: mH Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.10 Rs [Ohm] Stator resistance.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 55. scaling: 55. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: mH Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. Unit: Ω Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.21 Lm [T = 75. scaling: 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. scaling: 242/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.

scaling: 55.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.24 Lm [T = 112. level less than nominal. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.28 Lm [T = 162.31 Lm [T = 200. scaling: 55.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. scaling: 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.33 Lm [Flux = a] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = A Values is given as % of inductance value at nominal operation point. scaling: 55.29 Lm [T = 175.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.ABB 55. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.5%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 243/389 . Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. scaling: 55. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.23 Lm [T = 100. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 55.26 Lm [T = 137.27 Lm [T = 150. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point.32 im [Flux = a] [%] Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “A”.25 Lm [T = 125. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Values are given as % of inductance value at nominal no-load operation point. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.First point of no-load curve. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. scaling: 55.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque. scaling: 55. scaling: 55. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 55.30 Lm [T = 187.0%] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table as a function of torque.

38 Gener. Unit: s Type: R Min: 0. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.7 Int. scaling: 55.44 IR Compensation [s] Ir-compensation needed voltage boost Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 30 Def: 0.level higher than nominal.41 IRCompensationENA Switch for Ir-compensation function NAME VALUE MEANING FALSE 0 IR compenstation is disabled TRUE 1 IR compensation is enabled Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 55. Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 800 Def: 100 Int. scaling:1 == 1 55. scaling:1 == 1000 55. scaling: 55.I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int.5 Int.40 Flux Ramp Time [s] Flux ramp time from zero to flux nominal value. scaling:1 == 1 55.Second point of no-load curve. Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: 55.Third point of no-load curve.01 Max: 100 Def: 0. scaling:1 == 1 55. level equal nominal.43 IRCompCurrDir ENA Switch for Ir-compensation current direction function NAME VALUE MEANING FALSE 0 IR compensation current direction is enabled TRUE 1 IR compensation current direction is disabled Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.39 User Max Gen Cur [%] Maximum generating current (as % of motor nominal current) from user.42 IRCurrentCtrl ENA Switch for Ir-compensation current controller function NAME VALUE MEANING FALSE 0 IR compensation current controller is enabled TRUE 1 IR compensation current controller is disabled Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 55.35 Lm [Flux = nom] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = NOM Values is 100 if flux is 100 % Unit: % Type: R Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling:1 == 100 244/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0.5 Int.37 Lm [Flux = b] [%] Magnetization inductance saturation coefficient table for flux = B Values is given as % of inductance value at nominal operation point. scaling: 55. Nom CosFii Motor nominal power factor in generator mode.36 im [Flux = b] [%] Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “B”.34 im [Flux = nom] [%] Magnetization current in % of motor nominal current for flux = “NOM”. scaling: 55.

01 . For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 1 (Par.01 - 55.44) Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 245/389 .56.ABB Group 56 MOTOR DATA 2 56. 55.44.01 Motor Data 2 Motor data 2 parameter 56.

44.01 - 55. scaling: 246/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 55.44) Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.01 Motor Data 3 Motor data 3 parameter 57. For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 1 (Par.I Signal and Parameter Table .57.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 57 MOTOR DATA 3 57.01 .

44.01 - 55.ABB Group 58 MOTOR DATA 4 58.44) Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int.01 Motor Data 4 Motor data 4 parameters 58.58. 55. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 247/389 .01 . For a detailed description refer to Motor Data 4 (Par.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 60 Group 60…63CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE FIELDBUS / DDCS COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB .AC80 Figure Overview of CH4 DDDCS communication between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80 (ABB Advant Controller 80) 248/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .

ABB DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB .AC80 Figure Overview of CH4 data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80 (ABB Advant Controller 80) MSAI5150 ACS1000 249/389 .

Figure Overview of data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and AC80 (ABB Advant Controller 80) via CH4 250/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table . which connect certain dataset fields directly to the Motor Control SW or Application SW. NOTE! If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED. otherwise a transmit error will be generated.AC80 Definition of the read / write location for datasets (FA). Connection principle: •Parameters “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” define the AMC – table index which are read and then written to DataSet xx Field Index (n). corresponding dataset must be set in master system (AC80) as well.Signal and Parameter Table ABB CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW. MVD – AMC3 Þ ABB . •Parameters “DS(n) RDVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” which are written to DataSet xx Field Index (n). Contains (drive) dataset connection parameters.

AC80 Þ MVD – AMC3 Definition of the read / write location for datasets (FA). Figure Figure Overview of data exchange between and AC80 (ABB Advant Controller 80) and MVD – AMC3 via CH4 MSAI5150 ACS1000 251/389 . NOTE! If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED. Connection principle: •Parameters “DS(n) PARWR I(n)” defines the AMC-table group+index numbers. where the values are written. which connect certain dataset fields directly to the Motor Control SW or Application SW. •Parameters “DS(n) WRVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRR I(n)” which are read from DataSet xx Field Index (n).ABB CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW. ABB . which are read from the corresponding DataSet xx Field Index (n). Contains (drive) dataset connection parameters. otherwise a receive error will be generated. corresponding dataset must be set in master system (AC80) as well.

Control Device Adapter) 252/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.I Signal and Parameter Table .Signal and Parameter Table ABB FIELDBUS / DDCS COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB ACDA – AMC3 Figure Overview of CH4 DataSet communication between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA (ABB Aux.

ABB DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW MVD – AMC3 Û ABB ACDA – AMC3 Figure Overview of CH4 data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA – AMC3 (Aux. Control Device Adapter) MSAI5150 ACS1000 253/389 .

corresponding dataset must be set in master system (ACDA) as well. Figure Overview of data exchange between MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) and ACDA – AMC3 (Aux.Signal and Parameter Table ABB CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW. Connection principle: •Parameters “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” define the AMC – table index which are read and then written to DataSet xx Field Index (n). otherwise a transmit error will be generated. Contains (drive) dataset connection parameters. •Parameters “DS(n) RDVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRD I(n)” which are written to DataSet xx Field Index (n). NOTE! If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED. which connect certain dataset fields directly to the Motor Control SW or Application SW.I Signal and Parameter Table . MVD-AMC3 Þ ACDA–AMC3 Definition of the read / write location for datasets (FA). Control Device Adapter) 254/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

ABB CH4 DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW. which are read from the corresponding DataSet xx Field Index (n). Figure Overview of data exchange between ACDA – AMC3 (Aux. ACDA–AMC3 Þ MVD–AMC3 Definition of the read / write location for datasets (FA). otherwise a receive error will be generated. which connect certain dataset fields directly to the Motor Control SW or Application SW. Control Device Adapter) and MVD (Medium Voltage Drive) MSAI5150 ACS1000 255/389 . •Parameters “DS(n) WRVALUE I(n)” shows the actual value of corresponding “DS(n) PARRR I(n)” which are read from DataSet xx Field Index (n). NOTE! If the parameter(s) DS(n) ENABLE is set to ENABLED. Connection principle: •Parameters “DS(n) PARWR I(n)” defines the AMC-table group+index numbers. Contains (drive) dataset connection parameters. corresponding dataset must be set in master system (ACDA) as well. where the values are written.

DRIVE (MVD-AMC3) Figure 60-1 Overview of data exchange between ACDA – AMC3 (APU .I Signal and Parameter Table . ACDA Þ VSD .Auxiliary Pumping Unit) and MVD – AMC3 via CH4 256/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Signal and Parameter Table ABB SIGNAL TRANSFER OVERVIEW.

0 No control from overriding system. 0 Ramp-function generator output is set to zero.DRIVE (MVD-AMC3) 60. B08 INCHING_1 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 1.state 0 Command to Stop B04 RAMP_OUT_ZERO 1 Normal operation.MODULE B12 PROCESS_STOP_N 1 Process Stop is not active. Effective if parameter 12.MODULE 0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1). B07 RESET 1 Fault resetting with a rising edge 0 No significance. 0 Process Stop is active. ACDA => VSD .DATA SET RECEIVE SIGNAL TRANSFER OVERVIEW.bit RAMP-HOLD = 0 . B11 EXT_CTRL_LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2).bit RAMP-IN ZERO = 0 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_1 was previously ON B09 INCHING_2 1 Drive accelerates as fast as possible to inching set point 2. Command to “ON INHIBIT” state B03 RUN 1 Command to “RDY REF”. B13 ARU_BLOCK_MOD 1 Modulation of ARU is blocked.02 is set to COMM. See conditions Inching_1. B05 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable Ramp-function generator 0 Speed ramping stopped.01 ACDA/MainCtrlWord ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the received value from ACDA (Aux. B14 RESERVED 0 B15 NOT USED 0 Unit: Type: I Int. Freeze the actual set point from the ramp-function generator B06 RAMP_IN_ZERO 1 Enable set point 0 Disable set point.02 is set to COMM. Speed ramp input is forced to zero. Command to “ON INHIBIT” state B02 OFF3 1 No OFF 3 0 Emergency STOP (=> Stop by torque limit). scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 257/389 . if next conditions are fulfilled: .ABB Group 60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS 60 CH4 ACTUAL SIGNALS DATASET COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW . Effective if parameter 12. MCB off). BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 ON 1 Auxiliaries ON sequence (command to charging the INU and closing the MCB) 0 Auxiliaries OFF sequence (command to opening the MCB and discharging the INU) B01 OFF2 1 No OFF2 0 Emergency OFF (=> Stop by coasting. Control Device Adapter) via Data Set 100 Value 1. B10 REMOTE_CMD 1 ACDA control system is requesting to control the drive. 0 Drive brakes as fast as possible if INCHING_2 was previously ON.bit RAMP-OUT-ZERO = 0 .

AC800.03 ACDA/Ref2 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the received reference 2 value from ACDA (Aux. scaling: 100 = 1% 60. scaling: 20000 == SpeedScaling 60. 98. Unit: scal Type: I Int. e. AC80. Control Device Adapter.I Signal and Parameter Table . AMC33 – Aux. scaling: 1 == 1 258/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01 set of new real time clock B06 HOLD NCONT Holding of the speed controller's output B07 WINDOW CTRL Par. Control Device Adapter.Controller) via Data Set 100 Value 2. Unit: % Type: I Int. e.01 Torque Selector forcing to window control B08 BAL NCONT Forcing of speed controller's output B09 B10 B11 B12 DO2 CTRL OVER SYST see B04 B13 USER MACRO CTRL Macro change request B14 DO3 CTRL OVER SYST see B04 B15 NOT USABLE Unit: Type: I Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 60.Controller) via Data Set 100 Value 3.g.g.04 ACDA/AuxCtrlWord1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the transmit value to ACDA (Aux. BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 TRIGG_DLOG_1 Trigger data logger no 1 B01 TRIGG_DLOG_2 Trigger data logger no 2 B02 RAMP BYPASS Speed ramp bypassing B03 BAL RAMP OUT Forcing of ramp output B04 DO1 CTRL OVER SYST Digital outputs controlled by an overriding system B05 REAL TIME CLOCK SET Par. 26. AMC33 – Aux. Control Device Adapter) via Data Set 102 Value 1.02 ACDA/Ref1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter shows the received Speed Reference value from ACDA (Aux. AC80. AC800.

AC800.ACW1 is not used. NOTE! If the parameter is set to NOT USED.g. 1 ENABLED Desired bits of ACDA .ABB Group 61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE 61 CH4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CH4 communication parameter. 1 POLLED SLAVE The CH4 is a polled slave channel. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 259/389 . 61. The CH4 has to be configured as a POLLED SLAVE for communication. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 DISABLED The CH4 disabled. This parameter is only active if ACDA communication module is used (parameter 75.04 ACDA/MCW CtrlSel This parameter is used to activate bit number B01.g. This parameter is only active if ACDA communication module is used (parameter 75. NOTE! If the parameter is not used the signals are set internally to constant “1”or constant “0” respectively. AMC33 – Aux.ACW1 is used. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. 1 ENABLED ACDA . B02 & B12 of ACDA Main Control Word (CH4) if selected. the signals are set internally to constant 1.Master control system.MCW are not used. scaling:1 == 1 61. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NOT USED Desired bits of ACDA . scaling: 61.MODULE is set to DSET100 R/W).02 ACDA COMM MODULE is set to DSET100 R/W).05 ACDA/ACW1 CtrlSel This parameter is used to activate the ACDA . AC80) or with AMC3 .01 NOT USED Unit: Type: NoType Min: Max: Def: Int. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.Auxiliary Control Word 1 from CH4 (e.03 CH4 CONFIGURATION CH4 is used to communicate with ABB Advant Controller (e. 2 FAST MASTER The CH4 is a fast master channel.Controller). VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NOT USED ACDA . scaling:1 == 1 61.MCW are used. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 2 Def: 1 Int. AC80.02 ACDA COMM.

NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62.02 AUX STATUS WORD1. The default value is set to parameter 8.01 DSET 101&101 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 801 Max: 801 Def: 801 Int. The default value is set to parameter 60.04 DS100 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 100 Index 3 is sent. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .01 MAIN STATUS WORD.03 DS100 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 100 Index 2 is sent. The default value is set to parameter 60.01 DS100101 Enable This prameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 100 and DataSet 101.Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION 62 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION This group defines the parameter group and index. The default value is set to parameter 60.03 ACDA / Ref2.01 DSET 100&101 ENABLE Unit: Type: NoType Min: 6003 Max: 6003 Def: 6003 Int.05 DS101 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 101 Index 1. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. are sent and the parameter group and index of the signals.01 DSET 101&101 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 802 Int. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62. to where the received values from the ACDA controller).02 DS100 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 100 Index 1 is sent.01 DSET 100&101 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 6002 Max: 6002 Def: 6002 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62.02 ACDA / Ref1. which are transferred from AMC33 to the ACDA – Controller via DDCS CH4. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. received via DDCS CH4. scaling:1 == 1 62.01 ACDA / MAIN CONTROL WORD. The default value is set to parameter 8.06 DS101 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 101 Index 2.01 DSET 100&101 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 6001 Max: 6001 Def: 6001 Int. scaling:1 == 1 260/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 62.

08 DS102103 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 102 and DataSet 103. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.08 DSET 103&103 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. The default value is set to parameter 60. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.12 DS103 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 103 Index 1.09 DS102 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 102 Index 1 is sent.ABB 62. The default value is set to parameter 8.04 ACDA / ACW1.08 DSET 103&104 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.11 DS102 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 102 Index 3 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 261/389 . scaling:1 == 1 62.10 DS102 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 102 Index 2 is sent.07 DS101 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 101 Index 3. scaling:1 == 1 62.01 DSET 101 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 803 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.08 DSET 102&103 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 6004 Max: 6004 Def: 6004 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62.08 DSET 102&103 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.08 DSET 102&103 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.03 AUX STATUS WORD2. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.13 DS103 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 103 Index 2. scaling:1 == 1 62.

scaling:1 == 1 62.17 DS104 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 104 Index 2 is sent. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 62.15 DSET 105&105 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62. scaling:1 == 1 62.14 DS103 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 103 Index 3. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.16 DS104 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 104 Index 1 is sent.19 DS105 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 105 Index 1.I Signal and Parameter Table .08 DSET 103&104 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 262/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.15 DSET 104&105 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.105 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.20 DS105 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 105 Index 2.15 DSET 105&105 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62.18 DS104 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 104 Index 3 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 62.15 DSET 104&105 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.15 DSET 104&amp. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.15 DS104105 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 104 and DataSet 105.

scaling:1 == 1 62.22 DSET 106&107 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.22 DSET 106&107 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.26 DS107 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 107 Index 1.25 DS106 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 106 Index 3 is sent. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0= ENABLED 1= Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.22 DSET 106&107 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 62.24 DS106 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 106 Index 2 is sent.22 DS106107 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 106 and DataSet 107. scaling:1 == 1 62.27 DS107 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 107 Index 2.21 DS105 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 105 Index 3. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 263/389 . NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.ABB 62.23 DS106 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 106 Index 1 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 62.15 DSET 105&105 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62.22 DSET 106&107 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 6012 Int.22 DSET 106&106 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.

32 DS108 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 108 Index 3 is sent. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.29 DSET 108&109 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. The NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.29 DS108109 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 108 and DataSet 109.I Signal and Parameter Table .31 DS108 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 108 Index 2 is sent. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0= ENABLED 1= Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 62. scaling:1 == 1 62. scaling:1 == 1 62.28 DS107 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 107 Index 3.29 DSET 109&109 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.35 DS109 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 109 Index 3. scaling:1 == 1 62. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.30 DS108 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 108 Index 1 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 264/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.29 DSET 109&109 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62.29 DSET 109&109 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.34 DS109 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 109 Index 2. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 62.22 DSET 107&107 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 62. scaling:1 == 1 62.29 DSET 108&109 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.33 DS109 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 109 Index 1. scaling:1 == 1 62.29 DSET 108&109 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.

05 DS111 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 111 Index 1.01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.g. scaling:1 == 1 63.01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. AC80. AC800. Note! Please check also parameter settings in GROUP 18 – UTILITYS and GROUP 97 DIRECT DATASET WRITE. which are transferred from AMC33 to the ACDA – Controller via DDCS Channel 4 (e. AMC33 – Aux. scaling:1 == 1 63.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19.04 DS110 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 110 Index 3 is sent. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 265/389 .01 DS110111 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 110 and DataSet 111.11 ACT VALUE DSxxx I1 if parameter 61.ABB Group 63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION 63 CH4 DATA SET COMMUNICATION This group defines the parameter group and index.10 DISP DATA SET NO SEL is set to 110. scaling:1 == 1 63.02 DS110 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 110 Index 1 is sent. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.Controller). Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19. AC80.g. to where the received values from the ACDA controller (e. 63. received via CH4. Index01). AMC3 – Aux. are sent and the parameter group and index of the signals. AC800. NOTE! · contents of dataset field are written to parameter 61.03 DS110 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 110 Index 2 is sent.Controller).01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.

08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! · contents of dataset field are written to parameter 61.12 DS113 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 113 Index 1.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19.08 DS112103 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 112 and DataSet 113. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.06 DS111 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 111 Index 2.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 63.10 DISP DATA SET NO SEL is set to 113 · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.11 ACT VALUE DSxxx I1 if parameter 61.10 DS112 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 112 Index 2 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 63. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.09 DS112 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 112 Index 1 is sent.13 DS113 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 113 Index 2.11 DS112 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 112 Index 2 is sent. scaling:1 == 1 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE LE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.07 DS111 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 111 Index 3. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 == 1 266/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.01 DSET 110&111 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. Index01). scaling:1 == 1 63.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.

NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.21 DS115 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 115 Index 3. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 267/389 . scaling:1 == 1 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.14 DS113 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 113 Index 3. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0= ENABLED 1= Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.16 DS114 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 114 Index 1 is sent.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.15 DS114105 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 114 and DataSet 115.ABB 63.17 DS114 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 114 Index 2 is sent.08 DSET 112&113 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63. NOTE! · writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63. Index01). scaling:1 == 1 63.20 DS115 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 115 Index 2. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0 ENABLED 1 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.15 DSET 114&115 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.22 DS116117 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 116 and DataSet 117. scaling:1 == 1 63.19 DS115 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 115 Index 1. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.18 DS114 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 114 Index 3 is sent.

31 DS118 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 118 Index 2 is sent. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.28 DS117 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 117 Index 3.25 DS116 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 116 Index 3 is sent. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.I Signal and Parameter Table . scaling:1 == 1 63.29 DS118119 Enable This parameter is used to activate the transmitting and receiving of DatSet 118 and DataSet 119.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.32 DS118 PARWR I3 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 118 Index 3 is sent.29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. NAME VALUE MEANING DISABLED 0= ENABLED 1= Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.26 DS117 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 117 Index 1. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.27 DS117 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 117 Index 2.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 63. scaling:1 == 1 268/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.24 DS116 PARWR I2 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 116 Index 2 is sent.30 DS118 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 118 Index 1 is sent.23 DS116 PARWR I1 Group + Index of the AMC – table where the received value of Data Set 116 Index 1 is sent.22 DSET 116&117 ENABLE Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.

29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 269/389 .ABB 63.01 DATA STORAGE (which denotes Parameter Group19. Index01). scaling:1 == 1 63. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63.33 DS119 PARRD I1 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 119 Index 1.34 DS119 PARRD I2 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 119 Index 2. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. scaling:1 == 1 63.29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. NOTE! • writing to AMC-table index is controlled by parameter 63. Example: The setting 1901 broadcasts 19.35 DS119 PARRD I3 Group + Index of the signal which is read from AMC –table and sent as broadcast message to Data Set 119 Index 3.29 DSET 118&119 ENABLE Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int.

IOEC5 LOC 1 0.01 DI1-7 StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of digital inputs DI1 ...14 . Status of digital Input DI1..I Signal and Parameter Table .0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO5 REM 01 DI1-7 STATUS IOEC5 0100001 DI 6 DI 1 Figure Unit: Type: I Int..0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO5 REM 02 DI8-14 STATUS IOEC5 0100001 DI 13 DI 8 Figure Unit: Type: I Int. scaling: 1 == 1 64.. Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated. DI14 of the optional IOEC 5 board.02 DI8-14StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of digital inputs DI8 ..Signal and Parameter Table ABB Group 64 ACTUAL SIGNALS 64 ACTUAL SIGNALS Measured or calculated values 64. Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated..IOEC5 LOC 1 0. DI7 of the optional IOEC 5 board. Status of digital Input DI8..7 . scaling: 1 == 1 270/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

scaling: 1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 271/389 .6 . Status of digital Output DO1. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated..IOEC5 LOC 1 0. DI7 of the optional IOEC 6 board. scaling: 1 == 1 64..IOEC6 LOC 1 0.ABB 64.03 DI StatusWord IO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 DI1 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 1 – IOEC5 B1 DI2 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 2 – IOEC5 B2 DI3 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 3 – IOEC5 B3 DI4 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 4 – IOEC5 B4 DI5 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 5 – IOEC5 B5 DI6 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 6 – IOEC5 B6 DI7 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 7 – IOEC5 B7 DI8 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 8 – IOEC5 B8 DI9 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 9 – IOEC5 B9 DI10 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 10 – IOEC5 B10 DI11 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 11 – IOEC5 B11 DI12 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 12 – IOEC5 B12 DI13 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 13 – IOEC5 B13 DI14 – IOEC5 Status of the digital input 14 – IOEC5 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.05 DI1-7 StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of digital inputs DI1 ... Status of digital Input DI1..04 DO1-6 StatusIO5 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the optional IOEC 5 board relay outputs.0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO6 REM 05 DI1-7 STATUS IOEC6 0100001 DI 6 DI 1 Figure Unit: Type: I Int.0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO5 REM 04 D01-6 Status IOEC5 0100010 DO6 DO2 Figure Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: 1 == 1 64..7 . Example: DI1 and DI6 are activated.

. Status of digital Output DO1.07 DIStatusWordIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B0 DI1 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 1 – IOEC6 B1 DI2 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 2 – IOEC6 B2 DI3 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 3 – IOEC6 B3 DI4 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 4 – IOEC6 B4 DI5 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 5 – IOEC6 B5 DI6 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 6 – IOEC6 B6 DI7 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 7 – IOEC6 B7 DI8 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 8 – IOEC6 B8 DI9 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 9 – IOEC6 B9 DI10 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 10 – IOEC6 B10 DI11 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 11 – IOEC6 B11 DI12 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 12 – IOEC6 B12 DI13 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 13 – IOEC6 B13 DI14 – IOEC6 Status of the digital input 14 – IOEC6 B14 B15 (Not Used) Unit: Type: I Int.06 DI8–14StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of digital inputs DI8 .08 D01-6StatusIO6 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Status of the optional IOEC 6 board relay outputs. scaling: 1 == 1 64. Status of digital Input DI8. Example: DI8 and DI13 are activated.0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO6 REM 08 D01-6 Status IOEC6 0100010 DO6 DO2 Figure Unit: Type: NoType Int. scaling: 1 == 1 272/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev... scaling: 1 == 1 64..I Signal and Parameter Table .0 rpm 64 ACT SIGNALS IO6 REM 06 DI8-14 STATUS IOEC6 0100001 DI 13 DI 8 Figure Unit: Type: I Int. Example: DO2 and DO6 are activated.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 64.. DI14 of the optional IOEC6 board.IOEC6 LOC 1 0..6 .IOEC6 LOC 1 0.14 .

02 Sm2 AvailableSig Condition to release the grounding isolator. It is active with a high signal ACTIV “1” on IOEC6 – DI10 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. the supervision of the signal can be activated here. scaling:1 == 1 65. If the motor breaker 1 has an available signal. It is active with a high signal ACTIV “1” on IOEC6 – DI04 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. If the motor breaker 3 has an available signal. scaling:1 == 1 65. It is active with a low signal ACTIV “0” on IOEC6 – DI10 3 HIGH Feedback signal SM4 AVAILABLE is available. It is active with a high signal ACTIV “1” on IOEC5 – DI12 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. Group is activated by parameter 38. The available signal is for example not given if the motor breaker 3 is in test position or drawn out. The available signal is for example not given if the motor breaker 1 is in test position or drawn out.07 65. 2 LOW Feedback signal SM2 AVAILABLE is available.ABB Group 65 SYNCHRON BYPASS 65 SYNCHRON BYPASS Synchronized Bypass function for starter. 2 LOW Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is available. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Feedback signal SM4 AVAILABLE is not used.01 Sm1 AvailableSig Condition to release the grounding isolator. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Feedback signal SM3 AVAILABLE is not used.04 Sm4 AvailableSig Condition to release the grounding isolator. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Feedback signal SM2 AVAILABLE is not used. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 273/389 . 2 LOW Feedback signal SM3 AVAILABLE is available. The available signal is for example not given if the motor breaker 4 is in test position or drawn out. It is active with a low signal ACTIV “0” on IOEC6 – DI07 3 HIGH Feedback signal SM3 AVAILABLE is available. It is active with a low signal ACTIV “0” on IOEC6 – DI04 3 HIGH Feedback signal SM2 AVAILABLE is available. If the motor breaker 4 has an available signal. It is active with a high signal ACTIV “1” on IOEC6 – DI07 Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. If the motor breaker 2 has an available signal. 2 LOW Feedback signal SM4 AVAILABLE is available. the supervision of the signal can be activated here. The available signal is for example not given if the motor breaker 2 is in test position or drawn out. scaling:1 == 1 65. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is not used. the supervision of the signal can be activated here.03 Sm3 AvailableSig Condition to release the grounding isolator. It is active with a low signal ACTIV “0” on IOEC5 – DI12 3 HIGH Feedback signal SM1 AVAILABLE is available. the supervision of the signal can be activated here.

scaling:100 == 1 s 65.15 Int. If the motor breaker has not closed within this time a trip will be initiated. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30 s Def: 3 s Int.06 Brk ClosingTimeLim Maximum operating time for closing the motor breakers. If the rel. After the line breaker (Sbpx) has been closed the motor breaker still remains closed for a while until the load of the converter is commutated smoothly to the line.08 MaxMtrCurForSwiSmx DTC: Maximum (relative) motor current for opening motor breaker. scaling:1 == 1 % 274/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. Unit: s Type: R Min: 1 s Max: 30 s Def: 3 s Int. scaling:100 == 1 s 65. If the motor breaker has not opened within this time a trip will be initiated. scaling:1 == 1 65. Scalar Control: The motor breaker is opened directly after receiving the line breaker (Sbpx) closed signal.I Signal and Parameter Table . Unit: % Type: R Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0.07 BrkOpenTimeLimit Maximum operating time for opening the motor breakers. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 ONE Steady state signal: IOEC5 – DI10 high = start synchronizing.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 65. low = stop SIGNAL synchronizing 1 TWO Pulse signal: IOEC5 – DI09 = stop synchronising. motor current is < this parameter the motor breaker is opened. IOEC5 – DI10 = start SIGNAL synchronizing Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int. The setting of this parameter has no influence during scalar control.05 SynOnControlMode Selection of one signal or two signals for starting and stopping the synchronizing sequence.

Scalar Control: The motor breaker is opened directly after receiving the line breaker (Sbpx) closed signal.and line properties.16 ROTOR TIME 112.07 MOTOR NOM COS_FII 112.ABB 65. Hints: 0 %/s is used for tuning.13 RS 112.01 MINIMUM SPEED 20. To set the new motor parameters.10 FluxChange / s DTC: Parameter for adjusting how fast the flux reference (par 27. 1 YES For each motor a different motor parameter set is used.09 DifferentMotorPar Enable different motor parameters for synchronized bypass. Par 27.15 SIGMALS 112. Typing in new parameters is only possible in state “Rdy MCB On”. internal signal) 112.02 All motors have the same nom. Type in the parameter in the usual groups (like if you had only one motor parameter set).02 MAXIMUM SPEED 20.14 LS 112.5 % / s Int.03 Speed Feedback Sel = INTERNAL 30. voltage 99.02 FREQUENCY MAX 29. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. first select the motor by digital inputs 6-8 of IOEC5.03 can be adjusted directly to find out optimal flux reference. Conditions for using different motor parameter sets: Parameter: 99.03 FREQUENCY MIN 99. motor. If motor current is smaller than 40% of rated current change of flux will be automatically reduced.03 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 99.05 MOTOR NOM SPEED 99.01 Motor Therm Prot = No Stored / different parameters: Parameter: 20.19 MECH TIME CONSTANT 112.17 SPEED LIMIT REFERENCE (StartupControl . Unit: % / s Type: R Min: 0 % / s Max: 5 % / s Def: 0. This parameter has to be adjusted to achieve a stable control of the flux because optimal flux reference is depending on ACS1000-. 50.06 MOTOR NOM POWER 99. scaling:100 == 1 % /s MSAI5150 ACS1000 275/389 . The setting of this parameter has no influence during scalar control.04 MAX MOTOR CURRENT 29.23 MOTOR TIME USE VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO Only one motor parameter set is used for all motors.04 All motors have the same nom. freq.03) is changed per second. After the line breaker (Sbpx) has been closed the motor breaker still remains closed for a while until the load of the converter is commutated smoothly to the line: For this the torque is ramped to zero and then the flux reference is changed to have a minimum motor current. scaling:1 == 1 65.

1 Hz / s Int. Change / s Parameter for adjusting how fast the frequency reference is changed per second. Vers. Note! The wiring and mounting is different for Synchrotakt 4 and 5.01 Hz / s Max: 1 Hz / Def: 0. 5 Synchrotakt 5 Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 1 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table . DI3).12 Synchrot. 4 Synchrotakt 4 1 Synchrot. please refer to the actual wiring diagrams for details. when the Synchrotakt gives the command to increase the frequency reference value (IOEC5. scaling:1 == 1 276/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. DI2) or to reduce the frequency reference value (IOEC5.11 Freq.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 65. Unit: Hz / s Type: R Min: 0. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 Synchrot. scaling:100 == 1 Hz s /s 65. Selection of the Synchrotakt version.

07 IN Out e.: 13 DS4 TRANSM PAR (Par. CycleTime = 66.DATA – TRANSMIT FUNCTION The multiple-data-transmit function can be used for cyclically transmitting a selected number (array) of parameter values to an overriding system by using only two data sets.66.04 8 9. parameter 66.05 908 I2 + 9. The interval time of the multiple data transmit function has to be set depending on the cycle time of the overriding system.g. DSWRITE NO4:I2 and DSWRITE NO4:I3. DSWRITE NO5:I2 transmits the corresponding actual value of actual selected parameter. DSWRITE NO5:I3.: 901 1 Start Index n1 In dex 1 COMP SW (R) I1 I1 = I2 DS4 NR OF INDEXES nx 901 I2 66.06 Actual "Value of selected DSx Val3" Parameter Read DS4 PARRD NO4:I3 66.09 DSWRITE NO5.07) Index: 3 Index: 3 Config Error DS4 WRITE CONF ERR 66.15 DS4 PARRD NO4:I3 is cyclically transmitted to DSWRITE NO4:I3 resp.02 DS4 TIME INTERVAL Interval Time x AMC3 PLC e. Group 91 or Group 94.08 Comb Alarm Word 4 Actual "Value of se le cted P arameter" Parameter Read Parameter Group Write Index DS4 PAR ACT VAL Va lue IN Out 66.: 108 DataSet DataSet TRANSMIT RECEIVE DS WRITE NO4 66. If the function is activated the data set DSWRITE NO4:I1 resp.g.g.05) Index: 1 Index: 1 DS4 PAR ACT VAL (Par. The selected DataSet Number can be used only once in the drive system. Note! The update time in the overriding control system (PLC) must be shorter than the total transmission time. Therefore the selected data set number is disabled in Group 63. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 277/389 . In addition the actual value of the selected parameter in parameter 66. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 255 Def: 0 Int. DSWRITE NO5:I1 transmits the actual selected parameter and the data set DSWRITE NO4:I2 resp.01 DSWRITE NO4 or 66.06) Index: 2 Index: 2 DS4 PARRD NO4 : I3 (Par.ABB Group 66 UTILITY 66 UTILITY MULTIPLE . The multiple-data-transmit function is active as soon a valid data set number is set to parameter 66.03 9 Selected Group COUNTER Group e.g.: 8 Actual se lected "Parame ter" Parameter Write COMPARE ADD SW (R) I1 + DS4 TRANSM PAR I1 = I2 OUT IN Out 66.01 DSWRITE NO4 [no.07 DS4 PARRD NO4:I3 resp.08 Figure 66.66.01 DS NO: 13 FBA DS NO: 13 e.] This parameter selects the DataSet number for the indexes DSWRITE NO4:I1.66.: 50 Nr Of Indexes SELECT DS4 START ADDRESS 66.g.01 Comb Fault Word 1 e.

and index in parameter 66. DSWRITE NO5:I2 and DSWRITE NO5:I3.index write protected Unit: Type: PB Int.06 DS4 PAR ACT VAL [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter simultaneously shows the value corresponding to the transmitted (displayed) group no. scaling:1 == 1 66.undefined index . where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.04 DS4 NR OF INDEXES [conn] This parameter specifies the number of indices to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 99 Def: 8 Int. Unit: Type: I Int.09 DSWRITE NO5 [no. Unit: Type: I Min: 101 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. 902…….05 DS4 TRANSM PAR [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter cyclically displays the actual transmitted parameter to dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1. scaling:1 == 10ms 60000ms 66.05 DS4 TRANSM PAR. NOTE! The greater the total numbers of indices the longer the cycle time. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 255 Def: 0 Int. Parameter 66. scaling: 1 == 1 66.o.905 a. 2nd cycle 901. Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. Example: Parameter 66.03 is set to 901. and 01 representing the start index of the transmitted (displayed) parameter.08 DS4WRITE CONF ERR ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Displays the status of the FA dataset write function configuration BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 check parameter 66.illegal format .02 DS4 TIME INTERVAL [ms] This parameter defines the interval time of the multiple data transmit function.illegal index B15 NOT USED . scaling: 1 == 1 66.illegal group . where the indices are incremented by 1 every selected interval time.I Signal and Parameter Table .05 DS4 TRANSM PAR. scaling:1 == 1 278/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.s. Unit: Type: I Int.05 displays: 1st cycle 901.07 Possible errors: . scaling: 1 == 1 66. with 5 representing the number of indices --> Parameter 66.03 Bit value 1: Error in configuration B02 check parameter 66. with 9 representing the group no. The format is (x)xyy. The actual transmitted parameter is displayed in parameter 66.03 Bit value 0: Not configured or configuration OK B01 check parameter 66. Unit: ms Type: R Min: 20ms Max: Def: 50ms Int.05 set to 5. scaling:1 == 1 66. 902……. The format is (x)xyy.905.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 66.03 DS4 START ADDRESS [conn] This parameter selects the start group number & index of the parameter group to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO4:I1.07 DS4 PARRD NO4 This parameter selects the parameter to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO4:I3 cyclically. Note! The integer scaling of each parameter has to be taken into account in the overriding system (PLC).undefined group . scaling:1 == 1 66.] This parameter selects the DataSet number for the indexes DSWRITE NO5:I1. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.

12 DS5 NR OF INDEXES [conn] This parameter specifies the number of indices to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1. scaling:1 == 1 66.12 set to 5.s.11 is set to 901. The actual transmitted parameter is displayed in parameter 66.13 displays: 1st cycle 901. Unit: Type: I Int. with 9 representing the group no.11 DS5 START ADDRESS [conn] This parameter selects the start group number & index of the parameter group to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1. The format is (x)xyy.15 DS5 PARRD NO5 This parameter selects the parameter to be transfer to selected dataset DS WRITE NO5:I3 cyclically. where the indices are incremented by 1 every selected interval time.10 DS5 TIME INTERVAL [ms] This parameter defines the interval time of the multiple data transmit function.905.o. Unit: conn Type: I Min: 0 Max: 25599 Def: 0 Int. Unit: Type: I Int.14 DS5 PAR ACT VAL [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter simultaneously shows the value corresponding to the transmitted (displayed) group no. Parameter 66. 2nd cycle 901. NOTE! The greater the total numbers of indices the longer the cycle time. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.905 a. 902……. and index in parameter 66. scaling: 1 == 1 66. and 01 representing the start index of the transmitted (displayed) parameter. scaling:1 == 1 66. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired parameter.13 DS5 TRANSM PAR [relat] ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter cyclically displays the actual transmitted parameter to dataset DS WRITE NO5:I1.ABB 66. with 5 representing the number of indices --> Parameter 66. 902……. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 279/389 . Unit: ms Type: R Min: 20ms Max: Def: 50ms Int.13 DS5 TRANS PAR. The format is (x)xyy.13 DS5 TRANSM PAR. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 99 Def: 8 Int. Example: Parameter 66. Note! The integer scaling of each parameter has to be taken into account in the overriding system (PLC). Unit: Type: I Min: 101 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 1 == 1 66. scaling:1 == 10ms 60000ms 66.

Selection of dataset is done by parameter 66. scaling:1 == 1 66. scaling: 1 == 1 66. Unit: Type: I Int.20 DSVALUE DEBUG:I3 shows the value of DataSet 100 Value3 Unit: Type: I Min: -32768 Max: 32767 Def: 0 Int.17 DSREAD DEBUG NO.] This parameter selects the dataset to display on the panel.17 DataSet No.17 DSREAD DEBUG NO [no.illegal group . Please check parameter 96. Example: If parameter is set to 100: • the parameter 66.undefined index .11 Bit value 1: Error in configuration B02 check parameter 66. Unit: Type: I Int.VALUE I3.16 DS5WRITE CONF ERR ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Displays the status of the FA dataset write function configuration BIT NAME VALUE MEANING B00 check parameter 66.RECEIVE / TRANSMIT VALUE DISPLAY 66.11 Bit value 0: Not configured or configuration OK B01 check parameter 66.18 DSVALUE DEBUG ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter cyclically displays the value corresponding to the selected DATA SET .20 DS100 : DS119 Figure DATA SET .19 DSVALUE DEBUG ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter cyclically displays the value corresponding to the selected DATA SET .VALUE I2. scaling: 1 == 1 DataSet DSREAD Table DS1 DS READ DEBUG NO 18.18 DSVALUE DEBUG:I1 shows the value of DataSet 100 Value1 • the parameter 66. Selection of dataset is done by parameter 66.xx.17 DSREAD DEBUG NO. Selection of dataset is done by parameter 66. : Pointer DSVALUE DEBUG:I1 DS9 Value 1 18.xx … 66. scaling: 1 == 1 66.15 Possible errors: .illegal format .illegal index B15 NOT USED .VALUE I1.18 DSVALUE DEBUG:I2 DS10 Value 2 18. scaling: 1 == 1 280/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.29 DSREAD CONF ERR if there are no values shown on parameter 66.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 66.20 DSVALUE DEBUG ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY This parameter cyclically displays the value corresponding to the selected DATA SET .undefined group .19 : DSVALUE DEBUG:I3 DS51 Value 3 18.index write protected Unit: Type: PB Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .17 DSREAD DEBUG NO. Unit: Type: I Int.19 DSVALUE DEBUG:I2 shows the value of DataSet 100 Value2 • the parameter 66.

as fibre optic cables are extremely sensitive to dirt. Do not touch the ends with bare hands.ABB Group 70 DDCS CONTROL 70 DDCS CONTROL Parameter settings of the DDCS (Distributed Drives Communication System) communication channels. Figure 70-1 Structure of Fieldbus System (DDCS CH0) 70. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 281/389 . the address must be 1. FCI-Module or AC80 is used through the Module – Bus (adapter TB810). 70.01 CH0 NODE ADDR Node address for channel 0. CAUTION! Handle the fibre optic cable with care.01 16 x hundred number in position 101 17 number + rest of position number : : 112 28 For example: 201 33 DRIENG / Position = 711 : : 212 44 711 Þ 7 x 16 + 11 = 123 701 113 : : Þ 70.Bus The Position can be calculated as follow: Position Par. AC80 & FCI Module .01 = 123 712 124 Figure Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 254 Def: 125 Int. CH0 NODE ADDR and input POSITION in the data base element DRIENG are set according to the following table: AC70. When using the APC2 system. If AC70.

The time count starts. the overriding system automatically sets the communication speed. This value is adjusted through the link including each device in the link.04 CH0 TIMEOUT [ms] The delay time before communication break fault is announced.03 CH0 BAUD RATE Channel 0 communication speed.I Signal and Parameter Table .13 ALARM WORD 5. Unit: Type: I Int.02 CH0 LINK CONTROL DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs.06 CH1 LINK CONTROL ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY DDCS channel 1 intensity control for transmission LED’s.05 CH0 ComLossControl This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in channel 0 (CH0) of the NAMC- board. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 15 Int. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance in the link.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 70. scaling:1 == 1 70. scaling:1==1 70. Otherwise. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 8 Mbit/s 1 4 Mbit/s 2 2 Mbit/s 3 1 Mbit/s Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. scaling: 1 == 1 282/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 2 STOP TORQ The drive will be stopped by torque limit. alarm message CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 7 is set to 1 in 9. 5 CONST The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference SPEED15 (33. Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: 60000 Def: 0 Int. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the timeout supervision function. When the time has lapsed the alarm CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 7 is activated in 9. then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout monitoring is not calculating). scaling:1 == 1 70.02 DECEL TIME. 6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 3 Int. In case of communication fault and parameter selection 6. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance in the link. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 STOP Drive will be stopped by ramping. 3 COAST STOP The drive will be stopped by coasting 4 LAST SPEED The drive is running continuously with the last actual speed.07 FAULT WORD 7. Deceleration time is defined by RAMPING parameter 22.16 CONST SPEED 15). when the link does not update the message.13 ALARM WORD 5. This value is adjusted through the link including each device in the link. scaling:1 == 1 ms 70. In case of communication fault and parameter selection 1…5. fault message CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 10 is set to 1 in 9. Note ! If there are no connections in channel 0. when FCI or FBA communication modules are used. This must be set to 4 Mbit/s.

Please pay attention to the description of parameters 21. at the Master/Follower Application Macro Manual). In some applications both speed control and torque control of the Followers are required.10: MCB closing and opening time limits for master drive! Speed-Controlled Master Speed-Controlled Master Follower Follows the Torque Reference Follower Follows the Speed Reference of the Master of the Master ACS1000 ACS1000 Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3 External n External n Control Signals Control Signals MASTER MASTER ACS1000 ACS1000 2 2 2 2 Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3 FOLLOWER FOLLOWER Follower Fault Follower Fault Master/Follower Link Master/Follower Link Supervision Supervision Figure 70-3 MasterFollower Applications.02 DROOP RATE).ABB MASTER / FOLLOWER MACRO The Master/Follower Application Macro is designed for applications in which the system is run by several ACS1000 drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing. The Master controls the Followers via fibre optic serial communication link. A slight speed difference between the drives is possible (see Figure 70-2). Thanks to the Master/Follower macro the load can be evenly distributed between the drives. In those cases a flying change between speed and torque control can be performed via digital input of the follower (see Chapter 3 – Operation. The external control signals are connected to the Master ACS1000 only. In general: Torque control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower drives are coupled fixedly to each other by gearing. belt etc.09 and 21. The Master station is typically speed controlled and the other drives follow the torque or speed reference of the Master. When both the Master and Followers are speed controlled. chain. drooping is also typically used (Parameter 24. No speed difference between the drives is possible (see Figure 70-2). Schematic Representation MSAI5150 ACS1000 283/389 . a chain etc. Speed control of the Follower should be used when the motor shafts of the Master and the Follower drives are coupled flexibly to each other.

Typically the speed controlled process master drive is configured also to be the communication master. The drive is programmable to be either the master or a follower in the communication.I Signal and Parameter Table . Figure 284/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.Signal and Parameter Table ABB MASTER / FOLLOWER LINK Figure 70-4 Master/Follower Connections (DDCS CH2) MASTER / FOLLOWER LINK CONFIGURATION Channel 2 (CH2) on the AMC board is used for the Master/Follower link between the drives.

Run Enable DI8 .Relay Output DO4 .Run Enable (Process Stop) (Process Stop) (Process Stop) IOEC 2 IOEC 2 IOEC 2 Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 Figure 70-6 Follower ‘Fault Information’ Wiring MSAI5150 ACS1000 285/389 .Relay Output DO4 . Master Follower Follower ACS1000 ACS1000 ACS1000 DO4 .ABB FOLLOWER SUPERVISION The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial Master/Follower link.Relay Output DI8 . Therefore it is highly recommended to separately wire the Follower fault information back to the Master.Run Enable DI8 . the Master drive and the Follower drives. upon a Follower fault. The connection stops both.

MASTER FOLLOW ER Data Set 63 Data Set 63 (FIXED) Value DDCS Link Value 7.25 * NOTE! If Par.22 3.17 resp.09 .70.FO LL TORQ REF FBA CH 0 1 "MASTER" * 2 torq_ref_a 3 122.11 3 3 3.DA TA SE T CO MM OCW "RE AD / WRIT E" Figure 11 .07 CH2 NODE ADDR Node address for channel 2. 122.13 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL 3 DS TORQ REF A 70.21). the alarm message WRONG MF-SIG will be displayed on the Master drive panel and Bit 9 is activated in 9. TORQ REF A directly to motor control (parameter 122.17 .70.0 6 .10 and 70.01 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL 2 DS SPEED REF Speed Reference 70.1 & Par .18 .70.11.17 ..08 . 70.18 . 25.70.24 Figure 12 . If one of the selected signals in the parameters has a wrong format..23 Torque Used Ref P ar. the reference value from Application (Par.0 8 .FOLL TORQ REF & Figure 12 .2 "FO LL OW ER" REF2 OVE RR SYST 3. scaling:1 == 1 286/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.01 SPEED REF resp.70.06 & Par .75. 70.09 1 CH 2 1 3.01 TORQ REF A) will be ignored! Figure 70-7 Follower Signal Selection . 254 Node address for follower drives Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 254 Def: 1 Int.07 CH2 M ASTE R SI GN AL1 DS FCW Follower Control Word 70.Overview 70.0 4 .FO LL SP EED REF & "FOLL OWE R" REF1 OVE RR SYST 3.C H2 M/F MODE "FBA DS ET1 o r FBA DS ET 10" "FOLL OW ER" Par . 70. the direct fast communication link is used to send the SPEED REF resp.2 P ar.I Signal and Parameter Table .21 23. 70.19 DDCS Link Value P ar.Signal and Parameter Table ABB FOLLOWER SIGNAL SELECTION The signals.18 is selected to "MASTER" .CH2 M/F MO DE "FO LL OWER" Figure 11 . VALUE NAME MEANING 1 Master drive 2 . with one or several point to point communication connections between the AMC boards.COM M M OD ULE P ar. This is used in an application.13 ALARM WORD 5.1 & 7.10 2 2 3.70. are selected with Par. which are sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63.FO LL SPEED RE F "MASTER" nr Data Set 1 or 10 122.75.21 Par .19 resp. 23.

ABB 70. DDCS channel 2 (see figure 70-3) is used to send the torque reference.02. If P70.03 Ext Ref1 Select = 12: COMM:REF.MODULE P11. The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial master/follower link. The master is typically in speed control mode and the other drives follow the torque or speed reference of the master. i.05 MF1 PARRD I2 = 11302 (The master sends the speed reference P113.01 Ext1Strt/Stop/Dir = 10: COMM. The master controls the followers via fibre optic serial communication link. both the master drive and the follower drives are stopped upon a follower fault (see figure 70-4).01 ConstantSpeedSel = 5: DI4(SPEED4) P99. all drives coupled to the same machinery should receive the external control signals only via the master. the following parameter settings are applied and stored: P11. typically a droop is applied (P24. If both master and followers are speed controlled. With such a connection. With such a connection. several other parameters are preset in order to achieve a quick default configuration.04 Ext1 MCB Control = 10: COMM.MODULE. chains.13 every 1 ms to the followers via DS41.08 is set to 1 “NOT IN USE” or another value is selected and they can be changed manually.01.08 is set to 2 “MASTER” or to 3 “FOLLOWER”.3) If P70. Speed control should be used should be used for the followers if a slight speed difference between the drives is possible (see figure 70-2).02) P70. P33.if the motor shafts of the master and follower drives are rigidly coupled by gearing. both the master drive and the follower drives are stopped upon a follower fault (see figure 70-4).08 CH2 M/F Mode The master/follower feature is designed for applications with several ACS 1000 drives where motor shafts are via gearing.06 must not be set to COMM. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NOT IN The master / follower link is not active and CH2 is not used for USE communication 2 MASTER The drive is the master in the M/F link and broadcasts via CH2 the contents of data set 41 3 FOLLOWER The drive is the Follower in the M/F link. P11.11 MF1 PARWR I3 = 11306 (writes the torque reference from the master every 1 ms into the torque reference P113.08 is set to 2 “MASTER” the following parameter settings are applied and stored: P127.03 and P12. if the motor shafts of the master and the follower drives are coupled flexibly.08. chain etc.07 every 50 ms to the followers via DS41.06 MF1 PARRD I3 = 313 (The master sends the used torque reference P3.09 MF1 PARWR I1 = 706 (writes the follower control word from the master every 50 ms into the overriding control word P7.05 Ext2 MCB Control = 10: COMM. • P11.02 DROOP RATE).e. Therefore it is highly recommended to provide a separate fault information from the follower back to the master. CH2 communication mode is configured with P70.02 every 1 ms to the followers via DS41.06) P70. The presets allow to operate the master in speed control and the followers in torque control mode. In addition the torque reference and the control bits like start/stop are sent from the master to the follower drives. P11. • Do not control the followers via the control panel or a fieldbus system. P12.3 into SPEED REF. Therefore it is highly recommended to provide a separate fault information from the follower back to the master.06) Note! These parameter settings remain unchanged if P70.MODULE. The external control signals are connected to the master drive only.MODULE P11.01 Acc/Dec 1/2Sel = 5: DI03-IO2.14 ControlMode (DTC) = 2: Torque Ctrl P70.2) P127.e. General rules: • Connect all external control signals to the master drive only.04 MF1 PARRD I1 = 707 (The master sends the follower control word P7.10 MF1 PARWR I2 = 11302 (writes the speed reference from the master every 1 ms into the speed reference P113. MSAI5150 ACS1000 287/389 .06 Ext Ref2 Select = 12: COMM:REF P22. Thanks to the master/follower feature the load can be distributed evenly between the drives.MODULE • Do not change the control location of the follower drive to local. If P70. P12.08 is set to “FOLLOWER”. Torque control should be used for the followers if no speed difference between the drives is possible (see figure 70-2).3 into TORQ REF A and from DS41. speed reference and the follower control word from the master drive to the follower drives via dataset 41. The Follower does not send any feedback data via the serial master/follower link. P11. P12.02 Ext1/Ext2 Select = 8: EXT2 P12.1) P127. i. Torque reference is read from data set DS41.03 Direction = 3: REQUEST. CAUTION! To avoid conflicts. belts etc.02 Ext2Strt/Stop/Dir = 10: COMM.

scaling:1 == 1 Speed-Controlled Master Speed-Controlled Master Follower Follows the Torque Reference Follower Follows the Speed Reference of the Master of the Master ACS1000 ACS1000 Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3 External n External n Control Signals Control Signals MASTER MASTER ACS1000 ACS1000 2 2 2 2 Mains 3 3 Mains 3 3 FOLLOWER FOLLOWER Follower Fault Master/Follower Follower Fault Master/Follower Supervision Link Supervision Link Figure Figure Master Follower Follower ACS1000 ACS1000 ACS1000 DO4 .Run Enable DI8 .Run Enable DI8 .Relay Output DI8 .Relay Output DO4 .Relay Output DO4 .Signal and Parameter Table ABB Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int.I Signal and Parameter Table .Run Enable (Process Stop) (Process Stop) (Process Stop) IOEC 2 IOEC 2 IOEC 2 Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 X12 5 6 X24 3 2 1 Figure 288/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.

Index 01). Index 07). Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 313 Int. when the link does not update the message.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER. scaling:1 == 1 70. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance in the link. scaling:1 == 1 70. The CH2 MASTER SIGNAL 1 is fixed to 707! Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 707 Int.01 SPEED REF (the default value is 2301. Note! This parameter is not used.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER. scaling:1 == 1 ms ms MSAI5150 ACS1000 289/389 . Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 20000 Def: 2301 Int. Example: The setting 707 broadcasts 7.07 FOLLOWER CONTROL WORD (the default value is 707. Unit: ms Type: I Min: 1 ms Max: 60000 Def: 100 ms Int.08 CH2 M/F MODE is set to FOLLOWER. which denotes Parameter Group 7.13 TORQ USED REF (the default value is 313. Note! This parameter is not used. if 70.13 M/F COMM L DELAY [ms] Time delay before a communication break fault is announced. if 70. if 70.12 CH2 LINK CONTROL DDCS CH2 intensity control for transmission LEDs. Note! This parameter is not used. When the time has elapsed the alarm CH2 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 8 is set to 1 in 9.ABB 70. Example: The setting 313 broadcasts 3.09 MF1 PARWR I1 [conn] Group + Index of the signal to be sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63 Index 1 in the Follower drives (control word).11 MF1 PARWR I3 [conn] Group + Index of the signal to be sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63 Index 3 in the Follower drives (torque reference). The time count starts. scaling:1 == 1 70. Index 13).13 ALARM WORD 5. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 8 Int. who denotes Parameter Group 23. Note! If there are no connections in channel 2.10 MF1 PARWR I2 [conn] Group + Index of the signal to be sent as broadcast message to Data Set 63 Index 2 in the Follower drives (speed reference). This value is adjusted through the link including each device in the link. scaling:1 == 1 70. then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout monitoring is not calculating). Example: The setting 2301 broadcasts 23. which denotes actual signal group 3.

07 FAULT WORD 7. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 STOP RAMP Drive will be stopped by ramping.I Signal and Parameter Table . TORQUE 3 COAST The drive will be stopped by coasting STOP 4 LAST SPEED The drive is running continuously with the last actual speed.15 CH3 NODE ADDR Node address for channel 3. scaling:1 == 1 70. scaling:1 == 1 290/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. The start-up and maintenance tools normally use this channel.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 70. 2 STOP The drive will be stopped by torque limit.16 CONST SPEED 15). In case of communication fault and parameter selection 1…5. 6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 3 Int.02 DECEL TIME. 5 CNST SPD15 The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference (33. This value is adjusted through the link including each device in the link. scaling:1 == 1 70. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the communication performance in the link.16 CH3 LINK CONTROL DDCS channel 3 intensity control for transmission LEDs. If CH3 channels of several drives have been connected in a ring or star (using a branching Unit). each one must be given a unique node address. In case of communication fault and parameter selection 6. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 254 Def: 1 Int. fault message CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 10 is set to 1 in 9. Deceleration time is defined by parameter 22. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 15 Int. Note! The new node address becomes valid only on the next AMC3 power-on.13 ALARM WORD 5. alarm message CH0 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 7 is set to 1 in 9.14 CH2 ComLossControl This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in CH2 on the NAMC-03 board.

Examples 70. Unit: Type: B Min: 1 Max: 125 Def: 1 Int.01 PCMCIA board RING Connection AMC3 AMC3 AMC3 CH3 CH3 CH3 STAR Connection AMC3 NDBU .ABB PC CONNECTIONS TO CHANNEL 3 POINT TO POINT Connection AMC3 CH3 NPCM .91. the address must be 1.18 CH4 LINK CONTROL DDCS channel 4 intensity control for transmission LEDs. scaling:1 == 1 70. This value is adjusted through the link including each device in the link. Unit: Type: B Min: 1 Max: 15 Def: 10 Int. . When using the APC2 system.95 or .17 CH4 NODE ADDR Node address for channel 4. scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 291/389 .85 CH3 Branching Unit Card AMC3 CH3 AMC3 CH3 Figure 70 6 Connection AMC33-Board(s) <-> PC (DDCS CH3) . This parameter can be used in special cases to optimise the communication performance in the link.

Signal and Parameter Table ABB 70.I Signal and Parameter Table .16 CONST SPEED 15). VALUE NAME MEANING 1 STOP Drive will be stopped by ramping. The time count starts. Deceleration time is defined by RAMPING parameter 22. scaling:1 == 1 70.20 CH4 TIMEOUT [ms] The delay time before communication break fault is announced.19 CH4 BAUD RATE Channel 4 communication speed. 6 FAULT Drive will be tripped according to “Trip 1b” reaction. When the time has lapsed the alarm CH4 LINK ERR is activated and Bit 7 is activated in 9. Otherwise.02 DECEL TIME. Note ! If there are no connections in channel 4. scaling:1=1 292/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev.13 ALARM WORD 5. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 8 Mbit/s 1 4 Mbit/s 2 2 Mbit/s 3 1 Mbit/s Unit: Type: Enum Min: 0 Max: 3 Def: 1 Int. 3 COAST STOP The drive will be stopped by coasting 4 LAST SPEED The drive is running continuously with the last actual speed. the overriding system automatically sets the communication speed. 2 STOP TORQ The drive will be stopped by torque limit. 5 CONST The drive is running continuously with the constant speed reference SPEED15 (33. when the link does not update the message. Setting this parameter to 0 disables the timeout supervision function. Unit: ms Type: I Min: 0 Max: 60000 Def: 0 Int. when FCI or FBA communication modules are used. scaling:1=1 70. then the value has to be set to 0ms (Timeout monitoring is not calculating). This must be set to 4 Mbit/s. Unit: Type: Enum Min: 1 Max: 6 Def: 3 Int.21 CH4 ComLossControl This parameter defines the action in case of a communication fault in channel 4 (CH4) of the AMC- board.

01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 – DI02 is active. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 0 Int.02 is set to 422 and 72. has to be selected with parameter 72. The format is (x)xyy.03.03 is set to 1.03 STOCommandBitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0…15) of the previous selected signal 72.ABB Group 72 DI FUNCTION SEL 72. scaling: 1 == 1 72.02 STOCommandGrp+Indx A binary signal (i. scaling: 72.17 ArcFaultDetection for the arc protection function b04 b05 b06 b07 b08 b09 b10 b11 b12 b13 b14 b15 NOT USED Unit: Type: I Int.02. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. scaling: MSAI5150 ACS1000 293/389 . BIT NAME VALUE MEANING b00 DI SafeTorqueOff Signal is used in parameter 38. Additionally. the status of DI STO COMMAN (b00) of parameter 72.e.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 – b00 by setting parameter 72. Example: If Par.01 DI FuncSelStatus1 ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY Parameter shows status of the function depending on selected digital input. 72.02 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from. from digital input) is assigned to parameter 72. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. the bit number. which identifies the signal within the status word.14 SafeTrqOffCtrl for the safe torque off command b01 b02 DI Not used/enabled at the moment EmergencyStop b03 DI Arc Detection Signal is used in parameter 38.

09 ArcFltDetBitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0…15) of the previous selected signal 72. scaling: 72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 – b02 by setting parameter 72.06 EmergeStopGrp+Indx A binary signal (i. Example: If Par. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal. the status of DI ARC DETECT (b03) of parameter 72. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. The format is (x)xyy.06. which identifies the signal within the status word. Additionally. 72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 – DI03 is active. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 0 Int.08 is set to 422 and 72. where (x)x is the group and yy is the index of the desired signal.08 ArcFltDetGrp+Indx A binary signal (i. Example: If Par.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 72. which identifies the signal within the status word. the bit number. from digital input) is assigned to parameter 72.06 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.06 is set to 422 and 72.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 – b03 by setting parameter 72. has to be selected with parameter 72. Additionally.01 DI FUNCTION SELECTION STATUS 1 is set to 1 if digital input IOEC2 – DI02 is active. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 30000 Def: 0 Int. scaling: 72. has to be selected with parameter 72. scaling: 294/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. 72. the status of DI EMERGE STOP COMMAND (b02) of parameter 72.I Signal and Parameter Table .09 is set to 1. the bit number. from digital input) is assigned to parameter 72.e.07 is set to 2. scaling: 72.e.08 to the parameter group and index from which the signal is to be taken from.09. Unit: Type: I Min: 0 Max: 15 Def: 0 Int.07 EmergeStopBitNum This parameter specifies the bit number (0…15) of the previous selected signal 72. The format is (x)xyy.08.07.

Each of these modules is given a unique address using by setting the rotating switch to the appropriate value.02 IOEC4 OptionBoard IOEC4 option board selection. IOEC 4 option board increase the numbers of I/Os and release the options where this board is needed. The encoder module NTAC-02 is connected to the AMC3 . The board is given the address 8 by setting the Node-switch to 8 as shown below. The IOEC1 Standard I/O board has permanent address number 2 (node- address-switch set to 2) and IOEC2 Standard I/O board has permanent address number 4 (node- address-switch set to 4). The parameters marked with (O) can only be altered while the ACS1000 is stopped.ABB Group 75 OPTION MODULES 75 OPTION MODULES All IOEC . scaling:1 == 1 MSAI5150 ACS1000 295/389 .board by using DDCS channel 1 (CH1). The board is connected in series with IOEC boards 1 & 2 (IOEC4) on CH1. scaling:1 == 1 75.board by using DDCS channel 5 (CH5). Fieldbus adapter modules are connected to the AMC3 . VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO extension IOEC 3 option board is not activated 1 YES extension IOEC 3 option board is activated 6 Node- switch Figure Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO extension IOEC 4 option board is not activated 1 YES extension IOEC 4 option board is activated 8 Node- switch Figure Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int.boards are connected in a ring to the AMC3 . The board is connected in series with IOEC boards 1 & 2 (IOEC3) on CH1. 75. The board is given the address 6 by setting the Node-switch to 6 as shown below.board by using DDCS channel 0 (CH0). IOEC 3 option board increase the numbers of I/Os and release the options where this board is needed.01 IOEC3 OptionBoard IOEC3 option board selection.

scaling:1 == 1 296/389 3BHS112321 E51 Rev. NAME VALUE MEANING AC FAN 0 AC fan type installed. This is a typical setting for use with an ABB Advant controlled AF100-Bus adapter module (for example APC2.04 COMM MODULE is set to ‘DSET10 xx’.06 Fan(s)TypeSel Fan type selection. Only actual READ signals/parameters can be read from drive. Module is connected the channel CH5. The module is given the address 16 by setting the DIP switches as shown below. Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. FCI. 4 DSET10 The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0) by R/W using DataSets 10 to 39.I Signal and Parameter Table .05 ACDA CommModule This parameter is used if a ACDA is used to communicate with the drive.Signal and Parameter Table ABB 75. Note! If parameter 75. See also Chapter 2 – Fieldbus Control.03 ENCODERLESS DRIVE NTAC-02 pulse encoder module selection. parameter groups 90…95 will be visible. 2 DSET100 The drive is controlled through the communication link (CH4) by using R/W DataSet 100 to 119. NCSA-01). VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO Fieldbus module is not installed. 3 DSET1 The drive is not controlled through the communication link. If parameter 75. 3 DSET100 R The drive is not controlled through the communication link. EC FAN 1 EC fan type installed. 2 DSET1 The drive is controlled through the communication link (channel CH0) by R/W using DataSets 1 to 8. scaling:1 == 1 75. Unit: Type: I Min: 1 Max: 5 Def: 1 Int. scaling:1 == 1 75.04 COMM MODULE is set to ‘DSET1 xx’. AC70.04 FBA CommModule This parameter is used. 5 DSET10 The drive is not controlled through the communication link. scaling:1 == 1 75. only parameter groups 90 and 91 will be visible. VALUE NAME MEANING 1 NO ACDA module is not installed. VALUE NAME MEANING 0 NO extension NTAC-02 module is not activated 1 YES extension NTAC-02 module is activated ON DIP - switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure Unit: Type: B Min: 0 Max: 1 Def: 0 Int. if a FBA module (Field Bus Adapter) or an ABB Advant controller (AF100-Bus)